OM50F42U

User Manual: 2018 Lexus LS 500H Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 528 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Lexus 2018 LS500h Owner's Manual (OM50F42U)

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Pictorial index Search by illustration

For safety

and security

Make sure to read through them

(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)

Vehicle status

information and

indicators

Reading driving-related information

(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)

Before driving Opening and closing the doors and windows,

adjustment before driving

(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)

Driving Operations and advice which are necessary for driving

(Main topics: Starting hybrid system, refueling)

Interior features Usage of the interior features

(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)

Maintenance

and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures

(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)

When trouble

arises

What to do in case of malfunction and emergency

(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)

Vehicle

specifications

Vehicle specifications, customizable features

(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)

For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt and

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Index Search by symptom

Search alphabetically

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information......................................6

Reading this manual.................................... 10

How to search .................................................11

Pictorial index.................................................12

1-1. For safe use

Before driving....................................22

For safe driving..................................23

Seat belts .............................................24

SRS airbags ........................................29

Pop Up Hood ...................................38

Front passenger occupant classifi-

cation system ................................. 40

Exhaust gas precautions.............. 44

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children........................ 45

Child restraint systems ................. 45

1-3. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features.................58

Hybrid system precautions...........61

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system ........................ 66

Alarm....................................................68

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators.....72

Gauges and meters (except F

SPORT models) ............................77

Gauges and meters (F SPORT

models).............................................. 81

Multi-information display.............86

Head-up display ...............................92

Energy monitor/consumption

screen................................................96

3-1. Key information

Keys.................................................... 104

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the

doors and trunk

Doors.................................................108

Trunk....................................................112

Smart access system with push-but-

ton start ............................................119

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats........................................ 128

Power rear seat............................. 135

Driving position memory........... 139

Rear seat position memory........143

Head restraints ...............................144

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and

mirrors

Steering wheel................................147

Inside rear view mirror ............... 148

Outside rear view mirrors......... 149

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and

moon roof

Power windows ...............................151

Moon roof........................................ 153

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle........................ 158

Cargo and luggage...................... 164

Vehicle load limits......................... 166

Trailer towing.................................. 166

1For safety and security

2Vehicle status information and

indicators

3Before driving

4Driving

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Dinghy towing ................................167

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch...............168

EV drive mode ............................... 172

Hybrid transmission.....................174

Turn signal lever.............................180

Parking brake ..................................181

Brake Hold.......................................183

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch............................185

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

............................................................188

Windshield wipers and washer

............................................................190

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap......... 194

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus Safety System+A..............196

Lexus Safety System+ ................203

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System+A)

...........................................................209

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System+)

...........................................................220

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

........................................................... 227

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)........230

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) ....240

RSA (Road Sign Assist)............. 247

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range.........................250

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) .......260

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)

...........................................................265

Intuitive parking assist ................266

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

function.......................................... 273

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)

function...........................................277

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)

..........................................................280

Parking Support Brake function

(static objects)............................ 286

Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles)...........291

Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians)..................... 295

Driving mode select switch .....298

Electronically modulated air sus-

pension.......................................... 299

Driving assist systems ................ 302

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips .......307

Winter driving tips.......................309

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Remote Touch.................................314

Center Display............................... 316

Rear Multi Operation Panel .... 318

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge..........321

5-3. Using the air conditioning system

and defogger

Front automatic air conditioning

system............................................ 323

Rear air conditioning system... 333

Heated steering wheel/seat heat-

ers/seat ventilators................... 336

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ...........................340

5Interior features

4TABLE OF CONTENTS

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features...............343

Trunk features................................348

5-6. Using the other interior features

Other interior features ...............351

Garage door opener..................358

Lexus Enform Safety Connect

...........................................................364

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehi-

cle exterior...................................370

Cleaning and protecting the vehi-

cle interior....................................373

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements.....378

General maintenance................379

Emission inspection and mainte-

nance (I/M) programs............382

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

...........................................................383

Hood..................................................385

Positioning a floor jack...............385

Engine compartment..................387

12-volt battery................................393

Tires ...................................................395

Replacing the tire.........................405

Tire inflation pressure.................408

Wheels...............................................410

Air conditioning filter.................... 411

Electronic key battery.................413

Checking and replacing fuses

............................................................414

Light bulbs.........................................417

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers .................... 420

If your vehicle has to be stopped in

an emergency ............................420

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

...........................................................422

If you think something is wrong

.......................................................... 426

If a warning light turns on or a warn-

ing buzzer sounds......................427

If a warning message is displayed

.......................................................... 437

If you have a flat tire .....................442

If the hybrid system will not start

.......................................................... 443

If you lose your keys.................... 444

If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened .......................................... 445

If the electronic key does not oper-

ate properly................................. 445

If the 12-volt battery is discharged

.......................................................... 447

If your vehicle overheats........... 453

If the vehicle becomes stuck... 457

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,

etc.).................................................460

Fuel information............................470

Tire information .............................472

6Maintenance and care

7When trouble arises

8Vehicle specifications

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

8-2. Customization

Customizable features................481

8-3. Initialization

Items to initialize...........................495

9-1. For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S.

owners ...........................................498

Seat belt instructions for Canadian

owners (in French)....................498

SRS airbag instructions for Cana-

dian owners (in French)..........500

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)...

...........................................................508

Alphabetical Index......................... 511

9For owners

Index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Please note that this manual applies to

all models and explains all equipment,

including options. Therefore, you may

find some explanations for equipment

not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this man-

ual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Lexus policy

of continual product improvement, we

reserve the right to make changes at

any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehi-

cle shown in the illustrations may differ

from your vehicle in terms of color and

equipment.

Approximately five hours after the

hybrid system is turned off, you may

hear sound coming from under the

vehicle for several minutes. This is the

sound of a fuel evaporation leakage

check and, it does not indicate a mal-

function.

A wide variety of non-genuine spare

parts and accessories for Lexus vehi-

cles are currently available in the mar-

ket. You should know that Toyota does

not warrant these products and is not

responsible for their performance,

repair, or replacement, or for any dam-

age they may cause to, or adverse

effect they may have on, your Lexus

vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified

with non-genuine Lexus products.

Modification with non-genuine Lexus

products could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even vio-

late governmental regulations. In addi-

tion, damage or performance

problems resulting from the modifica-

tion may not be covered under war-

ranty.

The installation of a mobile two-way

radio system in your vehicle could

affect electronic systems such as:

-Hybrid system

-Multiport fuel injection sys-

tem/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

-Lexus Safety System+A

-Lexus Safety System+

-Anti-lock brake system

-Vehicle dynamics integrated man-

agement

-SRS airbag system

-Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Lexus

dealer for precautionary measures or

special instructions regarding installa-

tion of a mobile two-way radio system.

High voltage parts and cables on the

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Noise from under vehicle after turn-

ing off the hybrid system

Accessories, spare parts and modifi-

cation of your Lexus

Installation of a mobile two-way radio

system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

hybrid vehicles emit approximately the

same amount of electromagnetic

waves as the conventional gasoline

powered vehicles or home electronic

appliances despite of their electro-

magnetic shielding.

Unwanted noise may occur in the

reception of the mobile two-way radio.

Your Lexus is equipped with several

sophisticated computers that will

record certain data, such as:

-Engine speed

-Electric motor speed (traction

motor speed)

-Accelerator status

-Brake status

-Vehicle speed

-Shift position

-Hybrid battery (traction battery)

status

-Images from the camera sensor

(available only in situations when

sudden inputs occur while driving

[sudden acceleration, etc.], the

pre-collision braking function or the

pre-collision brake assist function

was operating, the Parking Support

Brake function [static objects] was

operating, or your vehicle was

involved in a collision)

The recorded data varies according to

the vehicle grade level and options

with which it is equipped. These com-

puters do not record conversations or

sounds, and only record images out-

side of the vehicle in certain situations.

-Data usage

Lexus may use the data recorded in these

computers to diagnose malfunctions, con-

duct research and development, and

improve quality.

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to

a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or

with the consent of the lessee if the vehi-

cle is leased

• In response to an official request by the

police, a court of law or a government

agency

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is

not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle

owner

-Usage of data collected through

Safety Connect / Lexus Enform

(U.S. mainland only)

If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus

Enform and if you have subscribed to those

services, please refer to the Safety Con-

nect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscrip-

tion Service Agreement for information on

data collected and its usage.

This vehicle is equipped with an event

data recorder (EDR). The main pur-

pose of an EDR is to record, in certain

crash or near crash-like situations, such

as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems

performed. The EDR is designed to

record data related to vehicle dynam-

Vehicle data recordings

Event data recorder

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

ics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or

less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and pas-

senger safety belts were buck-

led/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your

vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situa-

tion occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving condi-

tions and no personal data (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such

as law enforcement, could combine the

EDR data with the type of personally

identifying data routinely acquired

during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, spe-

cial equipment is required, and access

to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In

addition to the vehicle manufacturer,

other parties, such as law enforcement,

that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

-Disclosure of the EDR data

Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in

an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner

(or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is

obtained

• In response to an official request by the

police, a court of law or a government

agency

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

However, if necessary, Lexus may:

• Use the data for research on vehicle

safety performance

• Disclose the data to a third party for

research purposes without disclosing

information about the specific vehicle or

vehicle owner

The SRS airbag, seat belt pretensioner

devices and Pop Up Hood system in

your Lexus contain explosive chemi-

cals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the

airbags, seat belt pretensioners and

Pop Up Hood micro gas generators

left as they are, this may cause an acci-

dent such as fire. Be sure to have the

systems of the SRS airbag, seat belt

pretensioner and Pop Up Hood micro

gas generators removed and disposed

of by a qualified service shop or by

your Lexus dealer before you scrap

your vehicle.

Special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-

ouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may

contain perchlorate. These compo-

nents may include airbag, seat belt pre-

Scrapping of your Lexus

Perchlorate Material

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

tensioners, Pop Up Hood system, and

wireless remote control batteries.

WARNING

■General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive

your vehicle when under the influence of

alcohol or drugs that have impaired your

ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol

and certain drugs delay reaction time,

impair judgment and reduce coordina-

tion, which could lead to an accident that

could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defen-

sively. Anticipate mistakes that other

drivers or pedestrians might make and

be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full

attention to driving. Anything that dis-

tracts the driver, such as adjusting con-

trols, talking on a cellular phone or

reading can result in a collision with

resulting death or serious injury to you,

your occupants or others.

■General precaution regarding chil-

dren’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle, and never allow children to have

or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle

or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is

also a danger that children may injure

themselves by playing with the windows,

the moon roof, or other features of the

vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or

extremely cold temperatures inside the

vehicle can be fatal to children.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Reading this manual

Explains symbols used in this man-

ual.

Symbols in this manual

Symbols Meanings

WARNING:

Explains something that,

if not obeyed, could

cause death or serious

injury to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something that,

if not obeyed, could

cause damage to or a

malfunction in the vehi-

cle or its equipment.

Indicates operating or

working procedures. Fol-

low the steps in numeri-

cal order.

Symbols in illustrations

Symbols Meanings

Indicates the action

(pushing, turning, etc.)

used to operate switches

and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of

an operation (e.g. a lid

opens).

Symbols Meanings

Indicates the component

or position being

explained.

Means Do not, Do not do

this, or Do not let this

happen.

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Searching by name

-Alphabetical index: →P.511

■Searching by installation position

-Pictorial index: →P.12

■Searching by symptom or sound

-What to do if... (Troubleshooting):

→P.508

■Searching by title

-Table of contents: →P.2

How to search

12 Pictorial index

Pictorial index

■Exterior

Doors ......................................................................................................................... P.108

Locking/unlocking............................................................................................................P.108

Opening/closing the side windows.............................................................................P.151

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key................................................P.445

Warning lights/warning messages ................................................................P.427, 437

Trunk............................................................................................................................ P.112

Opening from inside the cabin ......................................................................................P.114

Opening from outside .......................................................................................................P.115

Opening by using the mechanical key ....................................................................P.446

Warning lights/warning messages ................................................................P.427, 437

Outside rear view mirrors....................................................................................P.149

Adjusting the mirror angle............................................................................................. P.149

Folding the mirrors............................................................................................................P.150

Driving position memory................................................................................................ P.139

Defogging the mirrors....................................................................................................P.323

Windshield wipers ..................................................................................................P.190

Pictorial index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Precautions for winter season.....................................................................................P.309

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)*.................................................P.327

Precautions for car wash.................................................................................................P.371

Fuel filler door..........................................................................................................P.194

Refueling method .............................................................................................................. P.194

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity...........................................................................................P.461

Tires............................................................................................................................P.395

Tire size/inflation pressure ............................................................................... P.395, 466

Winter tires/tire chains ..................................................................................................P.309

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system..............................................P.395

Coping with flat tires........................................................................................................P.442

Hood ......................................................................................................................... P.385

Opening ...............................................................................................................................P.385

Engine compartment cover ........................................................................................ P.388

Engine oil..............................................................................................................................P.462

Coping with overheating...............................................................................................P.453

Warning messages ..........................................................................................................P.437

Headlights/cornering lights ................................................................................P.185

Parking lights/daytime running lights...............................................................P.185

Turn signal lights..................................................................................................... P.180

Tail lights ....................................................................................................................P.185

Stop lights

Hill-start assist control ....................................................................................................P.303

License plate lights .................................................................................................P.185

Back-up lights

Changing the shift position to R....................................................................................P.174

Side marker lights...................................................................................................P.185

*:If equipped

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P.417)

14 Pictorial index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Instrument panel

Power switch ............................................................................................................P.168

Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes..................................................P.168

Emergency stop of the hybrid system......................................................................P.420

When the hybrid system will not start ......................................................................P.443

Warning messages ..........................................................................................................P.437

Shift lever................................................................................................................... P.174

Changing the shift position.............................................................................................P.176

Precautions for towing ...................................................................................................P.422

Meters................................................................................................................... P.77, 81

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light............P.77, 79, 81, 85

Warning lights/indicator lights ...................................................................................... P.72

When a warning light turns on .................................................................................... P.427

Multi-information display.......................................................................................P.86

Display......................................................................................................................................P.86

Energy monitor..................................................................................................................... P.97

When a warning messages is displayed..................................................................P.437

Pictorial index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Parking brake switch ..............................................................................................P.181

Applying/releasing the parking brake........................................................................P.181

Precautions for winter season......................................................................................P.310

Warning buzzer/messages..........................................................................................P.437

Turn signal lever ..................................................................................................... P.180

Headlight switch......................................................................................................P.185

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights...........................P.185

AHB (Automatic High Beam)......................................................................................P.188

Windshield wiper and washer switch................................................................P.190

Usage......................................................................................................................................P.190

Adding washer fluid.........................................................................................................P.392

Warning messages ..........................................................................................................P.437

Emergency flasher switch .................................................................................. P.420

Hood lock release lever...................................................................................... P.385

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch...................................................... P.147

Adjustment............................................................................................................................P.147

Driving position memory................................................................................................ P.139

Air conditioning system ...................................................................................... P.323

Usage.....................................................................................................................................P.323

Rear window defogger...................................................................................................P.323

Audio system*

Brake hold switch....................................................................................................P.183

Trunk opener main switch .....................................................................................P.118

*: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

16 Pictorial index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Switches

HUD (Head-up display) switch*1..........................................................................P.92

Camera switch*1, 2

Instrument panel light control switches .....................................................P.79, 85

“ODO TRIP” switch .........................................................................................P.79, 85

VSC OFF switch.................................................................................................... P.304

Snow mode switch .................................................................................................. P.177

Driving mode select switch................................................................................ P.298

Trunk opener switch................................................................................................ P.114

Fuel filler door opener switch..............................................................................P.195

*1: If equipped

*2: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Pictorial index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Position memory buttons......................................................................................P.139

Mode change button .............................................................................................P.130

Window lock switch ...............................................................................................P.153

Outside rear view mirror switches....................................................................P.149

Door lock switches ..................................................................................................P.110

Power window switches.........................................................................................P.151

Rear door sunshade switches*.......................................................................... P.355

*:If equipped

Meter control switches ...........................................................................................P.87

Paddle shift switches..............................................................................................P.178

18 Pictorial index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Phone switch*1

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch*2 ................................................................. P.230

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch*2.............................................................. P.240

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch ..................................................................P.254

Cruise control switches ...................................................................................... P.250

Audio remote control switches*1

Talk switch*1

*1: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

*2: If equipped

Remote Touch*1.......................................................................................................P.314

Seat switch ................................................................................................................P.129

Rear sunshade switch*2 .......................................................................................P.356

EV drive mode switch ............................................................................................ P.172

Vehicle height adjustment switch*2 .................................................................P.299

P position switch ...................................................................................................... P.176

*1: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

*2: If equipped

Pictorial index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Interior

SRS airbags.................................................................................................................P.29

Floor mats....................................................................................................................P.22

Front seats.................................................................................................................P.128

Head restraints........................................................................................................P.144

Seat belts .....................................................................................................................P.24

Inside lock buttons...................................................................................................P.110

Console box.............................................................................................................P.346

Cup holders .............................................................................................................P.345

Assist grips .............................................................................................................. P.352

Coat hooks.............................................................................................................. P.352

Rear Multi Operation Panel*1 ............................................................................P.318

Rear seat entertainment system*1, 2

*1: If equipped

*2: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

20 Pictorial index

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Ceiling

Moon roof switches................................................................................................P.153

Personal lights..........................................................................................................P.341

“SOS” button*.........................................................................................................P.364

Auxiliary box............................................................................................................P.347

Vanity mirrors .........................................................................................................P.354

Sun visors..................................................................................................................P.354

Door-linked interior light switch ........................................................................P.341

Inside rear view mirror ..........................................................................................P.148

Garage door opener buttons............................................................................ P.358

Interior light ..............................................................................................................P.341

*:If equipped

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.................................22

For safe driving.............................. 23

Seat belts ..........................................24

SRS airbags .................................... 29

Pop Up Hood ................................38

Front passenger occupant classifi-

cation system ..............................40

Exhaust gas precautions........... 44

1-2. Child safety

Riding with children..................... 45

Child restraint systems .............. 45

1-3. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features..............58

Hybrid system precautions....... 61

1-4. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system ..................... 66

Alarm.................................................68

22 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-1.For safe use

Use only floor mats designed specifi-

cally for vehicles of the same model

and model year as your vehicle. Fix

them securely in place onto the carpet.

1Insert the retaining hooks (clips)

into the floor mat eyelets.

2Turn the upper knob of each retain-

ing hook (clip) to secure the floor

mats in place.

Always align the marks .

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips)

may differ from that shown in the illustra-

tion.

Before driving

Observe the following before start-

ing off in the vehicle to ensure

safety of driving.

Installing floor mats

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s

floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with

the pedals while driving. An unexpect-

edly high speed may result or it may

become difficult to stop the vehicle. This

could lead to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

■When installing the driver’s floor mat

●Do not use floor mats designed for

other models or different model year

vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genu-

ine floor mats.

●Only use floor mats designed for the

driver’s seat.

●Always install the floor mat securely

using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-

vided.

●Do not use two or more floor mats on

top of each other.

●Do not place the floor mat bot-

tom-side up or upside-down.

■Before driving

●Check that the floor mat is securely

fixed in the correct place with all the

provided retaining hooks (clips). Be

especially careful to perform this

check after cleaning the floor.

●With the hybrid system stopped and

the shift position in P, fully depress

each pedal to the floor to make sure it

does not interfere with the floor mat.

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

Adjust the angle of the seatback so

that you are sitting straight up and

so that you do not have to lean for-

ward to steer. (→P.128)

Adjust the seat so that you can

depress the pedals fully and so that

your arms bend slightly at the

elbow when gripping the steering

wheel. (→P.128)

Lock the head restraint in place

with the center of the head restraint

closest to the top of your ears.

(→P.144)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(→P.24)

Make sure that all occupants are wear-

ing their seat belts before driving the

vehicle. (→P.24)

Use a child restraint system appropri-

ate for the child until the child becomes

large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belt. (→P.45)

Make sure that you can see backward

clearly by adjusting the inside and out-

side rear view mirrors properly.

(→P.148, 149)

For safe driving

For safe driving, adjust the seat and

mirror to an appropriate position

before driving.

Correct driving posture

WARNING

■For safe driving

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●Do not adjust the position of the

driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose

control of the vehicle.

●Do not place a cushion between the

driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct pos-

ture from being achieved, and reduce

the effectiveness of the seat belt and

head restraint.

●Do not place anything under the front

seats.

Objects placed under the front seats

may become jammed in the seat

tracks and stop the seat from locking in

place. This may lead to an accident

and the adjustment mechanism may

also be damaged.

●Always observe the legal speed limit

when driving on public roads.

●When driving over long distances, take

regular breaks before you start to feel

tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while

driving, do not force yourself to con-

tinue driving and take a break immedi-

ately.

Correct use of the seat belts

Adjusting the mirrors

24 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are

wearing their seat belts before driv-

ing the vehicle.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

■Wearing a seat belt

●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat

belt.

●Always wear a seat belt properly.

●Each seat belt should be used by one

person only. Do not use a seat belt for

more than one person at once, includ-

ing children.

●Lexus recommends that children be

seated in the rear seat and always use

a seat belt and/or an appropriate child

restraint system.

●To achieve a proper seating position,

do not recline the seat more than nec-

essary. The seat belt is most effective

when the occupants are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats.

●Do not wear the shoulder belt under

your arm.

●Always wear your seat belt low and

snug across your hips.

■Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (→P.25)

Women who are pregnant should posi-

tion the lap belt as low as possible over

the hips in the same manner as other

occupants, extending the shoulder belt

completely over the shoulder and avoid-

ing belt contact with the rounding of the

abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not

only the pregnant woman, but also the

fetus could suffer death or serious injury

as a result of sudden braking or a colli-

sion.

■People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (→P.25)

■When children are in the vehicle

→P.53

■Seat belt damage and wear

●Do not damage the seat belts by allow-

ing the belt, plate, or buckle to be

jammed in the door.

●Inspect the seat belt system periodi-

cally. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt

until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts

cannot protect an occupant from

death or serious injury.

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

-Extend the shoulder belt so that it

comes fully over the shoulder, but

does not come into contact with the

neck or slide off the shoulder.

-Position the lap belt as low as possi-

ble over the hips.

-Adjust the position of the seatback.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat.

-Do not twist the seat belt.

■Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were princi-

pally designed for persons of adult size.

●Use a child restraint system appropriate

for the child, until the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the vehicle’s

seat belt. (→P.45)

●When the child becomes large enough to

properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, fol-

low the instructions regarding seat belt

usage. (→P.24)

■Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened

securely because they are not long enough,

a personalized seat belt extender is avail-

able from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

WARNING

●Ensure that the belt and plate are

locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function cor-

rectly, immediately contact your Lexus

dealer.

●Replace the seat assembly, including

the belts, if your vehicle has been

involved in a serious accident, even if

there is no obvious damage.

●Do not attempt to install, remove,

modify, disassemble or dispose of the

seat belts. Have any necessary repairs

carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inap-

propriate handling may lead to incor-

rect operation.

Correct use of the seat belts

WARNING

■Using a seat belt extender

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

●Do not wear the seat belt extender if

you can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

●Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint system

because the belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, increasing

the risk of death or serious injury in the

event of an accident.

●The personalized extender may not be

safe on another vehicle, when used by

another person, or at a different seat-

ing position other than the one origi-

nally intended.

26 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1To fasten the seat belt, push the

plate into the buckle until a click

sound is heard.

2To release the seat belt, press the

release button .

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it.

■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sud-

den stop or on impact. It may also lock if you

lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy

motion will allow the belt to extend so that

you can move around fully.

■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-

pletely extended and then retracted even

slightly, the belt is locked in that position and

cannot be extended. This feature is used to

hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.

To free the belt again, fully retract the belt

and then pull the belt out once more.

(→P.45)

The front seat belt buckles move out-

ward automatically for easier access.

When entering the vehicle

When a front door is opened, the seat

belt buckle for the corresponding seat

will move outward automatically. The

buckle will retract automatically after

the plate is inserted and locked to the

buckle.

When exiting the vehicle (driver’s

seat only)

If the power switch is turned off when

the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the

driver’s seat belt buckle will move out-

ward. The buckle will retract automati-

cally when the driver’s seat belt is

released.

*: If equipped

■Easy Access Buckle

●If the seat belt buckle is not latched when

it is in the outward position, it will return to

its original position after a certain amount

of time.

●If an occupant exits the vehicle and leaves

the front door open and then enters the

vehicle again, the seat belt buckle will not

operate until the door is closed and then

opened again.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

NOTICE

■When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on

the buckle release button on the

extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle

interior and the extender itself.

Fastening and releasing the seat

belt

Easy Access Buckle (front

seats)*

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

1Push the seat belt shoulder anchor

down while pressing the release

button .

2Push the seat belt shoulder anchor

up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as

needed until you hear a click.

The pretensioners help the seat belts to

quickly restrain the occupants by

retracting the seat belts when the vehi-

cle is subjected to certain types of

severe frontal or side collision or a

vehicle rollover.

The pretensioners do not activate in the

event of a minor frontal impact, a minor

side impact or a rear impact.

■Replacing the belt after the preten-

sioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple colli-

sions, the pretensioner will activate for the

first collision, but will not activate for the

second or subsequent collisions.

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder

anchor height (front seats)

WARNING

■Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of your

shoulder. The belt should be kept away

from your neck, but not falling off your

shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce

the amount of protection in an accident

and cause death or serious injuries in the

event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or

accident.

Seat belt pretensioners (front

and outboard rear seats)

WARNING

■Seat belt pretensioners

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

28 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or

higher, the seat belts will retract slightly

to remove any slack.

If the system determines that a collision

is unavoidable, the front seat belts will

retract before the collision. (→P.210)

■Pre-collision seat belts with comfort

function

A motor sound may be heard when a front

seat belt is released or a front door is

opened. This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

WARNING

●Do not place anything, such as a cush-

ion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s

weight, which prevents the sensor

from detecting the passenger’s weight

properly. As a result, the seat belt pre-

tensioner for the front passenger’s seat

may not activate in the event of a colli-

sion.

●If the pretensioner has activated, the

SRS warning light will come on. In that

case, the seat belt cannot be used

again and must be replaced at your

Lexus dealer.

Pre-collision seat belts with com-

fort function (front seats of vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety

System+A)

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

■Location of the SRS airbags

SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from

impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS front side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS rear side airbags

Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

SRS curtain shield airbags

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe

impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together

with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS airbag system

30 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehi-

cle rollover

SRS seat cushion airbags (if equipped)

Can help restrain the power rear seat occupants

■SRS airbag system components

Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)

Side impact sensors (front door)

Knee airbags

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbags

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights

Front side airbags

Side impact sensors (front)

SRS warning light

Rear side airbags

Seat belt pretensioners

Driver airbag

Seat cushion airbags (if equipped)

Rear seat belt buckle switches (if equipped)

Side impact sensors (rear)

Driver’s seat position sensor

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Airbag sensor assembly

Front impact sensors

Pop Up Hood computer assembly

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US

motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU)

controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc.

shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash

severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in

the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of

the occupants.

■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

●Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may

be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the

extremely high speed deployment (infla-

tion) by hot gases.

●A loud noise and white powder will be

emitted.

●Parts of the airbag module (steering

wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as

well as the seats, parts of the front and

rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot

for several minutes. The airbag itself may

also be hot.

●The windshield may crack.

●The emergency flashers will be turned on

automatically. (→P.420)

●For Lexus Enform Safety Connect sub-

scribers, if any of the following situations

occur, the system is designed to send an

emergency call to the response center,

notifying them of the vehicle’s location

(without needing to push the “SOS” but-

ton) and an agent will attempt to speak

with the occupants to ascertain the level

of emergency and assistance required. If

the occupants are unable to communi-

cate, the agent automatically treats the

call as an emergency and helps to dis-

patch the necessary emergency services.

(→P.364)

• An SRS airbag is deployed.

• A seat belt pretensioner is activated.

• The vehicle is involved in a severe

rear-end collision.

■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS

front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags)

●The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cush-

ion airbags will deploy in the event of an

impact that exceeds the set threshold

level (the level of force corresponding to

an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30

km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall

that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher in the following situa-

tions:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a

parked vehicle or sign pole, which can

move or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride

collision, such as a collision in which the

front of the vehicle underrides, or goes

under, the bed of a truck

●The SRS front airbags for the front pas-

senger will not activate if there is no pas-

senger sitting in the front passenger seat.

However, the SRS front airbags for the

front passenger may deploy if luggage is

put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccu-

pied.

●The SRS seat cushion airbags on the rear

seat will not operate if the occupant is not

wearing a seat belt.

■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS

side and curtain shield airbags)

●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags

will deploy in the event of an impact that

exceeds the set threshold level (the level

32 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

of force corresponding to the impact

force produced by an approximately

3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with

the vehicle cabin from a direction per-

pendicular to the vehicle orientation at an

approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 -

30 km/h]).

●Both SRS curtain shield airbags may

deploy in the event of a severe side colli-

sion.

●Both SRS curtain shield airbags will

deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

●Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also

deploy in the event of a severe frontal col-

lision.

■Conditions under which the SRS air-

bags may deploy (inflate), other than a

collision

The SRS front airbags, SRS curtain shield

airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may

also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the

underside of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

●Landing hard or falling

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also

deploy under the situations shown in the

illustration.

●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

■Types of collisions that may not deploy

the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags/SRS

seat cushion airbags)

The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion

airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle

is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls

over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal

collision. But, whenever a collision of any

type causes sufficient forward deceleration

of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front

airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may

occur.

●Collision from the side

●Collision from the rear

●Vehicle rollover

■Types of collisions that may not deploy

the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain

shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags

may not activate if the vehicle is subjected

to a collision from the side at certain angles,

or a collision to the side of the vehicle body

other than the passenger compartment.

●Collision from the side to the vehicle

body other than the passenger compart-

ment

●Collision from the side at an angle

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

The SRS side airbags do not generally

inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or

rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved

in a low-speed side collision.

●Collision from the front

●Collision from the rear

●Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not gen-

erally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a

rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if

it is involved in a low-speed side or

low-speed frontal collision.

●Collision from the rear

●Pitching end over end

■When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will

require inspection and/or repair. Contact

your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

●Any of the SRS airbags have been

inflated.

●The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause the

SRS front airbags and SRS cushion air-

bags to inflate.

●A portion of a door or its surrounding

area is damaged, deformed or has had a

hole made in it, or the vehicle was

involved in an accident that was not

severe enough to cause the SRS side and

curtain shield airbags to inflate.

●The pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard near the front passenger air-

bag or lower portion of the instrument

panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise

damaged.

●Vehicles with power rear seat: The seat

cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or

otherwise damaged.

34 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●The surface of the seats with the side air-

bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise

damaged.

●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars

or roof side rail garnishes (padding) con-

taining the curtain shield airbags inside is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions

regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

●The driver and all passengers in the

vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental

devices to be used with the seat belts.

●The SRS driver airbag deploys with

considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the

driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since

the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the

first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,

placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from

your driver airbag provides you with a

clear margin of safety. This distance is

measured from the center of the steering

wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less

than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can

change your driving position in several

ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as

you can while still reaching the pedals

comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many

drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250

mm) distance, even with the driver seat

all the way forward, simply by reclining

the back of the seat somewhat. If

reclining the back of your seat makes it

hard to see the road, raise yourself by

using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or

raise the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt

it downward. This points the airbag

toward your chest instead of your head

and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recom-

mended by NHTSA above, while still

maintaining control of the foot pedals,

steering wheel, and your view of the

instrument panel controls.

●If the seat belt extender has been con-

nected to the front seat belt buckles

but the seat belt extender has not also

been fastened to the latch plate of the

seat belt, the SRS front airbags will

judge that the driver and front passen-

ger are wearing the seat belt even

though the seat belt has not been con-

nected. In this case, the SRS front air-

bags may not activate correctly in a

collision, resulting in death or serious

injury in the event of a collision. Be

sure to wear the seat belt with the seat

belt extender.

●The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury

especially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passen-

ger seat should be as far from the air-

bag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

●Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed or

seriously injured by a deploying airbag.

An infant or child who is too small to

use a seat belt should be properly

secured using a child restraint system.

Lexus strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in the

rear seats of the vehicle and properly

restrained. The rear seats are safer for

infants and children than the front pas-

senger seat. (→P.45)

●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or

lean against the dashboard.

●Do not allow a child to stand in front of

the SRS front passenger airbag unit or

sit on the knees of a front passenger.

●Do not allow the front seat occupants

to hold items on their knees.

36 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

●Do not lean against the door, the roof

side rail or the front, side and rear pil-

lars.

●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the

passenger seats toward the door or

put their head or hands outside the

vehicle.

●Do not attach anything to or lean any-

thing against areas such as the dash-

board, steering wheel pad and lower

portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles

when the SRS driver, front passenger

and knee airbags deploy.

●Do not attach anything to areas such

as a door, windshield, side windows,

front or rear pillar, roof side rail and

assist grip.

●Do not hang coat hangers or hard

objects on the coat hooks. All of these

items could become projectiles and

may cause death or serious injury,

should the SRS curtain shield airbags

deploy.

●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where

the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be

sure to remove it.

●Do not use seat accessories which

cover the parts where the SRS side air-

bags inflate as they may interfere with

inflation of the SRS airbags. Such

accessories may prevent the side air-

bags from activating correctly, disable

the system or cause the side airbags to

inflate accidentally, resulting in death

or serious injury.

●Do not strike or apply significant levels

of force to the area of the SRS airbag

components or the front doors. Doing

so can cause the SRS airbags to mal-

function.

●Do not touch any of the component

parts immediately after the SRS air-

bags have deployed (inflated) as they

may be hot.

●If breathing becomes difficult after the

SRS airbags have deployed, open a

door or window to allow fresh air in, or

leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so.

Wash off any residue as soon as possi-

ble to prevent skin irritation.

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

●If the areas where the SRS airbags are

stored, such as the steering wheel pad

and front and rear pillar garnishes are

damaged or cracked, have them

replaced by your Lexus dealer.

●Do not place anything, such as a cush-

ion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s

weight, which prevents the sensor

from detecting the passenger’s weight

properly. As a result, the SRS front air-

bags for the front passenger may not

deploy in the event of a collision.

■Modification and disposal of SRS air-

bag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or per-

form any of the following modifications

without consulting your Lexus dealer.

The SRS airbags may malfunction or

deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing

death or serious injury.

●Installation, removal, disassembly and

repair of the SRS airbags

●Repairs, modifications, removal or

replacement of the steering wheel,

instrument panel, dashboard, seats or

seat upholstery, front, side and rear pil-

lars, roof side rails, front door panels,

front door trims or front door speakers

●Modifications to the front door panel

(such as making a hole in it)

●Repairs or modifications of the front

fender, front bumper, or side of the

occupant compartment

●Installation of a grille guard (bull bars,

kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,

winches or roof luggage carrier

●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspen-

sion system

●Installation of electronic devices such

as mobile two-way radios and CD

players

●Modifications to your vehicle for a per-

son with a physical disability

38 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Sensors

Hood

Lifters

■Pop Up Hood precautions

●Before scrapping your vehicle, make sure

to contact your Lexus dealer.

●The Pop Up Hood system cannot be

reused once it has operated. Have it

replaced by your Lexus dealer.

■Pop Up Hood operational conditions

The Pop Up Hood will operate when the

vehicle detects an impact such as the fol-

lowing:

●The front bumper detects a frontal impact

equivalent to or greater than that of a

pedestrian while the vehicle being driven

within the operational speed range of

approximately 16 to 34 mph (25 to 55

km/h). (The system is operated by an

impact of threshold level or greater, even

in the case of a minor collision that may

not leave a trace on the front bumper.

Also, depending on the impact condi-

tions or vehicle speed, the system may

operate by a collision with a light or small

object or a small animal.)

●In other situations, such as the following

the system may operate when an impact

is applied to the lower part of the vehicle

or front bumper:

• Colliding with a curb

• Falling into a deep hole

•Landing hard

• Hitting the slope of a parking lot, an

undulating road, a protruding object or

falling object

■Conditions under which the Pop Up

Hood may not operate properly

●If a pedestrian collides with the right or

left corner of the front bumper or the side

of the vehicle. As such impacts may be

difficult to detect, the system may not

operate.

●If the vehicle speed is not detected cor-

rectly, such as if the vehicle is sliding side-

ways, the system may not operate

properly.

■Conditions under which the Pop Up

Hood will not operate

The Pop Up Hood will not operate in the

following situations:

●Colliding with a lying person

●A frontal impact applied to the front

bumper while driving at speeds outside

of the operational speed range

●A side impact or rear impact

●A vehicle rollover (In some accident situ-

ations, the Pop Up Hood may operate.)

Pop Up Hood

In the event of a frontal collision

with a body, such as a pedestrian,

the Pop Up Hood system raises the

hood to reduce the possibility of a

serious impact to the pedestrian’s

head area by adding clearance to

the engine compartment.

When the sensors located at the

back of the front bumper detect a

frontal impact with a body, such as a

pedestrian, which meets or

exceeds the threshold level while

the vehicle is being driven within

the operational speed range, the

system operates.

System components

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

■When the Pop Up Hood is operated

●Do not pull the hood lock release lever.

Doing so after the Pop Up Hood has

operated will further raise the hood

and may cause an injury. Do not drive

with the hood raised, as doing so may

block the driver’s vision, possibly caus-

ing an accident.

●Do not forcibly push down the hood.

As the popped up hood cannot be

lowered by hand, doing so may deform

the hood or cause an injury.

●If the Pop Up Hood has operated, have

it replaced by your Lexus dealer. If the

Pop Up Hood has operated, stop the

vehicle in a safe place and contact

your Lexus dealer.

●Do not touch the lifters immediately

after the Pop Up Hood has operated,

as the lifters may be hot and burn you.

NOTICE

■Pop Up Hood precautions

●Make sure to close the hood before

driving, as the system may not operate

properly if the hood is not fully closed.

●Make sure that all 4 tires are of the

specified size and inflated to the speci-

fied tire pressure. If tires of a different

size are used, the system may not

operate properly.

●If something has hit the area around

the front bumper, the sensors may be

damaged even if the Pop Up Hood has

not operated. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

●Do not remove or repair the parts or

wiring of the Pop Up Hood, as doing

so may cause accidental operation or

prevent the system from operating

properly. If repair or replacement is

necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not remove such components as

the front bumper, hood or suspension,

or replace them with non-genuine

parts, as doing so may prevent the sys-

tem from operating properly.

●Do not install anything to the front

bumper or hood, as doing so may pre-

vent the sensors from detecting an

impact correctly and prevent the sys-

tem from operating properly.

●Do not close the hood with force or

apply load to the lifters, as doing so

may damage the lifters and prevent the

system from operating properly.

●Do not modify the suspension, as

changes made to the vehicle height

may prevent the system from operat-

ing properly.

40 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

SRS warning light

For the U.S.A.

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

For Canada

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system.

This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or

deactivates the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag.

System components

WARNING

■Front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system precautions

Observe the following precautions

regarding the front passenger occupant

classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

●Wear the seat belt properly.

●Make sure the front passenger’s seat

belt plate has not been left inserted

into the buckle before someone sits in

the front passenger seat.

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indica-

tor light is not illuminated when using

the seat belt extender for the front pas-

senger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator light is illuminated, discon-

nect the extender tongue from the seat

belt buckle, and reconnect the seat

belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender

after making sure the “AIR BAG ON”

indicator light is illuminated. If you use

the seat belt extender while the “AIR

BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-

nated, the SRS airbags for the front

passenger will not activate, which

could cause death or serious injury in

the event of a collision.

●Do not apply a heavy load to the front

passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback pocket).

●Do not put weight on the front passen-

ger seat by putting your hands or feet

on the front passenger seat seatback

from the rear passenger seat.

●Do not let a rear passenger lift the

front passenger seat with their feet or

press on the seatback with their legs.

●Do not put objects under the front pas-

senger seat.

●Do not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a rear

seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,

which indicates that the SRS airbags

for the front passenger will not activate

in the event of a severe accident. If the

seatback touches the rear seat, return

the seatback to a position where it

does not touch the rear seat. Keep the

front passenger seatback as upright as

possible when the vehicle is moving.

Reclining the seatback excessively

may lessen the effectiveness of the

seat belt system.

●If an adult sits in the front passenger

seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light

is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator is illuminated, ask the passen-

ger to sit up straight, well back in the

seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat

belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator still remains illumi-

nated, either ask the passenger to

move to the rear seat, or if that is not

possible, move the front passenger

seat fully rearward.

●When it is unavoidable to install a for-

ward-facing child restraint system on

the front passenger seat, install the

child restraint system on the front pas-

senger seat in the proper order.

(→P.46)

●Do not modify or remove the front

seats.

●Do not kick the front passenger seat or

subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,

the SRS warning light may come on to

indicate a malfunction of the front pas-

senger occupant classification system.

In this case, contact your Lexus dealer

immediately.

●Child restraint systems installed on the

rear seat should not contact the front

seatbacks.

●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a

cushion and seat cover, that covers the

seat cushion surface.

●Do not modify or replace the uphol-

stery of the front seat.

42 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Adult*1

■Child*4

■Child restraint system with infant*5

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification

system

Indicator/warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator lights “AIR BAG ON”

SRS warning light Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3

Devices Front passenger airbag Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Indicator/warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator lights

“AIR BAG OFF” or

“AIR BAG ON”*4

SRS warning light Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3

Devices Front passenger airbag Deactivated or acti-

vated*4

Front passenger knee airbag

Indicator/warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator lights “AIR BAG OFF”*6

SRS warning light Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3

Devices Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Front passenger knee airbag

1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

■Unoccupied

■There is a malfunction in the system

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the

front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on

his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt

*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt

*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the sys-

tem may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the phy-

sique or posture.

*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A for-

ward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat

when it is unavoidable. (→P.45)

*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child

restraint system properly. (→P.46)

Indicator/warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator lights “AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light

Off

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

Devices Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Front passenger knee airbag

Indicator/warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator lights “AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light On

Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light Off

Devices Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Front passenger knee airbag

44 1-1. For safe use

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human

body is included in exhaust gases if

inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases

enter the vehicle and may lead to an

accident caused by light-headedness, or

may lead to death or a serious health

hazard.

■Important points while driving

●Keep the trunk lid closed.

●If you smell exhaust gases in the vehi-

cle even when the trunk lid is closed,

open the windows and have the vehi-

cle inspected at your Lexus dealer as

soon as possible.

■When parking

●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated

area or a closed area, such as a

garage, stop the hybrid system.

●Do not leave the vehicle with the

hybrid system on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided,

park the vehicle in an open space and

ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter

the vehicle interior.

●Do not leave the hybrid system operat-

ing in an area with snow build-up, or

where it is snowing. If snowbanks build

up around the vehicle while the hybrid

system is operating, exhaust gases

may collect and enter the vehicle.

■Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked

periodically. If there is a hole or crack

caused by corrosion, damage to a joint

or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to

have the vehicle inspected and repaired

by your Lexus dealer.

1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

1-2.Child safety

Points to remember: P.45

Child restraint system: P.46

When using a child restraint system:

P.47

Child restraint system installation

method

• Fixed with a seat belt: P.49

• Fixed with a child restraint LATCH

anchor: P.53

• Using an anchor bracket (for top

tether strap): P.55

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A.

as well as Canada now require the use

of child restraint systems.

-Prioritize and observe the warn-

ings, as well as the laws and regula-

Riding with children

Observe the following precautions

when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appro-

priate for the child, until the child

becomes large enough to properly

wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

-It is recommended that children

sit in the rear seats to avoid acci-

dental contact with the shift lever,

wiper switch etc.

-Use the rear door child-protector

lock or the window lock switch to

avoid children opening the door

while driving or operating the

power window accidentally.

(→P.111, 153)

-Do not let small children operate

equipment which may catch or

pinch body parts, such as the

power window, hood, trunk, seats

etc.

WARNING

■When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle, and never allow children to have

or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle

or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is

also a danger that children may injure

themselves by playing with the windows,

the moon roof, or other features of the

vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or

extremely cold temperatures inside the

vehicle can be fatal to children.

Child restraint systems

Before installing a child restraint

system in the vehicle, there are pre-

cautions that need to be observed,

different types of child restraint sys-

tems, as well as installation meth-

ods, etc., written in this manual.

Use a child restraint system when

riding with a small child that cannot

properly use a seat belt. For the

child’s safety, install the child restraint

system to a rear seat. Be sure to fol-

low the installation method that is in

the operation manual enclosed with

the restraint system.

Table of contents

Points to remember

46 1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

tions for child restraint systems.

-Use a child restraint system until the

child becomes large enough to

properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

-Choose a child restraint system that

suits your vehicle and is appropriate

to the age and size of the child.

■Types of child restraint system installation methods

Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about

the installation of the child restraint system.

WARNING

■When a child is riding

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●For effective protection in automobile

accidents and sudden stops, a child

must be properly restrained, using a

seat belt or child restraint system

which is correctly installed. For installa-

tion details, refer to the operation man-

ual enclosed with the child restraint

system. General installation instruction

is provided in this manual.

●Lexus strongly urges the use of a

proper child restraint system that con-

forms to the weight and size of the

child, installed on the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, the

child is safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front seat.

●Holding a child in your or someone

else’s arms is not a substitute for a child

restraint system. In an accident, the

child can be crushed against the wind-

shield or between the holder and the

interior of the vehicle.

■Handling the child restraint system

If the child restraint system is not prop-

erly fixed in place, the child or other pas-

sengers may be seriously injured or even

killed in the event of sudden braking, sud-

den swerving, or an accident.

●If the vehicle were to receive a strong

impact from an accident, etc., it is pos-

sible that the child restraint system has

damage that is not readily visible. In

such cases, do not reuse the restraint

system.

●Make sure you have complied with all

installation instructions provided with

the child restraint system manufac-

turer and that the system is properly

secured.

●Keep the child restraint system prop-

erly secured on the seat even if it is not

in use. Do not store the child restraint

system unsecured in the passenger

compartment.

●If it is necessary to detach the child

restraint system, remove it from the

vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.

Child restraint system

1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

■When installing a child restraint

system to a front passenger seat

For the safety of a child, install child

restraint systems to a rear seats. When

installing child restraint system to a

front passenger seat is unavoidable,

adjust the seat as follows and install the

child restraint system.

-Move the front seat fully rearward.

-Adjust the seatback angle to the

most upright position.

-Adjust the front of the seat cushion

to the lowest position.

-Adjust the seat height to the upper-

most position.

-Adjust the lumbar support to the

lowest position.

-Adjust the shoulder bolster to the

Installation method Page

Seat belt attachment P.49

Child restraint LATCH

anchors attachment P.53

Anchor brackets (for top

tether strap) attachment P.55

When using a child restraint sys-

tem

48 1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

lowest position (if equipped).

-Adjust the pelvic support to the low-

est position.

-Adjust the seatback side bolster to

the widest position (if equipped).

-Adjust the seat cushion side bolster

to the lowest position (if equipped).

-Adjust the hip support to the lowest

position (if equipped).

-If the head restraint interferes with

the child restraint system installa-

tion and the head restraint can be

removed, remove the head restraint.

Otherwise, put the head restraint in

the upper most position.

■When installing a child restraint

system to a power rear seat (if

equipped)

When using a child restraint system in

an outer rear seat, adjust the seat as

follows and install the child restraint

system.

-Adjust the seat cushion to the fully

rearward position.

-Adjust the upper seatback to the

rearmost position.

-Adjust the front of the seat cushion

to the lowest position.

-Adjust the head restraint to the low-

est and rearmost position.

-Adjust the shoulder bolster to the

lowest position.

-Adjust the lumbar support to the

lowest position.

-Adjust the pelvic support to the low-

est position.

-Disable the automatic rear seat

operation. (→P.318)

-For the rear seat with an ottoman (if

equipped): Adjust the seatback to

the most upright position and otto-

man (footrest) to the stowed posi-

tion.

WARNING

■When using a child restraint system

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●Never install a rear-facing child

restraint system on the front passenger

seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator light is illuminated. In the event of

an accident, the force of the rapid infla-

tion of the front passenger airbag can

cause death or serious injury to the

child if the rear-facing child restraint

system is installed on the front passen-

ger seat.

1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

A child restraint system for a small

child or baby must itself be properly

restrained on the seat with the lap por-

tion of the lap/shoulder belt.

■Installing child restraint system

using a seat belt (child restraint

lock function belt)

Install the child restraint system in

accordance to the operation manual

enclosed with the child restraint sys-

tem.

WARNING

●A forward-facing child restraint system

may be installed on the front passen-

ger seat only when it is unavoidable. A

child restraint system that requires a

top tether strap should not be used in

the front passenger seat since there is

no top tether strap anchor for the front

passenger seat.

●A forward-facing child restraint system

may be installed on the front passen-

ger seat only when it is unavoidable.

When installing a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front passenger

seat, adjust the seatback angle to the

most upright position, move the seat to

the rearmost position, and raise the

seat to the upper most position, even if

the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is

illuminated.

●Do not allow the child to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the seat,

front or rear pillars, or roof side rails

from which the SRS side airbags or

SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even

if the child is seated in the child

restraint system. It is dangerous if the

SRS side and curtain shield airbags

inflate, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

●When a booster seat is installed,

always ensure that the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of the

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child’s neck, but

not so that it could fall off the child’s

shoulder.

●Use child restraint system suitable to

the age and size of the child and install

it to the rear seat.

●If the driver’s seat interferes with the

child restraint system and prevents it

from being attached correctly, attach

the child restraint system to the

right-hand rear seat.

●Adjust the front passenger seat so that

it does not interfere with the child

restraint system.

Child restraint system fixed with

a seat belt

50 1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/con-

vertible seat

1Adjust the rear seat

Vehicles with power rear seat: If there is a

gap between the child seat and the seat-

back, adjust the seatback angle until good

contact is achieved.

2Place the child restraint system on

the rear seat facing the rear of the

vehicle.

3Run the seat belt through the child

restraint system and insert the plate

into the buckle. Make sure that the

belt is not twisted.

4Fully extend the shoulder belt and

allow it to retract to put it in lock

mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot

be extended.

5While pushing the child restraint

system down into the rear seat,

allow the shoulder belt to retract

until the child restraint system is

securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a

point where there is no slack in the belt,

pull the belt to check that it cannot be

extended.

6After installing the child restraint

system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

(→P.53)

■Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible

seat

1Adjust the seat

When using the front passenger

seat

If installing the child restraint system to

the front passenger seat is unavoid-

1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

able, refer to P.47 for front passenger

seat adjustment.

When using the rear seat

If there is a gap between the child seat

and the seatback, adjust the seatback

angle until good contact is achieved.

2Place the child restraint system on

the seat facing the front of the vehi-

cle.

3Run the seat belt through the child

restraint system and insert the plate

into the buckle. Make sure that the

belt is not twisted.

4Fully extend the shoulder belt and

allow it to retract to put it in lock

mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot

be extended.

5While pushing the child restraint

system into the rear seat, allow the

shoulder belt to retract until the

child restraint system is securely in

place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a

point where there is no slack in the belt,

pull the belt to check that it cannot be

extended.

6If the child restraint has a top tether

strap, follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s operation manual

regarding the installation, using the

top tether strap to latch onto the

top tether strap anchor. (→P.55)

7After installing the child restraint

system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

(→P.53)

52 1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Booster seat

1If installing the child restraint sys-

tem to the front passenger seat is

unavoidable, refer to P.47 for front

passenger seat adjustment.

2Place the child restraint system on

the seat facing the front of the vehi-

cle.

Booster type

High back type

4Sit the child in the child restraint

system. Fit the seat belt to the child

restraint system according to the

manufacturer’s instructions and

insert the plate into the buckle.

Make sure that the belt is not

twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly

positioned over the child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is as low as possible.

(→P.24)

■Removing a child restraint system

installed with a seat belt

Press the buckle release button and

fully retract the seat belt.

When releasing the buckle, the child

restraint system may spring up due to the

rebound of the seat cushion. Release the

buckle while holding down the child

restraint system.

Since the seat belt automatically reels itself,

slowly return it to the stowing position.

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint sys-

tem

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

■Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the

outboard rear seat. (Buttons displaying

the location of the anchors are

attached to the seats.)

■Installation with LATCH system

Install the child restraint system in

WARNING

●Do not allow children to play with the

seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may

lead to choking or other serious inju-

ries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be

unfastened, scissors should be used to

cut the belt.

●Ensure that the belt and plate are

securely locked and the seat belt is not

twisted.

●Shake the child restraint system left

and right, and forward and backward

to ensure that it has been securely

installed.

●After securing a child restraint system,

never adjust the seat.

●When a booster seat is installed,

always ensure that the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of the

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child’s neck, but

not so that it could fall off the child’s

shoulder.

●Follow all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

●When securing some types of child

restraint systems in rear seats, it may

not be possible to properly use the

seat belts in positions next to the child

restraint without interfering with it or

affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be

sure your seat belt fits snugly across

your shoulder and low on your hips. If it

does not, or if it interferes with the

child restraint, move to a different posi-

tion. Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

●When installing a child restraint system

in the rear center seat, adjust both seat

cushions to the same position and

align both seatbacks at the same

angle. Otherwise, the child restraint

system cannot be securely restrained

and this may cause death or serious

injuries in the event of sudden braking,

sudden swerving or an accident.

■When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR

lock mode, do not fully extend the shoul-

der belt. ALR mode causes the belt to

tighten only. This could cause injury or

discomfort to the child. (→P.26)

■Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when

installing a child restraint system, the seat

belt will not securely hold the child

restraint system, which could cause

death or serious injury to the child or

other passengers in the event of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Child restraint system fixed with

a child restraint LATCH anchor

54 1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

accordance to the operation manual

enclosed with the child restraint sys-

tem.

1Vehicles with power rear seat:

Adjust the seat

If there is a gap between the child seat and

the seatback, adjust the seatback angle

until good contact is achieved. (→P.48)

2Open the cover.

3Insert the tab into the slit of

the cover.

The cover will be held open.

Type A

4Latch the hooks of the lower straps

onto the LATCH anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint sys-

tem indicates the presence of a

lower connector system.

Canada only

Type B

4Latch the buckles onto the LATCH

anchors.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint sys-

1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

tem indicates the presence of a

lower connector system.

Canada only

5If the child restraint has a top tether

strap, follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s operation manual

regarding the installation, using the

top tether strap to latch onto the

top tether strap anchor. (→P.55)

6After installing the child restraint

system, rock it back and forth to

ensure that it is installed securely.

(→P.53)

■Laws and regulations pertaining to

anchors

The LATCH system conforms to

FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications

can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE

J1819.

■Anchor brackets (for top tether

strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for each

rear seat.

Use anchor brackets when fixing the

top tether strap.

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint sys-

tem

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

●After securing a child restraint system,

never adjust the seat.

●When using the LATCH anchors, be

sure that there are no foreign objects

around the anchors and that the seat

belt is not caught behind the child

restraint system.

●Follow all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

●When securing some types of child

restraint systems in rear seats, it may

not be possible to properly use the

seat belts in positions next to the child

restraint without interfering with it or

affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be

sure your seat belt fits snugly across

your shoulder and low on your hips. If it

does not, or if it interferes with the

child restraint, move to a different posi-

tion. Failure to do so may result in

death or serious injury.

Using an anchor bracket (for top

tether strap)

56 1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Outboard rear seats

Anchor brackets

Top tether strap

Rear center seat

Anchor bracket

Top tether strap

■Fixing the top tether strap to the

anchor bracket

Install the child restraint system in

accordance to the operation manual

enclosed with the child restraint sys-

tem.

Open the anchor bracket cover, latch

the hook onto the anchor bracket and

tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely

latched. (→P.53)

Outboard rear seats

Hook

Top tether strap

Rear center seat

Hook

Top tether strap

■Laws and regulations pertaining to

anchors

The LATCH system conforms to

FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications

can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE

J1819.

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint sys-

tem

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

1-2. Child safety

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

●Firmly attach the top tether strap and

make sure that the belt is not twisted.

●Do not attach the top tether strap to

anything other than the anchor

bracket.

●After securing a child restraint system,

never adjust the seat.

●Follow all installation instructions pro-

vided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

●Be sure to have the top tether strap

pass over the top of the head restraint.

If the belt passes below the head

restraint, it is possible that the child

restraint system may not be securely

fixed.

NOTICE

■Anchor brackets (for top tether

strap)

When not in use, make certain to close

the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be

damaged.

58 1-3. Hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-3.Hybrid system

■System components

The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.

Gasoline engine

Electric motor (traction motor)

■When stopped/during start off

The gasoline engine stops* when the

vehicle is stopped. During start off, the

electric motor (traction motor) drives

the vehicle. At slow speeds or when

traveling down a gentle slope, the

engine is stopped* and the electric

motor (traction motor) is used.

When the shift position is in N, the

hybrid battery (traction battery) is not

being charged.

*: When the hybrid battery (traction bat-

tery) requires charging or the engine is

warming up, etc., the gasoline engine will

not automatically stop.

■During normal driving

The gasoline engine is predominantly

used. The electric motor (traction

motor) charges the hybrid battery

Hybrid system features

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conven-

tional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your

vehicle, and operate it with care.

The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor

(traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and

reducing exhaust emissions.

System components

1-3. Hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

(traction battery) as necessary.

■When accelerating sharply

When the accelerator pedal is

depressed heavily, the power of the

hybrid battery (traction battery) is

added to that of the gasoline engine via

the electric motor (traction motor).

■When braking (regenerative brak-

ing)

The wheels operate the electric motor

(traction motor) as a power generator,

and the hybrid battery (traction bat-

tery) is charged.

■Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is

converted to electric energy and decelera-

tion force can be obtained in conjunction

with the recharging of the hybrid battery

(traction battery).

●The accelerator pedal is released while

driving with the shift position in D or M.

●The brake pedal is depressed while driv-

ing with the shift position in D or M.

■EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when the vehi-

cle is driven using only the electric motor

(traction motor) or the gasoline engine is

stopped.

■Conditions in which the gasoline engine

may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops auto-

matically. However, it may not stop auto-

matically in the following conditions:

●During gasoline engine warm-up

●During hybrid battery (traction battery)

charging

●When the temperature of the hybrid bat-

tery (traction battery) is high or low

●When the heater is switched on

●When the shift position is in M

Depending on the circumstances, the gaso-

line engine may also not stop automatically

in other situations.

■Charging the hybrid battery (traction

battery)

As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid

battery (traction battery), the battery does

not need to be charged from an outside

source. However, if the vehicle is left parked

for a long time the hybrid battery (traction

battery) will slowly discharge. For this rea-

son, be sure to drive the vehicle at least

once every few months for at least 30 min-

utes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid bat-

tery (traction battery) becomes fully

discharged and you are unable to contact

your Lexus dealer.

■Charging the 12-volt battery

→P.447

■After the 12-volt battery has discharged

or when the terminal has been removed

and installed during exchange, etc.

The gasoline engine may not stop even if

the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid bat-

tery (traction battery). If this continues for a

few days, contact your Lexus dealer.

■Sounds and vibrations specific to a

hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sound or vibration

even though the vehicle is able to move with

the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For

safety, apply the parking brake and make

sure to shift the shift position to P when

parked.

The following sounds or vibrations may

occur when the hybrid system is operating

and are not a malfunction:

●Motor sounds may be heard from the

engine compartment.

●Relay operating sounds such as a snap or

soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid

battery (traction battery), behind the rear

60 1-3. Hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

seats, when the hybrid system is started

or stopped.

●Sounds may be heard from the hybrid

battery (traction battery) behind the rear

seats when the hybrid system starts or

stops.

●Sounds from the hybrid system may be

heard when the trunk lid is open.

●Sounds may be heard from the transmis-

sion when the gasoline engine starts or

stops, when driving at low speeds, or

during idling.

●Engine sounds may be heard when

accelerating sharply.

●Sounds may be heard due to regenera-

tive braking when the brake pedal is

depressed or as the accelerator pedal is

released.

●Vibration may be felt or sounds may be

heard when the gasoline engine starts or

stops.

●Cooling fan sounds may be heard from

the air intake vents on the both sides of

the rear seatback.

■Maintenance, repair, recycling, and dis-

posal

Contact your Lexus dealer regarding main-

tenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do

not dispose of the vehicle yourself.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

When driving with the gasoline engine

stopped, a sound, which changes in

accordance with the driving speed, will

be played in order to warn people

nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The

sound will stop when the vehicle speed

exceeds approximately 15 mph (25

km/h).

■Vehicle proximity notification system

In the following cases, the vehicle proximity

notification system may be difficult for sur-

rounding people to hear.

●In very noisy areas

●In the wind or the rain

Also, as the vehicle proximity notification

system is installed on the front of the vehicle,

it may be more difficult to hear from the rear

of the vehicle compared to the front.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

Vehicle proximity notification

system

1-3. Hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

The illustration is an example for explana-

tion and may differ from the actual item.

Warning label

Power control unit

Electric motor (traction motor)

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

Service plug

High voltage cables (orange)

Air conditioning compressor

■Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the

hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the

vehicle with at least enough gasoline to

make the low fuel level warning light

(→P.430) go off. If there is only a small

amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not

be able to start. (The standard amount of

fuel is about 3.4 gal. [13 L, 2.8 Imp. gal.],

when the vehicle is on a level surface. This

value may vary when the vehicle is on a

slope. Add extra fuel when the vehicle is

inclined.)

■Electromagnetic waves

●High voltage parts and cables on hybrid

vehicles incorporate electromagnetic

shielding, and therefore emit approxi-

mately the same amount of electromag-

netic waves as conventional gasoline

powered vehicles or home electronic

appliances.

●Your vehicle may cause sound interfer-

ence in some third party-produced radio

parts.

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a

limited service life. The lifespan of the

hybrid battery (traction battery) can

Hybrid system precautions

Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system (about

650 V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely hot when

the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to the vehi-

cle.

System components

62 1-3. Hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

change in accordance with driving style and

driving conditions.

■Starting the hybrid system in an

extremely cold environment

When the hybrid battery (traction battery)

is extremely cold (below approximately

-22°F [-30°C]) under the influence of the

outside temperature, it may not be possible

to start the hybrid system. In this case, try to

start the hybrid system again after the tem-

perature of the hybrid battery increases due

to the outside temperature increase etc.

WARNING

■High voltage precautions

This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC

systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC

and AC high voltage is very dangerous

and can cause severe burns and electric

shock that may result in death or serious

injury.

●Never touch, disassemble, remove or

replace the high voltage parts, cables

or their connectors.

●The hybrid system will become hot

after starting as the system uses high

voltage. Be careful of both the high

voltage and the high temperature, and

always obey the warning labels

attached to the vehicle.

●Never try to open the service plug

access hole located behind the rear

seat. The service plug is used only

when the vehicle is serviced and is

subject to high voltage.

■Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of death or serious injury:

●Stop the vehicle in a safe place to pre-

vent subsequent accidents. While

depressing the brake pedal, apply the

parking brake and shift the shift posi-

tion to P to stop the hybrid system.

Then, slowly release the brake pedal.

●Do not touch the high voltage parts,

cables and connectors.

●If electric wires are exposed inside or

outside your vehicle, an electric shock

may occur. Never touch exposed elec-

tric wires.

●Do not touch the battery if liquid is

leaking from or adhering to it.

If electrolyte (carbonate ester-based

organic electrolyte) from the hybrid

battery (traction battery) comes into

contact with the eyes or skin, it could

cause blindness or skin wounds. In the

unlikely event that it comes into con-

tact with the eyes or skin, wash it off

immediately with a large amount of

water, and seek immediate medical

attention.

●If electrolyte is leaking from the hybrid

battery (traction battery), do not

approach the vehicle.

Even in the unlikely event that the

hybrid battery (traction battery) is

damaged, the internal construction of

the battery will prevent a large amount

of electrolyte from leaking out. How-

ever, any electrolyte that does leak out

will give off a vapor. This vapor is an

irritant to skin and eyes and could

cause acute poisoning if inhaled.

●Do not bring burning or high-tem-

perature items close to the electrolyte.

The electrolyte may ignite and cause a

fire.

●If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle,

leave the vehicle as soon as possible.

Never use a fire extinguisher that is not

meant for electric fires. Using even a

small amount of water may be danger-

ous.

1-3. Hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

●If your vehicle needs to be towed, do

so with four wheels raised. If the

wheels connected to the electric

motor (traction motor) are on the

ground when towing, the motor may

continue to generate electricity. This

may cause a fire. (→P.422)

●Carefully inspect the ground under the

vehicle. If you find that liquid has

leaked onto the ground, the fuel sys-

tem may have been damaged. Leave

the vehicle as soon as possible.

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

●Your vehicle contains a sealed lith-

ium-ion battery.

●Never resell, hand over or modify the

hybrid battery. To prevent accidents,

hybrid batteries that have been

removed from a disposed vehicle are

collected through your Lexus dealer.

Do not dispose of the battery yourself.

Unless the battery is properly collected,

the following may occur, resulting in

death or serious injury:

• The hybrid battery may be illegally dis-

posed of or dumped, and it is hazard-

ous to the environment or someone

may touch a high voltage part, result-

ing in an electric shock.

• The hybrid battery is intended to be

used exclusively with your hybrid vehi-

cle. If the hybrid battery is used outside

of your vehicle or modified in any way,

accidents such as electric shock, heat

generation, smoke generation, an

explosion and electrolyte leakage may

occur.

When reselling or handing over your

vehicle, the possibility of an accident is

extremely high because the person

receiving the vehicle may not be aware

of these dangers.

●If your vehicle is disposed of without

the hybrid battery having been

removed, there is a danger of serious

electric shock if high voltage parts,

cables and their connectors are

touched. In the event that your vehicle

must be disposed of, the hybrid battery

must be disposed of by your Lexus

dealer or a qualified service shop. If

the hybrid battery is not disposed of

properly, it may cause electric shock

that can result in death or serious

injury.

NOTICE

■Hybrid battery (traction battery) air

intake vents

Do not carry large amounts of water

such as water cooler bottles in the vehi-

cle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery

(traction battery), the battery may be

damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by

your Lexus dealer.

64 1-3. Hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

There are air intake vents on each side

of the rear seatback with the purpose

of cooling the hybrid battery (traction

battery). If the vents become blocked,

hybrid battery output may be reduced.

When a certain level of impact is

detected by the impact sensor, the

emergency shut off system blocks the

high voltage current and stops the fuel

pump to minimize the risk of electrocu-

tion and fuel leakage. If the emergency

shut off system activates, your vehicle

will not restart. To restart the hybrid

system, contact your Lexus dealer.

A message is automatically displayed

when a malfunction occurs in the

hybrid system or an improper opera-

tion is attempted.

If a warning message is shown on the

multi-information display, read the

message and follow the instructions.

■If a warning light comes on, a warning

message is displayed, or the 12-volt bat-

tery is disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In this

case, try to start the system again. If the

“READY” indicator does not come on, con-

Hybrid battery (traction bat-

tery) air intake vents

NOTICE

■Hybrid battery (traction battery) air

intake vents

●Make sure not to block the air intake

vent with anything, such as a seat

cover, plastic cover, or luggage. If the

vents become blocked, the hybrid bat-

tery (traction battery) input and output

may be restricted, leading to a reduc-

tion in hybrid battery (traction battery)

output and a malfunction.

●When dust etc. has accumulated in the

air intake vent, periodically clean it

with a vacuum cleaner to prevent the

vent from clogging.

●A filter is installed to the air intake vent.

When the filter remains noticeably

dirty even after cleaning the air intake

vent, filter cleaning or replacement is

recommended. When cleaning or

replacing the filter, contact your Lexus

dealer.

Refer to P.374 for details on how to

clean the filters.

●Do not get water or foreign materials

in the air intake vents as this may cause

a short circuit and damage the hybrid

battery (traction battery).

Emergency shut off system

Hybrid warning message

1-3. Hybrid system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

tact your Lexus dealer.

66 1-4. Theft deterrent system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1-4.Theft deterrent system The indicator light flashes after the

power switch has been turned off to

indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after

the power switch has been turned to

ACCESSORY or ON mode to indi-

cate that the system has been can-

celed.

■System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type

immobilizer system.

■Conditions that may cause the system to

malfunction

●If the grip portion of the key is in contact

with a metallic object

●If the key is in close proximity to or touch-

ing a key to the security system (key with

a built-in transponder chip) of another

vehicle

■Certification for the immobilizer system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

Immobilizer system

The vehicle’s keys have built-in tran-

sponder chips that prevent the

hybrid system from starting if a key

has not been previously registered

in the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help pre-

vent vehicle theft but does not

guarantee absolute security

against all vehicle thefts.

Operating the system

1-4. Theft deterrent system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates cor-

rectly

Do not modify or remove the system. If

modified or removed, the proper opera-

tion of the system cannot be guaranteed.

68 1-4. Theft deterrent system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Items to check before locking the

vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of

the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure

of the following:

-Nobody is in the vehicle.

-The windows and moon roof are

closed before the alarm is set.

-No valuables or other personal

items are left in the vehicle.

■Setting

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and

lock all the doors. The system will be

set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on

to flashing when the system is set.

■Canceling or stopping

Do one of the following to deactivate

or stop the alarms:

-Unlock the doors.

-Turn the power switch to ACCES-

SORY or ON mode, or start the

hybrid system. (The alarm will be

deactivated or stopped after a few

seconds.)

■System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type

alarm system.

■Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following

situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm

system.)

●The trunk is opened using the mechanical

key.

●A person inside the vehicle opens a door,

the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle.

Alarm

The alarm uses light and sound to

give an alert when an intrusion is

detected.

The alarm is triggered in the follow-

ing situations when the alarm is set:

-A locked door or trunk is

unlocked or opened in any way

other than using the entry func-

tion, wireless remote control or

mechanical key. (The doors will

lock again automatically.)

-The hood is opened.

Setting/canceling/stopping the

alarm system

1-4. Theft deterrent system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For safety and security

●The 12-volt battery is recharged or

replaced when the vehicle is locked.

(→P.450)

■Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the sit-

uation, the door may automatically lock to

prevent improper entry into the vehicle:

●When a person remaining in the vehicle

unlocks the door and the alarm is acti-

vated.

●While the alarm is activated, a person

remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates cor-

rectly

Do not modify or remove the system. If

modified or removed, the proper opera-

tion of the system cannot be guaranteed.

70 1-4. Theft deterrent system

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Vehicle status information

and indicators

2-1. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

............................................................72

Gauges and meters (except F

SPORT models) ........................ 77

Gauges and meters (F SPORT

models)........................................... 81

Multi-information display..........86

Head-up display ........................... 92

Energy monitor/consumption

screen ............................................ 96

72 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2-1.Instrument cluster

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights

and indicators illuminated.

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and

outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various

systems.

Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instrument cluster

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Warning lights inform the driver of mal-

functions in the indicated vehicle’s sys-

tems.

Warning lights

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light*1

(→P.427)

(red)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light*1

(→P.427)

(yellow)

Brake system warning light*1

(→P.427)

High coolant temperature

warning light*2 (→P.427)

Charging system warning

light*2 (→P.428)

Low engine oil pressure warn-

ing light*2 (→P.428)

(U.S.A.)

Malfunction indicator lamp*1

(→P.428)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp*1

(→P.428)

SRS warning light*1 (→P.428)

Pop Up Hood warning light*1

(→P.429)

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light*1 (→P.429)

(Canada)

ABS warning light*1 (→P.429)

Brake Override System warn-

ing light/Drive-Start Control

warning light*2 (→P.429)

(red)

Electric power steering system

warning light*1 (→P.430)

(yellow)

Electric power steering system

warning light*1 (→P.430)

Low fuel level warning light

(→P.430)

Driver’s and front passenger’s

seat belt reminder light

(→P.430)

Rear passengers’ seat belt

reminder lights*3 (→P.431)

Tire pressure warning light*1

(→P.431)

(orange)

LTA indicator (if equipped)

(→P.431)

LKA indicator (if equipped)

(→P.431)

(flashes)

Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-

cator*1 (→P.432)

(flashes)

RCTA OFF indicator*1

(→P.432)

(flashes)

RCD OFF indicator (if

equipped) (→P.432)

(flashes)

PKSB OFF indicator*1

(→P.433)

(flashes or

illuminates)

PCS warning light*1 (→P.433)

Slip indicator*1 (→P.433)

(flashes)

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake indicator

(→P.434)

74 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*1: These lights come on when the power

switch is turned to ON mode to indi-

cate that a system check is being per-

formed. They will go off after the hybrid

system is on, or after a few seconds.

There may be a malfunction in a system

if the lights do not come on, or go off.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

*2: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-

mation display.

*3: This light illuminates on the center

panel.

*4: F SPORT models: This light comes on

when the power switch is turned to ON

mode to indicate that a system check is

being performed. They will go off after

the hybrid system is on, or after a few

seconds. There may be a malfunction in

a system if the lights do not come on, or

go off. Have the vehicle inspected by

your Lexus dealer.

The indicators inform the driver of the

operating state of the vehicle’s various

systems.

(flashes)

(Canada)

Parking brake indicator

(→P.434)

(flashes)

Brake hold operated indicator*1

(→P.434)

Master warning light*4

(→P.434)

WARNING

■If a safety system warning light does

not come on

Should a safety system light such as the

ABS and SRS warning light not come on

when you start the hybrid system, this

could mean that these systems are not

available to help protect you in an acci-

dent, which could result in death or seri-

ous injury. Have the vehicle inspected by

your Lexus dealer immediately if this

occurs.

Indicators

Turn signal indicator (→P.180)

(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator (→P.185)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator (→P.185)

Headlight high beam indicator

(→P.186)

AHB indicator (→P.188)

PCS warning light*1, 2 (→P.212,

222)

Cruise control indicator

(→P.257)

Dynamic radar cruise control

indicator (→P.250)

Cruise control “SET” indicator

(→P.250)

(white)

LTA indicator (if equipped)

(→P.234)

LKA indicator (if equipped)

(→P.242)

(green)

LTA indicator (if equipped)

(→P.234)

LKA indicator (if equipped)

(→P.243)

(orange)

(flashes)

LTA indicator (if equipped)

(→P.234)

LKA indicator (if equipped)

(→P.243)

BSM outside rear view mirror

indicators*1, 3 (→P.260, 273)

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

-Drive mode indicators

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

BSM indicator (→P.260)

Intuitive parking assist OFF indi-

cator*1, 2 (→P.267)

RCTA OFF indicator*1, 2

(→P.273)

RCD OFF indicator*2

(→P.277)

PKSB OFF indicator*1, 2

(→P.281)

(flashes)

Slip indicator*1 (→P.303)

VSC OFF indicator*1, 2

(→P.304)

High mode indicator (if

equipped) (→P.300)

Smart access system with

push-button start indicator*4

(→P.168)

“READY” indicator (→P.168)

EV drive mode indicator

(→P.172)

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake indicator

(→P.181)

(Canada)

Parking brake indicator

(→P.181)

Brake hold standby indicator*1

(→P.183)

Brake hold operated indicator*1

(→P.183)

EV indicator (→P.59)

Low outside temperature indi-

cator*5 (→P.77, 81)

Security indicator*6 (→P.66,

68)

(U.S.A.)

“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indica-

tor*1, 6 (→P.40)

(Canada)

“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indica-

tor*1, 6 (→P.40)

Snow mode indicator (→P.177)

Normal mode indicator

(→P.298)

Custom mode indicator

(→P.298)

Comfort mode indicator

(→P.298)

Eco drive mode indicator

(→P.298)

Sport S mode indicator

(→P.298)

Sport S+ mode indicator

(→P.298)

Snow mode indicator (→P.177)

Normal mode indicator

(→P.298)

Custom mode indicator

(→P.298)

Comfort mode indicator

(→P.298)

76 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*1: These lights come on when the power

switch is turned to ON mode to indi-

cate that a system check is being per-

formed. They will go off after the hybrid

system is on, or after a few seconds.

There may be a malfunction in a system

if the lights do not come on, or go off.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

*2: This light comes on when the system is

turned off.

*3: This light illuminates on the outside rear

view mirrors.

*4: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-

mation display.

*5: When the outside temperature is

approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, this

indicator will flash for approximately 10

seconds, then stay on.

*6: This light illuminates on the center

panel.

Eco drive mode indicator

(→P.298)

Sport S mode indicator

(→P.298)

Sport S+ mode indicator

(→P.298)

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

■Locations of gauges and meters

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Odometer and trip meter display (→P.79)

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)

Hybrid System Indicator

Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78)

This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to

show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298)

Speedometer

Clock

Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353)

Shift position indicator (→P.176)

Shift range/gear position (→P.174)

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86)

Gauges and meters (except F SPORT models)

Meter display

78 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437)

■Hybrid System Indicator

Charge area

Shows regeneration* status.

Regenerated energy will be used to charge

the hybrid battery (traction battery).

Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power is not

being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop

and restart under various conditions.

Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an

Eco-friendly manner.

By keeping the bar display within Eco area,

more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.

Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is

being exceeded (during full power driving

etc.)

*: When used in this manual, regeneration

refers to the conversion of energy cre-

ated by the movement of the vehicle into

electrical energy.

■Engine speed

On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is pre-

cisely controlled in order to help improve

fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emis-

sions etc.

There are times when the engine speed that

is displayed may differ even when vehicle

operation and driving conditions are the

same.

■Hybrid System Indicator is displayed

when

The Hybrid System Indicator is displayed in

the following situations:

●The shift position is in D or M.

●The driving mode is other than sport

mode.

However, the Hybrid System Indicator will

not be displayed when the analog and digi-

tal speedometers are both enabled on

of the multi-information display. (→P.90)

■Outside temperature display

●In the following situations, the correct

outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer

than normal to change:

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds

(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

• When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of

a garage, tunnel, etc.)

●When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system

may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle

to your Lexus dealer.

■Liquid crystal display

→P.87

■Customization

The gauges and meters can be customized

on of the multi-information display.

(→P.90)

WARNING

■The information display at low tem-

peratures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm

up before using the liquid crystal infor-

mation display. At extremely low tem-

peratures, the information display

monitor may respond slowly, and display

changes may be delayed.

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

■Display items

-Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has

been driven.

-Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been

driven since the meter was last reset. Trip

meters A and B can be used to record and

display different distances independently.

-Distance until next engine oil

change

Displays the distance the vehicle can be

driven until an oil change is necessary.

■Changing the display

Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is

pressed, the displayed item will be

changed. When the trip meter is dis-

played, pressing and holding the switch

will reset the trip meter.

■Pop-up display

Distance until the next engine oil

change will displayed when a warning

message indicating that oil mainte-

nance should be performed soon or is

required is displayed.

The brightness of the instrument panel

lights can be adjusted.

1Darker

2Brighter

■Brightness of the meters (day mode and

night mode)

The brightness of the meters changes

between day mode and night mode.

●Day mode: When the tail lights are off or

WARNING

For example, there is a lag between the

driver’s shifting and the new gear number

appearing on the display. This lag could

cause the driver to downshift again,

causing rapid and excessive engine brak-

ing and possibly an accident resulting in

death or injury.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and

its components

●Do not let the indicator needle of the

tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

●The engine may be overheating if the

engine coolant temperature gauge is

in the red zone (H). In this case, imme-

diately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and check the engine after it has

cooled completely. (→P.453)

Odometer and trip meter dis-

play

Changing the instrument panel

light brightness

80 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

when the tail lights are on but the sur-

rounding area is bright

●Night mode: When the tail lights are on

and the surrounding area is dark

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

■Locations of gauges and meters

When the main meter is moved to the right, some of the meter displays and the

gauge layout will change. (→P.85)

Main meter in center position

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.

Odometer and trip meter display (→P.84)

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)

Hybrid System Indicator

Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78)

This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to

show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298)

• Rev indicator (→P.83)

•Rev peak (→P.83)

Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174)

Speedometer

Clock

Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353)

Gauges and meters (F SPORT models)

Meter display

82 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Shift position indicator (→P.176)

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437)

Main meter moved to the right

The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)

Clock

Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. (→P.353)

Hybrid System Indicator

Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (→P.78)

This display changes to a tachometer depending on the driving mode, and can be set to

show the tachometer in any driving mode on the settings display. (→P.90, 298)

• Rev indicator (→P.83)

•Rev peak (→P.83)

Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174)

Speedometer

Shift position indicator (→P.176)

Odometer and trip meter display (→P.84)

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (→P.86)

Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs (→P.437)

■Hybrid System Indicator

Charge area

Shows regeneration* status.

Regenerated energy will be used to charge

the hybrid battery (traction battery).

Hybrid Eco area

Shows that gasoline engine power is not

being used very often.

The gasoline engine will automatically stop

and restart under various conditions.

Eco area

Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an

Eco-friendly manner.

By keeping the bar display within Eco area,

more Eco-friendly driving can be achieved.

Power area

Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is

being exceeded (during full power driving

etc.)

*: When used in this manual, regeneration

refers to the conversion of energy cre-

ated by the movement of the vehicle into

electrical energy.

■Rev indicator

When the engine speed reaches a set

speed or the red zone, a ring-shaped

indicator ( ) will be displayed on the

tachometer.

The indicators will be displayed in amber

when the engine speed reaches a set

speed, and in red when the engine speed

reaches the red zone.

The engine speed at which the rev indica-

tor will begin to be displayed can be set on

of the multi-information display.

(→P.90)

■Rev peak

When the engine speed reaches or

exceeds 4000 rpm, an afterimage of

the tachometer will be displayed at the

highest engine speed for approxi-

mately 1 second.

84 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Engine speed

On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is pre-

cisely controlled in order to help improve

fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emis-

sions etc.

There are times when the engine speed that

is displayed may differ even when vehicle

operation and driving conditions are the

same.

■Hybrid System Indicator is displayed

when

The Hybrid System Indicator is displayed in

the following situations:

●The shift position is in D or M.

●The driving mode is other than sport

mode.

■Outside temperature display

●In the following situations, the correct

outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer

than normal to change:

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds

(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

• When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of

a garage, tunnel, etc.)

●When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system

may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle

to your Lexus dealer.

■Liquid crystal display

→P.87

■Customization

The gauges and meters can be customized

on of the multi-information display.

(→P.90)

■Display items

-Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has

been driven.

-Trip meter A/trip meter B

Displays the distance the vehicle has been

driven since the meter was last reset. Trip

meters A and B can be used to record and

display different distances independently.

-Distance until next engine oil

WARNING

■The information display at low tem-

peratures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm

up before using the liquid crystal infor-

mation display. At extremely low tem-

peratures, the information display

monitor may respond slowly, and display

changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the

driver’s shifting and the new gear number

appearing on the display. This lag could

cause the driver to downshift again,

causing rapid and excessive engine brak-

ing and possibly an accident resulting in

death or injury.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and

its components

●Do not let the indicator needle of the

tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

●The engine may be overheating if the

engine coolant temperature gauge is

in the red zone (H). In this case, imme-

diately stop the vehicle in a safe place,

and check the engine after it has

cooled completely. (→P.453)

Odometer and trip meter dis-

play

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

change

Displays the distance the vehicle can be

driven until an oil change is necessary.

■Changing the display

Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is

pressed, the displayed item will be

changed. When the trip meter is dis-

played, pressing and holding the switch

will reset the trip meter.

■Pop-up display

The distance until the next engine oil

change will displayed when a warning

message indicating that oil mainte-

nance should be performed soon or is

required is displayed.

The brightness of the instrument panel

lights can be adjusted.

1Darker

2Brighter

■Brightness of the meters (day mode and

night mode)

The brightness of the meters changes

between day mode and night mode.

●Day mode: When the tail lights are off or

when the tail lights are on but the sur-

rounding area is bright

●Night mode: When the tail lights are on

and the surrounding area is dark

The display can be switched between

the center and side positions.

Changing the instrument panel

light brightness

Changing the main meter loca-

tion

86 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Display (except F SPORT models)

By selecting menu icons on the

multi-information display, a variety of

driving-related information can be dis-

played. The multi-information display

can also be used to change display set-

tings and other vehicle settings.

Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up

displays are also displayed in certain

situations.

■Display (F SPORT models)

Main meter in center position

The multi-information display presents

the driver with a variety of driv-

ing-related information.

Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up

displays are also displayed in certain

situations.

Main meter moved to the right

By selecting menu icons on the

multi-information display, a variety of

driving-related information can be dis-

played. The multi-information display

can also be used to change display set-

tings and other vehicle settings.

Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up

displays are also displayed in certain

situations.

■Menu icons

The menu icons will be displayed by

pressing or of the meter con-

trol switch.

F SPORT models: The menu icons can be

displayed when the main meter is moved to

the right.

Multi-information display

Display and menu icons

Driving information display

(→P.87)

Navigation system-linked dis-

play (if equipped) (→P.89)

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

■Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the

display. This phenomenon is characteristic

of liquid crystal displays, and there is no

problem continuing to use the display.

The multi-information display is oper-

ated using the meter control switches.

/ : Select menu icons

/ : Change displayed con-

tent, scroll up/down the screen and

move the cursor up/down

Press: Enter/Set

Press and hold: Reset

Move the main meter* and return

to the previous screen

*:F SPORT models

■Display items (except F SPORT

models)

Press or of the meter control

switch and select . Then press

or to display the following items:

-Drive information 1

-Drive information 2

-Energy monitor (→P.97)

-Tire pressure (→P.397)

-Vehicle sway warning

-Display off

■Display items (F SPORT models)

Main meter in center position

Press or of the meter control

switch to display the following items:

-Drive information 1

-Drive information 2

-Tire pressure (→P.397)

-Gear positions

-Units

-Display off

Audio system-linked display

(→P.90)

Driving support system infor-

mation display (→P.90)

Warning message display

(→P.437)

Settings display (→P.90)

WARNING

■Caution for use while driving

●When operating the multi-information

display while driving, pay extra atten-

tion to the safety of the area around the

vehicle.

●Do not look continuously at the

multi-information display while driving

as you may fail to see pedestrians,

objects on the road, etc. ahead of the

vehicle.

■The information display at low tem-

peratures

→P.78, 84

Changing the meter display

Content of driving information

88 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

-Driving support system information*

(→P.90)

*: Can be selected when a driving support

system is enabled. (→P.230, 240, 250)

Main meter moved to the right

Press or of the meter control

switch and select . Then press

or to display the following items:

-Drive information 1

-Drive information 2

-Energy monitor (→P.97)

-G-force

-Gear Position

-Vehicle sway warning

-Tire pressure (→P.397)

-Display off

■Drive information 1/Drive infor-

mation 2

Displays drive information such as the

following:

Use the displayed values as a reference

only.

-Drive information 1

• Current fuel consumption

• Average fuel economy (after reset)

-Drive information 2

• Distance (driving range)

• Average vehicle speed (after reset)

Displayed items (listed below) can be

changed on . (→P.90)

-Current fuel consumption

Bar type: Displays instantaneous current

fuel consumption

-Average fuel economy

After reset: Displays average fuel con-

sumption since the display was reset*1

After start: Displays average fuel con-

sumption since hybrid system start

After refuel: Displays average fuel con-

sumption since refuel

-Average vehicle speed

After reset: Displays average vehicle

speed since the display was reset*1

After start: Displays average vehicle speed

since hybrid system start

-Elapsed time

After reset: Displays elapsed time since the

display was reset*1

After start: Displays elapsed time since

hybrid system start

-Distance

Driving range: Displays driving range with

remaining fuel*2, 3

After start: Displays the distance driven

since hybrid system start

-Other

Blank: No item

*1: To reset, display the desired item and

press and hold of the meter control

switch.

*2: This distance is computed based on

your average fuel consumption. As a

result, the actual distance that can be

driven may differ from that displayed.

*3: When only a small amount of fuel is

added to the tank, the display may not

be updated.

When refueling, turn the power switch

off. If the vehicle is refueled without

turning the power switch off, the display

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

may not be updated.

■G-force (F SPORT models)

Displays lateral G-forces on the vehi-

cle. Also displays, around the periph-

ery of the G-force display, the left and

right steering amount, accelerator

pedal input, and brake fluid pressure.

Acceleration G-force on the vehi-

cle

Current G-force value (analyzed

value of front/rear and left/right

G-forces)

Record of the maximum G-forces

Accelerator pedal input

Brake fluid pressure

Steering amount

This display is intended for use as a guide-

line. Depending on factors such as the road

surface condition, temperature and vehicle

speed, the display may not show the actual

condition of the vehicle.

-Resetting the record of maximum

G-forces

Press and hold of the meter control

switch to reset the record.

-Peak hold function

If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are

generated, the G-force value display will

turn amber and be held for 2 seconds.

■Gear Position (F SPORT models)

Displays the current shift range or gear

position when the shift position is in D

or M.

■Units (F SPORT models)

The units of measure used can be

changed while driving.

Unlike the units setting performed on the

settings display, the units setting per-

formed on the drive information display

can be changed while driving.

■Vehicle sway warning

Detects the sway of the vehicle within a

lane, which is often associated with a

decrease in the driver’s attention level,

and displays the decrease in attention

using a bar display.

The shorter the bar length, the more

the driver may need to rest.

■Vehicle sway warning

This display is enabled when the operating

conditions of the vehicle sway warning of

the LTA (→P.236) or LKA (→P.244) are

met.

Select to display the following naviga-

tion system-linked information.

-Route guidance to destination

-Compass display (heading-up dis-

play)

■Route guidance to destination display

When the route guidance to destination

display is enabled on the head-up display, it

Navigation system-linked dis-

play (if equipped)

90 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

will not be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display. (→P.94)

Select to enable selection of an audio

source or track on the meter using the

meter control switches.

Select to display the operational status

of the following systems:

-LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if

equipped) (→P.230)

-LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if

equipped) (→P.240)

-Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range (→P.250)

-RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if

equipped) (→P.247)

■Meter display settings that can be

changed

-Language

Select to change the language displayed.

-Units

Select to change the units of measure dis-

played.

-Speedometer display (except F

SPORT models)

Select to set the display of the speedome-

ter to digital/analog/both digital and ana-

log.

-Drive information 1/Drive informa-

tion 2

Select to select up to 2 items (→P.88) that

will be displayed on each Drive information

screen (Drive information 1 screen and

Drive information 2 screen) respectively.

-Clock

Select to switch between 12-hour display

and 24-hour display.

-Pop-up display

Select to enable/disable pop-up displays

for each relevant system.

-Accent color

Select to change the accent color on the

screen, such as the cursor color.

-Tachometer setting

Select to set the display of the Hybrid Sys-

tem Indicator or tachometer for each driv-

ing mode.

-Rev indicator (F SPORT models)

• Select to enable/disable the rev indica-

tor.

• Select to set the engine speed at which

the rev indicator (amber) will begin to be

displayed.

-Rev peak (F SPORT models)

Select to enable/disable the rev peak.

-EV indicator

Select to enable/disable the EV indicator.

-Default setting

Select to reset the meter display settings to

the default setting.

■Vehicle functions and settings that

can be changed

→P.481

■Suspension of the settings display

●Some settings cannot be changed while

Audio system-linked display

Driving support system informa-

tion display

Settings display

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

driving. When changing settings, park

the vehicle in a safe place.

●If a warning message is displayed, opera-

tion of the settings display will be sus-

pended.

Displays suggestions to the driver in

the following situations. To select a

response to a displayed suggestion,

use the meter control switches.

■Suggestion to turn off the head-

lights

If the headlights are left on for a certain

amount of time with the headlight

switch in after the power switch

has been turned off, a suggestion mes-

sage will be displayed asking if you

wish to turn the headlights off.

To turn the headlights off, select “Yes”.

If a front door is opened after the power

switch is turned off, this suggestion mes-

sage will not be displayed.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

WARNING

■Cautions during setting up the dis-

play

As the hybrid system needs to be operat-

ing during setting up the display, ensure

that the vehicle is parked in a place with

adequate ventilation. In a closed area

such as a garage, exhaust gases includ-

ing harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may

collect and enter the vehicle. This may

lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■During setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge,

ensure that the hybrid system is operat-

ing while setting up the display features.

Suggestion function

92 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*:If equipped

Illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is

actually displayed by the head-up display.

Navigation system-linked display area (if equipped)

Displays the following items which are linked to the navigation system:

• Route guidance to destination

•Street name

• Compass (heading-up display)

Driving support system display area (→P.95)

Speed limit/RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area (if equipped)

Displays the following items:

• Speed limit of the current road (linked to the navigation system) (U.S.A. only)

• RSA (Road Sign Assist) display (→P.247)

Outside temperature display area

Driving information display area

Head-up display*

The head-up display projects a variety of driving-related information and the

operating state of the driving support systems on the windshield.

System components

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Displays the following items:

• Speedometer

• Shift position/shift range/gear position (→P.174)

Hybrid System Indicator/tachometer display area (→P.96)

HUD (Head-up display) switch

■Head-up display will operate when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■When using the head-up display

The head-up display may seem dark or hard

to see when viewed through sunglasses,

especially polarized sunglasses. Adjust the

brightness of the head-up display or

remove your sunglasses.

■Street name display

Only street names which are included in the

map data will be displayed.

■Outside temperature display

●When the ambient temperature is

approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the

low outside temperature indicator will

flash for approximately 10 seconds and

the outside temperature display will turn

off. In this case, the display will be dis-

played again when the outside tempera-

ture becomes approximately 41°F (5°C)

or higher.

●In the following situations, the correct

outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer

than normal to change:

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds

(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])

• When the outside temperature has

changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of

a garage, tunnel, etc.)

●When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system

may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle

to your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■When using the head-up display

●Check that the position and brightness

of the head-up display image does not

interfere with safe driving. Incorrect

adjustment of the image’s position or

brightness may obstruct the driver’s

view and lead to an accident, resulting

in death or serious injury.

●Do not continuously look at the

head-up display while driving as you

may fail to see pedestrians, objects on

the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

NOTICE

■Head-up display projector

●Do not place any drinks near the

head-up display projector. If the pro-

jector gets wet, electrical malfunctions

may result.

●Do not place anything on or put stick-

ers onto the head-up display projector.

Doing so could interrupt head-up dis-

play indications.

●Do not touch the inside of the head-up

display projector or thrust sharp edges

or the like into the projector.

Doing so could cause mechanical mal-

functions.

94 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Enabling/disabling the head-up dis-

play

Press the HUD switch.

■Changing settings of the head-up

display

The following settings can be changed

on of the multi-information display.

(→P.481)

-Brightness and vertical position of

the head-up display

Select to adjust the brightness or vertical

position of the head-up display.

-Hybrid System Indicator/tachome-

ter

Select to display the Hybrid System Indica-

tor, tachometer or no content.

-Display content

Select to enable/disable the following

items:

• Route guidance to destination/street

name

• Driving support system display*

• Compass (heading-up display)

• Audio system operation status

*: Make sure to enable this display when

using the driving support systems

-Display angle

Select to adjust the angle of the head-up

display.

■Enabling/disabling of the head-up dis-

play

If the head-up display is disabled, it will

remain disabled when the power switch is

turned off then back to ON mode.

■Display brightness

The brightness of the head-up display can

be adjusted on of the multi-information

display. Also, it is automatically adjusted

according to the ambient brightness.

■Head-up display automatic position

adjustment

If the display position is recorded into mem-

ory, the head-up display will be automati-

cally adjusted to the desired position.

(→P.139)

■When the 12-volt battery is discon-

nected

The customize settings of the head-up dis-

play will be reset.

Using the head-up display

WARNING

■Caution for changing settings of the

head-up display

As the hybrid system needs to be operat-

ing while changing the settings of the

head-up display, ensure that the vehicle

is parked in a place with adequate venti-

lation. In a closed area such as a garage,

exhaust gases including harmful carbon

monoxide (CO) may collect and enter

the vehicle. This may lead to death or a

serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■When changing the settings of the

head-up display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge,

ensure that the hybrid system is operat-

ing while the changing the settings of the

head-up display.

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Displays the operational status of the

following systems:

-LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if

equipped) (→P.230)

-LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if

equipped) (→P.240)

-Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range (→P.250)

Details of content displayed on the

head-up display may differ from that dis-

played on the multi-information display. For

details, refer to the explanation of each sys-

tem.

Pop-up displays for the following sys-

tems will be displayed when necessary.

■Driving support systems

Displays a warning/suggestion/advice

message or the operating state of a rel-

evant system.

-PCS (Pre-Collision System)

(→P.209, 220)

-FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (if

equipped) (→P.227)

-Intuitive parking assist (→P.266)

-Parking Support Brake function (for

static objects) (→P.286)

-Brake Override System (→P.159)

-Drive-Start Control (→P.159)

Details of content displayed on the

head-up display may differ from that dis-

played on the multi-information display. For

details, refer to the explanation of each sys-

tem.

■/ icons

These icons are linked to the

multi-information display

: Master warning icon

Displayed when a warning message is dis-

played on the multi-information display.

(→P.437)

: Information icon

Displayed when a suggestion pop-up dis-

play (→P.91) or advice pop-up display is

displayed on the multi-information display.

■Warning message

Some warning messages are displayed

when necessary, according to certain

conditions.

Details of content displayed on the

head-up display may differ from that dis-

played on the multi-information display.

■Audio system operation status

Displayed when an audio remote con-

trol switch on the steering wheel is

operated.

■Hands-free system status

Displayed when the hands-free system

is operated.

■When a pop-up display is displayed

When a pop-up display is displayed, a cur-

rent display may no longer be displayed. In

this case, the display will return after the

pop-up display disappears.

Driving support system display

area

Pop-up display

96 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Hybrid System Indicator

Charge area

Hybrid Eco area

Eco area

Power area

Displayed content is the same as that dis-

played on the meter (Hybrid System Indi-

cator). For details, refer to P.78 or P.83.

■Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolu-

tions per minute.

Multi-information display

Center Display

Meter control switches

“MENU” button

Touchpad

Hybrid System Indica-

tor/tachometer

Energy monitor/consump-

tion screen

The state of the hybrid system can

be viewed on the multi-information

display and Center Display.

The energy monitor or consump-

tion screen can be displayed and

operated on the side display.

System components

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

■Center Display

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select on the

menu screen.

If a screen other than “Energy Monitor” is

displayed, select “Energy”.

■Multi-information display

Press the or meter control

switch and select , and then press

or to select the energy monitor

display.

Energy monitor

When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)

Center Display Multi-information display

When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction

motor)

Center Display Multi-information display

When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine

Center Display Multi-information display

98 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

status

Center Display

Low

High

When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

Center Display Multi-information display

When there is no energy flow

Center Display Multi-information display

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Multi-information display

Low

High

These images are examples only, and may

vary slightly from actual conditions.

■Trip information

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select on the

menu screen.

If a screen other than “Trip Information”

is displayed, select “Trip Information”.

Resetting the consumption data

Fuel consumption in the past 15

minutes

Current fuel consumption

Regenerated energy in the past 15

minutes

One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5

symbols are shown.

Average vehicle speed since the

hybrid system was started.

Elapsed time since the hybrid sys-

tem was started.

Cruising range

Average fuel consumption for the past

15 minutes is divided by color into past

averages and averages attained since

the power switch was last turned to

ON mode. Use the displayed average

fuel consumption as a reference.

The image is an example only, and may

vary slightly from actual conditions.

■History

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch, then select on the

menu screen.

If a screen other than “History” is dis-

played, select “History”.

Best recorded fuel consumption

Latest fuel consumption

Previous fuel consumption record

Resetting the history data

Updating the latest fuel consump-

tion data

Consumption

100 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The average fuel consumption history

is divided by color into past averages

and the average fuel consumption

since the last updated. Use the dis-

played average fuel consumption as a

reference.

The image is an example only, and may

vary slightly from actual conditions.

■Updating the history data

Update the latest fuel consumption by

selecting “Clip” to measure the current fuel

consumption again.

■Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted

by selecting “Clear”.

■Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance

that can be driven with the quantity of fuel

remaining.

This distance is computed based on your

average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be

driven may differ from that displayed.

Display the vehicle information on the

side display (→P.317), and then select

or to display the desired

screen.

The image is an example only, and may

vary slightly from actual conditions.

Displays the average fuel consumption

and regenerated energy for the past 10

minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as

the cruising range.

■Trip information (type A)

Use the displayed average fuel consump-

tion as a reference.

■Trip information (type B)

Displays the cruising range, latest fuel

consumption and the amount of time

elapsed since the hybrid system was

started.

Use the displayed average fuel consump-

tion as a reference.

■History

Displays the average fuel consumption

and highest fuel consumption.

Using the side display

101

2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle status information and indicators

Use the displayed average fuel consump-

tion as a reference.

■Energy monitor

Displays the hybrid system operation

and energy recovery states.

Displayed content is the same as that

displayed on the multi-information dis-

play. →P.88

102 2-1. Instrument cluster

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

103

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

3-1. Key information

Keys .................................................104

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the

doors and trunk

Doors...............................................108

Trunk................................................. 112

Smart access system with

push-button start...................... 119

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats.....................................128

Power rear seat...........................135

Driving position memory ........139

Rear seat position memory....143

Head restraints............................144

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and

mirrors

Steering wheel............................. 147

Inside rear view mirror.............148

Outside rear view mirrors......149

3-5. Opening, closing the windows

and moon roof

Power windows............................ 151

Moon roof .....................................153

104 3-1. Key information

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-1.Key informat ion

The following keys are provided with

the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart access system with

push-button start (→P.119)

• Operating the wireless remote control

function (→P.106)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Card key (electronic key) (if

equipped)

Operating the smart access system with

push-button start (→P.119)

■Card key (if equipped)

●The card key is not waterproof.

●The mechanical key that is stored inside

the card key should be used only if a

problem arises, such as when the card

key does not operate properly.

●If it is difficult to take out the mechanical

key, push down the lock release button

using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to

pull it out, use a coin etc.

●To store the mechanical key in the card

key, insert it while pressing the lock

release button.

●If the battery cover is not installed and the

battery falls out or if the battery was

removed because the key got wet, rein-

stall the battery with the positive terminal

facing the Lexus emblem.

■When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an

aircraft, make sure you do not press any

buttons on the electronic key while inside

the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an

electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that

the buttons are not likely to be pressed acci-

dentally. Pressing a button may cause the

electronic key to emit radio waves that

could interfere with the operation of the air-

craft.

■Electronic key battery depletion

●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.

(The card key battery life is about a year

and a half.)

●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will

sound in the cabin and a message will be

shown on the multi-information display

when the hybrid system is stopped.

Keys

The keys

105

3-1. Key information

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

●To reduce key battery depletion when the

electronic key is to not be used for long

periods of time, set the electronic key to

the battery-saving mode. (→P.120)

●As the electronic key always receives

radio waves, the battery will become

depleted even if the electronic key is not

used. The following symptoms indicate

that the electronic key battery may be

depleted. Replace the battery when nec-

essary. (→P.413)

• The smart access system with push-but-

ton start or the wireless remote control

does not operate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

•The LED indicator on the key surface

does not turn on.

●To avoid serious deterioration, do not

leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m)

of the following electrical appliances that

produce a magnetic field:

•TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and

battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless

phones

• Table lamps

• Induction cookers

■Replacing the battery

→P.413

■Confirmation of the number of regis-

tered keys

The number of keys already registered to

the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your

Lexus dealer for details.

■If “A New Key has been Registered

Contact Your Dealer for Details” is

shown on the multi-information display

This message will be displayed each time

the driver’s door is opened when the doors

are unlocked from the outside for approxi-

mately 10 days after a new electronic key

has been registered.

If this message is displayed but you have not

had a new electronic key registered, ask

your Lexus dealer to check if an unknown

electronic key (other than those in your

possession) has been registered.

NOTICE

■To prevent key damage

●Do not drop the keys, subject them to

strong shocks or bend them.

●Do not expose the keys to high tem-

peratures for a long period of time.

●Do not get the keys wet or wash them

in an ultrasonic washer etc.

●Do not attach metallic or magnetic

materials to the keys or place the keys

close to such materials.

●Do not disassemble the keys.

●Do not attach a sticker or anything else

to the surface of the electronic key.

●Do not place the keys near objects that

produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,

audio systems and induction cookers,

or medical electrical equipment, such

as low-frequency therapy equipment.

■Carrying the electronic key on your

person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm)

or more away from electric appliances

that are turned on. Radio waves emitted

from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10

cm) of the electronic key may interfere

with the key, causing the key to not func-

tion properly.

■In case of a smart access system with

push-button start malfunction or

other key-related problems

→P.445

■When an electronic key is lost

→P.444

■Handling the card key (if equipped)

●Do not apply excess force when insert-

ing the mechanical key into the card

key. Doing so may damage the card

key.

106 3-1. Key information

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The electronic keys are equipped with

the following wireless remote control:

Locks the doors (→P.108)

Unlocks the doors (→P.108)

Opens the windows and moon

roof* (→P.108)

Opens the trunk (→P.115)

Sounds the alarm

*: This setting must be customized at your

Lexus dealer.

■Theft deterrent panic mode

When is pressed for longer than about one

second, an alarm will sound intermittently

and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any

person from trying to break into or damage

your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the

electronic key.

To take out the mechanical key, push

the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in

one direction, as the key only has grooves

on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in

NOTICE

●If the battery or card key terminals get

wet, the battery may corrode and the

card key may stop working.

If the key is dropped into water, or if

drinking water, etc. is spilled on the key,

immediately remove the battery cover

and wipe the battery and terminals. (To

remove the battery cover, lightly grasp

and pull it.) If the battery is corroded,

have your Lexus dealer replace the

battery.

●Do not crush the battery cover or use

a screwdriver to remove the battery

cover.

Forcibly removing the battery cover

may bend or damage the key.

●If the battery cover is frequently

removed, the battery cover may

become loose.

●When installing the battery, make sure

to check the direction of the battery.

Installing the battery in the wrong

direction may cause the battery to

deplete rapidly.

●The surface of the card key may be

damaged, or its coating may peel off in

the following situations:

• The card key is carried together with

hard objects, such as coins and keys.

• The card key is scraped with a sharp

object, such as the tip of a mechanical

pencil.

• The surface of the card key is wiped

with thinner or benzene.

Wireless remote control

Using the mechanical key

107

3-1. Key information

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt

to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in

the electronic key. Carry the mechanical

key together with the electronic key. If the

electronic key battery is depleted or the

entry function does not operate properly,

you will need the mechanical key.

(→P.413)

■When required to leave the vehicle’s

key with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch off

(→P.118) and lock the glove box (→P.344)

as circumstances demand.

Remove the mechanical key for your own

use and provide the attendant with the elec-

tronic key only.

■If you lose your mechanical keys

→P.444

■If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated

from the internal mechanism.

108 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-2.Opening, closing and locking t he doors and trunk

■Smart access system with

push-button start

Carry the electronic key to enable this

function.

1Grip the driver’s door handle to

unlock the door. Holding the

driver’s door handle for approxi-

mately 2 seconds unlocks all the

doors. Grip any passenger door

handle to unlock all the doors.*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back

of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 sec-

onds after the doors are locked.

*: The door unlock settings can be

changed.

2Touch the lock sensor (indentation

on the upper part of the door han-

dle) to lock all the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

■Wireless remote control

1Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

2Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s

door. Pressing the button again within 5

seconds unlocks the other door.

Press and hold to open the windows and

moon roof.*

*: This setting must be customized at your

Lexus dealer.

■Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry

function unlocks using the wireless remote

control.

1Turn the power switch off.

2When the indicator light on the key sur-

face is not on, press and hold ,

or for approximately 5

seconds while pressing and holding

The setting changes each time an operation

is performed, as shown below. (When

changing the setting continuously, release

the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and

repeat step 3.)

Doors

Unlocking and locking the doors

from the outside

109

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

To prevent unintended triggering of the

alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless

remote control and open and close a door

once after the settings have been changed.

(If a door is not opened within 60 seconds

after is pressed, the doors will be

locked again and the alarm will automati-

cally be set.)

In a case that the alarm is triggered, imme-

diately stop the alarm. (→P.68)

■Impact detection door lock release sys-

tem

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a

strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.

Depending on the force of the impact or the

type of accident, however, the system may

not operate.

■Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flash-

ers flash to indicate that the doors have

been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once;

Unlocked: twice)

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the win-

dows and moon roof are operating.

■Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately

60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked,

the security feature automatically locks the

vehicle again.

■When the doors cannot be locked by the

lock sensor on the upper part of the

door handle

When the doors cannot be locked even if

the lock sensor on the surface of the door

handle is touched by a finger, touch the lock

sensor with the palm.

If you are wearing gloves, remove them.

■Open door warning buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when

a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds

continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the

door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehi-

cle once more.

■Setting the alarm

Locking the doors will set the alarm system.

(→P.68)

■Conditions affecting the operation of

the smart access system with push-but-

ton start or wireless remote control

→P.120

■If the smart access system with

push-button start or the wireless remote

control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock

the doors. (→P.445)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it

is depleted. (→P.413)

■If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked and unlocked

using the smart access system with

push-button start or wireless remote con-

trol. Lock or unlock the doors using the

mechanical key. (→P.445)

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

Multi-information

display/Beep Unlocking function

Exterior: Beeps 3

times

Interior: Pings once

Holding the driver’s

door handle unlocks

only the driver’s

door.

Holding any of the

passenger door

handles unlocks all

the doors.

Exterior: Beeps

twice

Interior: Pings once

Holding a door han-

dle unlocks all the

doors.

110 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

(→P.481)

■Door lock switches (to

lock/unlock)

1Locks all the doors

2Unlocks all the doors

■Inside lock buttons (to lock)

Push down the inside lock button to

lock the door.

■Inside door handles (to unlock)

For the front doors

Pull the handle to unlock and open the

door.

When the door is unlocked, the inside lock

button will pop up.

For the rear doors

Pull the handle to unlock the door. Pull

the handle a second time to open the

door.

WARNING

■To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while

driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door

opening and an occupant throwing out of

the vehicle, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Ensure that all doors are properly

closed and locked.

●Do not pull the inside handle of the

doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the front doors,

as the doors may be opened even if the

inside lock buttons are in locked position.

●Set the rear door child-protector locks

when children are seated in the rear

seats.

■When opening or closing a door

Check the surroundings of the vehicle

such as whether the vehicle is on an

incline, whether there is enough space

for a door to open and whether a strong

wind is blowing. When opening or clos-

ing the door, hold the door handle tightly

to prepare for any unpredictable move-

ment.

■Vehicle height control precautions

(vehicles with electronically modu-

lated air suspension)

In the following situations, make sure to

check the safety of the area around the

vehicle, as the vehicle height may change

and part of someone’s body may be

caught in the vehicle, possibly causing

injury or the vehicle may be damaged.

●When opening a door

●When unlocking the doors using the

smart access system with push-button

start

Unlocking and locking the doors

from the inside

111

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

When the door is unlocked, the inside lock

button will pop up.

■Locking the front doors from the outside

without a key

1Push down the inside lock button.

2Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the power

switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or

the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

However, the key may not be detected cor-

rectly and the door may be locked.

■Door closer

In the event that a door is left slightly open,

the door closer will automatically close it to

the fully closed position.

●The door closer will operate regardless

of the power switch mode.

●The door closer will not function if the

door has been closed while pulling the

inside or outside door handle.

●The door can be opened by pulling the

inside or outside door handle, even when

the door closer is operating (except

when the lock button is in the lock posi-

tion or the child-protector lock is set).

●A motor sound may be heard for several

seconds after the door closer closes the

door. This does not indicate a malfunc-

tion.

■Open door warning buzzer

If a door or the trunk is not fully closed, a

buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed

reaches 3 mph (5 km/h).

The open door(s) or trunk is indicated on

the multi-information display.

The door cannot be opened from

inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

1Unlock

WARNING

■Door closer

In the event that a door is left slightly

open, the door closer will automatically

close it to the fully closed position. It

takes several seconds before the door

easy closer begins to operate.

If the child-protector lock is set, the door

closer will not stop during operation even

if an attempt is made to open the door

from inside the vehicle. Be careful not to

catch fingers or anything else in the door.

Failure to do so may result in serious

injury.

NOTICE

■To prevent door closer malfunction

Do not frequently repeat opening and

closing of doors, or apply excessive force

to a door while the door closer is operat-

ing.

Rear door child-protector lock

112 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children

from opening the rear doors. Push down

on each rear door switch to lock both rear

doors.

The following functions can be set or

canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to

P.481.

Automatic door locking and

unlocking systems

Function Operation

Speed linked

door locking

function

All doors are automati-

cally locked when vehi-

cle speed is

approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) or higher.

Shift position

linked door lock-

ing function

All doors are automati-

cally locked when the

shift position is shifted

to a position other than

Shift position

linked door

unlocking func-

tion

All doors are automati-

cally unlocked when

the shift position is

shifted to P.

Driver’s door

linked door

unlocking func-

tion

All doors are automati-

cally unlocked when

driver’s door is opened

within approximately

45 seconds after turn-

ing the power switch

off.

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the

trunk opener switch, entry function

or wireless remote control.

The trunk can be closed using the

trunk closer.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■Before driving

●Make sure that the trunk lid is fully

closed. If the trunk lid is not fully

closed, it may open unexpectedly

while driving and hit near-by objects or

luggage in the trunk may be thrown

out, causing an accident.

●Do not allow children to play in the

trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the

trunk, they could suffer from heat

exhaustion, suffocation or other inju-

ries.

●Do not allow a child to open or close

the trunk lid.

Doing so may cause the trunk lid to

open unexpectedly, or cause the

child’s hands, head, or neck to be

caught by the closing trunk lid.

■Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the

event of sudden braking or a collision,

they are susceptible to death or serious

injury.

■Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the

body to be caught, resulting in serious

injury.

113

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

WARNING

●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow

and ice, from the trunk lid before

opening it. Failure to do so may cause

the trunk lid to suddenly shut again

after it is opened.

●When opening or closing the trunk lid,

thoroughly check to make sure the

surrounding area is safe.

●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure

they are safe and let them know that

the trunk is about to open or close.

●Use caution when opening or closing

the trunk lid in windy weather as it may

move abruptly in strong wind.

●The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is

not opened fully. It is more difficult to

open or close the trunk lid on an

incline than on a level surface, so

beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly

opening or closing by itself. Make sure

that the trunk lid is fully open and

secure before using the trunk.

●When closing the trunk lid, take extra

care to prevent your fingers etc. from

being caught.

●When closing the trunk lid, make sure

to press it lightly on its outer surface. If

the trunk handle is used to fully close

the trunk lid, it may result in hands or

arms being caught.

●Do not attach any accessories other

than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk

lid. Such additional weight on the trunk

lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut

again after it is opened.

■Trunk easy closer

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly

open, the trunk easy closer will automati-

cally close it to the fully closed position. It

takes several seconds before the trunk

easy closer begins to operate. Be careful

not to catch fingers or anything else in

the trunk lid, as this may cause bone frac-

tures or other serious injuries.

■Power trunk opener and closer

Observe the following precautions when

operating the power trunk opener and

closer.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

●Check the safety of the surrounding

area to make sure there are no obsta-

cles or anything that could cause any

of your belongings to get caught.

●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure

they are safe and let them know that

the trunk is about to open or close.

●If the trunk closer switch is pressed

while the trunk lid is opening during

automatic operation, the trunk lid

stops opening. Take extra care when

on an incline, as the trunk lid may open

or close suddenly.

114 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Trunk opener switch

Press the trunk opener switch.

The trunk lid will fully open.

WARNING

●On an incline, the trunk lid may sud-

denly shut after it opens automatically.

Make sure the trunk lid is fully open

and secure before using the trunk.

●In the following situations, the power

trunk opener and closer may detect an

abnormality and automatic operation

may be stopped. In this case, the trunk

lid has to be operated manually. Take

extra care in this situation, as the

stopped trunk lid may suddenly shut,

causing an accident.

• When the trunk lid contacts an obsta-

cle

• When the 12-volt battery voltage sud-

denly drops, such as when the power

switch is turned to ON mode or the

hybrid system is started during auto-

matic operation

●Do not attach any accessories other

than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk

lid. The power trunk opener and closer

may not operate, causing itself to mal-

function, or the trunk lid may suddenly

shut again after it is opened.

■Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if

equipped)

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

●Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust

pipes to become quite hot. When

operating the Hands Free Power Trunk

Lid, be careful not to touch the exhaust

pipe.

●Do not operate the Hands Free Power

Trunk Lid if there is little space under

the rear bumper.

■Jam protection function

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause serious injury.

●Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protec-

tion function.

●The jam protection function may not

work if something gets caught just

before the trunk lid fully closes. Be

careful not to catch fingers or anything

else in the trunk lid.

●The jam protection function may not

work depending on the shape of the

object that is caught. Be careful not to

catch fingers or anything else.

NOTICE

■To prevent trunk easy closer malfunc-

tions

Do not apply force to the trunk lid while

the trunk easy closer is operating.

■To prevent damage to the power

trunk opener and closer

●Make sure that there is no luggage or

snow on the trunk lid before operating

the power trunk opener and closer. In

addition, make sure that there is no ice

between the trunk lid and frame that

prevents movement of the trunk lid.

Operating the power trunk opener

and closer when excessive load is

present on the trunk lid may cause a

malfunction.

●Do not apply excessive force to the

trunk lid while the power trunk opener

and closer is operating.

Opening/closing the trunk

115

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

■Smart access system with

push-button start

While carrying the electronic key,

press the button.

The trunk lid will fully open.

If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is

opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.

When all the doors are unlocked using

one of the following methods, the trunk

can be opened without the electronic

key:

-Entry function

-Wireless remote control

-Door lock switches

-Automatic door unlocking system

-Mechanical key

■Wireless remote control

Press and hold the switch.

A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will

fully open.

If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is

opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.

■Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if

equipped)

1While carrying an electronic key,

stand slightly away from the vehicle,

move a foot under the center of the

rear bumper and then pull it back.

The trunk lid will not start operating while a

foot is detected under the rear bumper.

If another electronic key for your vehicle is

in the vehicle, it may take slightly longer

than normal for the trunk lid to start oper-

ating.

2A buzzer will sound and the trunk

lid will fully open/close.

If a foot is moved under the rear bumper

while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid

will stop moving.

If a foot is moved under the rear bumper

while the trunk lid is closing, the trunk lid

will open.

■Trunk closer switch

Press the trunk closer switch.

116 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will

fully close.

Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is

closing opens the trunk lid again.

■Trunk grip

Using the trunk grip, pull down the

trunk lid without applying sideways

force and push the trunk lid down from

the outside to close it.

■Trunk lid light/trunk light

●The trunk lid light/trunk light turns on

when the trunk is opened.

●If the trunk lid light/trunk light is left on

when the power switch is turned off, the

light will go off automatically after 20

minutes.

■Trunk easy closer

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly

open, the trunk easy closer will automati-

cally close it to the fully closed position.

●The trunk easy closer will operate

regardless of the power switch mode.

●If the trunk easy closer does not operate,

open the trunk to the half open position

or more and then close it.

■Function to prevent the trunk being

locked with the electronic key inside

●When all doors are locked, closing the

trunk lid with the electronic key left inside

the trunk will sound an alarm.

In this case, the trunk lid can be opened

pressing the trunk release button on the

trunk lid.

●If the spare electronic key is put in the

trunk with all the doors locked, the key

confinement prevention function is acti-

vated so the trunk can be opened. In

order to prevent theft, take all electronic

keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

●If the electronic key is put in the trunk with

all the doors locked, the key may not be

detected depending on the location of

the key and the surrounding radio wave

conditions. In this case, the key confine-

ment prevention function cannot be acti-

vated, causing the doors to lock when the

trunk is closed. Make sure to check

where the key is before closing the trunk.

●The key confinement prevention function

cannot be activated if any one of the

doors is unlocked. In this case, open the

trunk using the trunk opener.

■Hands Free Power Trunk Lid operating

conditions (if equipped)

The Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sen-

sor) is enabled and the power switch is

turned off.

■Overload protection function

The trunk lid will not operate when exces-

sive load is present on the top of the trunk

lid.

■Fall-down protection function

While the trunk lid is opening automatically,

applying excessive force to it will stop the

opening operation to prevent the trunk lid

from rapidly falling down.

■Jam protection function

While the trunk lid is closing automatically,

the trunk lid will stop closing and open if

something gets caught.

117

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

■Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the

glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside

of the trunk lid to the side.

The lever will continue to glow for some

time after the trunk lid is closed.

■Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the

mechanical key. (→P.446)

If the trunk is unlocked using the mechani-

cal key, the power trunk lid and trunk easy

closer will not be operational. To return

them to an operational state, fully close the

trunk lid by hand.

■If the smart access system with

push-button start or the wireless remote

control does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk.

(→P.446)

Replace the key battery with a new one if it

is depleted. (→P.413)

■Situations in which the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid may operate uninten-

tionally (if equipped)

In the following situations, the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid may operate unintention-

ally.

To prevent unintentional operation, do not

leave the electronic key in the trunk and

keep it out of the effective range (detection

area) or disable the Hands Free Power

Trunk Lid (kick sensor).

●When a large amount of water is applied

to the rear bumper, such as when the

vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain

●When dirt is wiped off the rear bumper

●When a small animal or small object, such

as a ball, moves under the rear bumper

●When an object is moved from under the

rear bumper

●When snow, etc. is removed from under

the rear bumper

●If someone is swinging their legs while sit-

ting on the rear bumper

●If the legs or another part of someone’s

body contacts the rear bumper while

passing by the vehicle

●When the vehicle is parked near an elec-

trical noise source which affects the sen-

sitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid,

such as a pay parking spot, gas station,

electrically heated road, or fluorescent

light

●When the vehicle is near a TV tower,

electric power plant, radio station, large

display, airport or other facility that gen-

erates strong radio waves or electrical

noise

●When the vehicle is parked in a place

where objects, such as grass, move near

the rear bumper

●If luggage, etc. is set near the rear

bumper

●If accessories or a vehicle cover is

installed/removed near the rear bumper

●When the vehicle is being towed

■Situations in which the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid may not operate prop-

erly (if equipped)

●In the following situations, the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid may not operate prop-

erly:

• If the rear bumper is strongly hit with a

foot or is touched for a while

Make sure not to touch the rear bumper

with a foot when operating the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid.

If the rear bumper has been touched for a

while, wait for a short time before attempt-

ing to operate the Hands Free Power Trunk

Lid again.

•When an external radio wave source

interferes with the communication

between the electronic key and the vehi-

cle (→P.120)

• When the vehicle is parked near an elec-

118 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

trical noise source which affects the sen-

sitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid,

such as a pay parking spot, gas station,

electrically heated road, or fluorescent

light

• When the vehicle is near a TV tower,

electric power plant, radio station, large

display, airport or other facility that gen-

erates strong radio waves or electrical

noise

• When a large amount of water is applied

to the rear bumper, such as when the

vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain

• When mud, snow, ice, etc. is attached to

the rear bumper

• When the vehicle has been parked for a

while near objects that may move under

the rear bumper, such as grass

• When an accessory is installed to the rear

bumper

Make sure to disable the Hands Free

Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor) if an acces-

sory is installed to the rear bumper.

●The Hands Free Power Trunk Lid will not

operate in the following situations:

• When an electronic key is not carried

• When an electronic key is not within the

effective range (detection area)

■Open door warning buzzer

→P.111

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

The trunk opener switch can be tem-

porarily disabled to protect luggage

stored in the trunk against theft.

Turn the main switch in the glove box

off to disable the trunk opener.

Off

The trunk lid cannot be opened even with

the wireless remote control, entry function

or Hands Free Power Trunk Lid.

■When leaving a key to the vehicle with a

parking attendant

→P.107

Luggage security system

119

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

■Antenna location

Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna inside the trunk

Antenna outside the trunk

■Effective range (areas within which the

electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the

electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m)

of an outside door handle. (Only the doors

detecting the key can be operated.)

When opening the trunk

The system can be operated when the

electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m)

of the trunk release button.

When starting the hybrid system or

changing power switch modes

The system can be operated when the

electronic key is inside the vehicle.

■Alarms and warning messages

An alarm sounds and warning messages

are displayed on the multi-information dis-

play to protect against unexpected acci-

dents or theft of the vehicle resulting from

erroneous operation. When a warning mes-

sage is displayed, take appropriate mea-

sures based on the displayed message.

(→P.437)

When only an alarm sounds, circumstances

and correction procedures are as follows.

●When an exterior alarm sounds once for

5 seconds

Smart access system with

push-button start

The following operations can be

performed simply by carrying the

electronic key (including the card

key) on your person, for example in

your pocket. The driver should

always carry the electronic key.

-Locks and unlocks the doors

(→P.108)

-Opens the trunk (→P.115)

-Starts the hybrid system

(→P.168)

120 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●When an interior alarm sounds continu-

ously

■If “Key Detected in Vehicle” is shown on

the multi-information display

An attempt was made to lock the doors

using the smart access system with push-

button start while the electronic key was still

inside the vehicle. Retrieve the electronic

key from the vehicle and lock the doors

again.

■Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be acti-

vated in order to prevent the electronic key

battery and the 12-volt battery from being

discharged while the vehicle is not in opera-

tion for a long time.

●In the following situations, the smart

access system with push-button start may

take some time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an

area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the

outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or

longer.

• The smart access system with push-but-

ton start has not been used for 5 days or

longer.

●If the smart access system with push-but-

ton start has not been used for 14 days or

longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at

any doors except the driver’s door. In this

case, take hold of the driver’s door han-

dle, or use the wireless remote control or

the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

■Turning an electronic key to bat-

tery-saving mode

When battery-saving mode is set, battery

depletion is minimized by stopping the elec-

tronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and holding

. Confirm that the electronic key indica-

tor flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the

smart access system with push-button start

cannot be used. To cancel the function,

press any of the electronic key buttons.

■Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button

start uses weak radio waves. In the following

situations, the communication between the

electronic key and the vehicle may be

affected, preventing the smart access sys-

tem with push-button start, wireless remote

control and immobilizer system from oper-

ating properly. (Ways of coping: →P.445)

●When the electronic key battery is

depleted

●Near a TV tower, electric power plant,

gas station, radio station, large display,

Situation Correction

procedure

An attempt was made to

lock the vehicle while a

door was open.

Close all of the

doors and lock

the doors

again.

The trunk was closed

while the electronic key

was still inside the trunk

and all the doors were

locked.

Retrieve the

electronic key

from the trunk

and close the

trunk lid.

Situation Correction

procedure

The power switch was

turned to ACCESSORY

mode while the driver’s

door was open (The

driver’s door was opened

when the power switch

was in ACCESSORY

mode).

Turn the power

switch off and

close the

driver’s door.

The power switch was

turned off while the

driver’s door was open.

Close the

driver’s door.

121

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

airport or other facility that generates

strong radio waves or electrical noise

●When carrying a portable radio, cellular

phone, cordless phone or other wireless

communication device

●When the electronic key is in contact

with, or is covered by the following metal-

lic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil

inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

•Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

●When other wireless keys (that emit radio

waves) are being used nearby

●When carrying the electronic key

together with the following devices that

emit radio waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a

wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital

assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

●If window tint with a metallic content or

metallic objects are attached to the rear

window

●When the electronic key is placed near a

battery charger or electronic devices

●When the vehicle is parked in a pay park-

ing spot where radio waves are emitted.

■Note for the entry function

●Even when the electronic key is within the

effective range (detection areas), the sys-

tem may not operate properly in the fol-

lowing cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the win-

dow or outside door handle, near the

ground, or in a high place when the doors

are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or

in a high place, or too close to the center

of the rear bumper when the trunk is

opened.

• The electronic key is on the instrument

panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the

door pockets or glove box when the

hybrid system is started or power switch

modes are changed.

●Do not leave the electronic key on top of

the instrument panel or near the door

pockets when exiting the vehicle.

Depending on the radio wave reception

conditions, it may be detected by the

antenna outside the cabin and the doors

will become lockable from the outside,

possibly trapping the electronic key

inside the vehicle.

●As long as the electronic key is within the

effective range, the doors may be locked

or unlocked by anyone. However, only

the doors detecting the electronic key

can be used to unlock the vehicle.

●Even if the electronic key is not inside the

vehicle, it may be possible to start the

hybrid system if the electronic key is near

the window.

●The doors may unlock or lock if a large

amount of water splashes on the door

handle, such as in the rain or in a car

wash, when the electronic key is within

the effective range. (The doors will auto-

matically be locked after approximately

60 seconds if the doors are not opened

and closed.)

●If the wireless remote control is used to

lock the doors when the electronic key is

near the vehicle, there is a possibility that

the door may not be unlocked by the

entry function. (Use the wireless remote

control to unlock the doors.)

●Touching the door lock sensor while

wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock

operation.

●When the lock operation is performed

using the lock sensor, recognition signals

will be shown up to two consecutive

times. After this, no recognition signals

will be given.

●If the door handle becomes wet while the

electronic key is within the effective

range, the door may lock and unlock

repeatedly. In this case, follow the follow-

ing correction procedures to wash the

vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft.

(2 m) or more away from the vehicle.

(Take care to ensure that the key is not

stolen.)

122 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• Set the electronic key to battery-saving

mode to disable the smart access system

with push-button start. (→P.120)

●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle

and a door handle becomes wet during a

car wash, a message may be shown on

the multi-information display and a

buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To

turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

●The lock sensor may not work properly if

it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud,

etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to

operate it again.

●A sudden approach to the effective

range or door handle may prevent the

doors from being unlocked. In this case,

return the door handle to the original

position and check that the doors unlock

before pulling the door handle again.

●If there is another electronic key in the

detection area, it may take slightly longer

to unlock the doors after the door handle

is gripped.

■When the vehicle is not driven for

extended periods

●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not

leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m)

of the vehicle.

●The smart access system with push-but-

ton start can be deactivated in advance.

●Setting the electronic key to battery-sav-

ing mode helps to reduce key battery

depletion. (→P.120)

■To operate the system properly

●Make sure to carry the electronic key

when operating the system. Do not get

the electronic key too close to the vehicle

when operating the system from the out-

side of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding

condition of the electronic key, the key may

not be detected correctly and the system

may not operate properly. (The alarm may

go off accidentally, or the door lock pre-

vention function may not operate.)

●Do not leave the electronic key inside the

trunk.

The key confinement prevention function

may not operate, depending on the loca-

tion of the key (the inside edge of the

Trunk), conditions (inside a metal bag,

close to metallic objects) and the radio

waves in the surrounding area. (→P.116)

■If the smart access system with

push-button start does not operate

properly

●Locking and unlocking the doors and

trunk: →P.445

●Starting the hybrid system: →P.446

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

■If the smart access system with

push-button start has been deactivated

in a customized setting

●Locking and unlocking the doors and

opening the trunk:

Use the wireless remote control or

mechanical key. (→P.108, 115, 445)

●Starting the hybrid system and changing

power switch modes: →P.446

●Stopping the hybrid system: →P.170

123

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

■Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

124 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

125

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

For vehicles sold in Canada

126 3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

127

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

WARNING

■Caution regarding interference with

electronic devices

●People with implantable cardiac pace-

makers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should keep

away from the smart access system

with push-button start antennas.

(→P.119)

The radio waves may affect the opera-

tion of such devices. If necessary, the

entry function can be disabled. Ask

your Lexus dealer for details, such as

the frequency of radio waves and tim-

ing of the emitted radio waves. Then,

consult your doctor to see if you

should disable the entry function.

●Users of any electrical medical device

other than implantable cardiac pace-

makers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable

cardioverter defibrillators should con-

sult the manufacturer of the device for

information about its operation under

the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected

effects on the operation of such medi-

cal devices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details on dis-

abling the entry function.

128 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3-3.Adjusting the seats

■Seat adjustment switches

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-

ment switch

Vertical height adjustment switch

Front seats

WARNING

■When adjusting the seat position

●Take care when adjusting the seat

position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving

seat.

●Do not put your hands under the seat

or near the moving parts to avoid

injury.

Fingers or hands may become

jammed in the seat mechanism.

●Make sure to leave enough space

around the feet so they do not get

stuck.

■Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap

belt during a collision, do not recline the

seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may

slide past the hips and apply restraint

forces directly to the abdomen, or your

neck may contact the shoulder belt,

increasing the risk of death or serious

injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while

driving as the seat may unexpectedly

move and cause the driver to lose control

of the vehicle.

■Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the driver’s seat or rear seat

Do not operate the front passenger’s seat

when a passenger is seated in it. In addi-

tion, do not let anyone sit down in the

front passenger’s seat while the seat is

being operated or when the head

restraint is being folded. The front pas-

senger may catch their legs between the

instrument panel and seat, or the head

restraint may interfere with their head,

resulting in injury.

■When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward

If the outside rear view mirror is difficult

to see, due to the position of the front

passenger’s seat, move the front passen-

ger’s seat to an appropriate position.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the

vehicle and cause an accident, resulting

in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the driver’s seat or rear seat

Before operating the front passenger’s

seat, make sure that there is no luggage

or any other objects on the seat or in the

footwell that could prevent its operation.

Such items may result in excess force

being applied, causing damage to the

seat and/or the luggage.

Adjustment procedure

129

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

Lumbar support adjustment switch

Seat cushion length adjustment

switch (if equipped)

■Center Display

1Press the seat switch.

2Using the Remote Touch pad,

select “Driver Seat Adjustment” or

“Passenger Seat Adjustment”.

3Select the button for the desired

adjustment.

Head restraint adjustment

(→P.144)

Shoulder bolster adjustment (if

equipped)

Lumbar support adjustment

Pelvic support adjustment

Seatback side bolster adjustment (if

equipped)

Seat cushion side bolster adjust-

ment (if equipped)

Hip support adjustment (if

equipped)

4Perform adjustment using the dis-

played buttons.

The seat will move while a button is

selected.

■When adjusting the front seats

While adjusting a front seat, to avoid con-

tact with the ceiling, instrument panel or

rear seats, the operation of the seat may be

restricted or parts of the seat other than that

being adjusted may move.

■Operation after the power switch is

turned off

After a certain time elapses after the power

switch is turned off, the following parts of

the front seats will move to their neutral

positions.

●Shoulder bolster (if equipped)

●Lumbar support

●Pelvic support

●Seatback side bolster (if equipped)

●Seat cushion side bolster (if equipped)

●Hip support (if equipped)

■Automatic angle adjustment of the rear

displays (if equipped)

When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the

rear display will be adjusted automatically

to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the

rear display from the rear seat.

■Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen-

ger seats

→P.210, 220

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

130 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Using the driver’s seat adjustment

switches to adjust the front passen-

ger’s seat (front passenger mode)

The mode of the driver’s seat adjust-

ment switches can be changed to

adjust the front passenger’s seat.

1Press the mode change button on

the driver’s side door.

The indicator will illuminate when front

passenger mode is selected.

2Using the seat adjustment switches

on the driver’s seat, adjust the front

passenger’s seat.

To cancel front passenger mode, press the

mode change button again.

Front passenger mode will be canceled

automatically if the driver’s seat adjustment

switches are not operated for approxi-

mately 30 seconds.

■Using the Center Display (vehicles

with a foldable head restraint)

1Press the seat switch.

2Press the sub function button of the

Remote Touch. (→P.314)

3Select the button for the desired

operation.

Moves the front passenger’s seat

forward and folds the seatback and

head restraint forward

Moves the front passenger’s seat

backward and the seatback and

head restraint to the upright posi-

tion

If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s

seat is not in the upright position, it will

move to the upright position before the

front passenger’s seat moves to its upright

position.

To stop the front passenger seat while it is

moving, select the or button or

press the seat switch.

Operating the front passenger’s

seat from the driver’s seat

131

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

■Operating the foldable head restraint

using the driver’s seat adjustment

switches in front passenger mode (if

equipped)

●When the front passenger’s seatback

angle is adjusted using the driver’s seat

adjustment switches in front passenger

mode, the front passenger’s head

restraint will operate automatically as fol-

lows:

• When the front passenger’s seatback is

moved forward to the upright position,

the head restraint will lower and fold for-

ward when the seatback angle adjust-

ment switch is released.

• When the front passenger’s seatback is

moved backward to the upright position,

the head restraint will move to the upright

position when the seatback angle adjust-

ment switch is released.

●If any of the following conditions are met,

the front passenger’s head restraint will

not fold forward even though the front

passenger’s seatback angle is being

adjusted using the driver’s seat adjust-

ment switches in front passenger mode:

• The power switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

• The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front pas-

senger’s seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the power switch is turned off.

• The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

• The front passenger’s door is open. (The

front seat will not move forward.)

• The front passenger’s seat is not in the

lowest position.

• The front passenger’s seat seat cushion

(front) is not in the lowest position.

• The front passenger’s seat seat cushion is

extended (if equipped).

●If either of the following conditions is met,

the front passenger’s head restraint will

not return to the upright position even

though the front passenger’s seatback

angle is being adjusted using the driver’s

seat adjustment switches in front passen-

ger mode:

• The power switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

• The front passenger’s seat position is

moved to a position forward of the neu-

tral position.

■Operating the foldable head restraint

using the front passenger’s seat adjust-

ment switches (if equipped)

When the front passenger’s head restraint is

folded forward and the front passenger’s

door is open, if the front passenger’s seat

adjustment switches are used to move the

seat backward or recline the seatback, the

head restraint will move to the upright posi-

tion automatically when the switch is

released.

To stop the operation of the front passen-

ger’s head restraint part-way, perform any

of the following operations:

●Operate any front passenger’s seat

adjustment switch.

The head restraint will stop when the seat

position adjustment switch or seatback

angle adjustment switch is operated to

move the seat backward or recline the

seatback, and will resume operating when

the switch is released.

●Press the “SET” button.

●Press the “1”, “2” or “3” button.

●Press the seat switch.

■Operation of the front passenger’s seat

using the Center Display will be can-

celed when (vehicles with a foldable

head restraint)

In the following situations, the front passen-

ger’s seat cannot be operated using the

Center Display:

●The power switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

●The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front pas-

senger’s seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the power switch is turned off.

132 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

●The front passenger’s door is open. (The

front seat will not move forward.)

■When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward

By reclining the front passenger’s seat seat-

back, the forward view of the rear passen-

ger can be improved.

1Press and hold to move the front

passenger’s seat forward and fold

the seatback forward.

2Press and hold to move the front

passenger’s seat backward and

move the seatback to the upright

position.

■Automatic operation

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch the button for the desired

operation.

When the operating conditions are not

met, the buttons will be grayed out.

Move the front passenger’s seat

forward and fold the seatback for-

ward.

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,

the head restraint will also fold forward.

Move the front passenger’s seat

backward and the seatback to the

upright position.

If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s

seat is not in the upright position, it will

move to the upright position before the

front passenger’s seat moves to its previous

position.

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,

the head restraint will also move to the

upright position.

To stop the front passenger seat while it is

moving, touch “STOP”.

■Manual operation

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Right”

Operating the front passenger’s

seat from the rear seat (vehicles

without power rear seat)

Operating the front passenger’s

seat from the rear seat (vehicles

with power rear seat)

133

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

3Touch the button for the desired

operation.

Touch and hold to move the front

passenger’s seat forward and fold

the seatback forward.

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,

the head restraint will also fold forward.

Touch and hold to move the front

passenger’s seat backward and the

seatback to the upright position.

On vehicles with a foldable head restraint,

the head restraint will also move to the

upright position.

■Operating the front passenger’s seat

from the rear seat

In the following situations, the front passen-

ger’s seat cannot be operated using the

Rear Multi Operation Panel:

●The power switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

●The rear seat belt is not fastened and

weight is not detected on the rear seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

rear door is opened then closed or the

power switch is turned off.

●The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front pas-

senger’s seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the power switch is turned off.

●The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

●The front passenger’s door is open. (The

front seat will not move forward.)

■When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward

→P.132

Pneumatic chambers built into the

front seat apply pressure to the occu-

pant’s body at different modes and

intensities.

1Press the seat switch.

2Using the Remote Touch pad,

select “Driver Seat Refresh” or

“Passenger Seat Refresh”.

3Select the desired mode.

-“Centripetal”

Applies pressure sequentially from the

front of the seat cushion to top of the seat-

back

-“Centrifugal”

Applies pressure sequentially from the top

of the seatback to the front of the seat

cushion

-“Upper Body”

Front seat refresh system (if

equipped)

134 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Applies pressure sequentially from the bot-

tom to the top of the seatback

-“Lower Body”

Applies pressure sequentially from the

front to the back of the seat cushion

-“Lumbar”

Applies pressure sequentially from the bot-

tom to the top of the lumbar area of the

seatback

4Select the desired intensity and

then confirm the setting.

The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.

To stop the operation select “Stop”.

If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the

front seat refresh system for that seat.

■Refresh system

●Operating conditions

• The power switch is in ON mode.

• The temperature in the cabin is not

extremely high.

• For the front passenger’s seat: The weight

of an occupant is detected on the front

passenger’s seat or the front passenger’s

seat belt is fastened.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the power switch is turned off.

●Automatic stop function

• The operation will be canceled automati-

cally after approximately 15 minutes.

•If the power easy access system begins

operating, the front seat refresh system

will stop.

WARNING

■Important points while driving

Do not adjust the driver’s seat refresh

system while driving.

Using it may affect your ability to control

the vehicle, possibly leading to an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious injury.

■Using the refresh system

●Those who are pregnant, have recently

given birth, or suffer from ailments

requiring rest (heart disease etc.)

should consult a doctor before use.

●Do not allow children to use the

refresh function.

●Do not use immediately after consum-

ing a meal or alcohol, or for an

extended period of time.

●If you feel sick while using the refresh

function, immediately discontinue use.

135

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

*:If equipped

■Manual operation

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Left” or “Right”.

Power rear seat*

WARNING

■When adjusting the seat position

●Take care when adjusting the seat

position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving

seat.

●When adjusting the rear seat with an

ottoman, make sure there is sufficient

space so that a foot does not get

caught between the ottoman and front

passenger seat. (If equipped)

●Vehicle with rear seat entertainment

system: When the rear seat is moving

to the Entertainment Mode position,

do not allow hands near the rear dis-

play. Otherwise, a hand or finger may

be caught, possibly causing injury.

■Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap

belt during a collision, do not recline the

seat more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may

slide past the hips and apply restraint

forces directly to the abdomen, or your

neck may contact the shoulder belt,

increasing the risk of death or serious

injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while

driving as the seat may unexpectedly

move and cause the driver to lose control

of the vehicle.

■Using the ottoman (if equipped)

●Do not sit on the ottoman.

If someone sits on the ottoman, the seat

belt cannot be fitted properly, and they

may be thrown from the seat, resulting in

death or serious injury in the event of an

accident or sudden braking.

●When getting in or out of the vehicle,

retract the ottoman. If the ottoman is

not retracted, it may cause a fall, result-

ing in injury.

●Do not operate the ottoman when the

vehicle is moving.

●Do not allow anyone to put their hands

or feet under the rear seat when stow-

ing the ottoman.

NOTICE

■To prevent an ottoman malfunction (if

equipped)

●Do not place any objects in the rear

seat footwell that could prevent the

operation of the ottoman.

●Do not place heavy luggage on the

ottoman.

●Do not place any objects under the

ottoman while it is raised for use. These

objects may interfere with the ottoman

being folded, causing damage to the

ottoman or the objects themselves.

■To prevent a rear display malfunction

(if equipped)

Do not attempt to move the rear display

by hand, as doing so may damage the

rear display.

Adjustment procedure

136 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3Select the button for the desired

adjustment.

Head restraint adjustment

(→P.144)

Shoulder bolster adjustment

Lumbar/pelvic support adjustment

Seatback angle adjustment

Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-

ment

Ottoman adjustment (if equipped)

4Perform adjustment using the dis-

played buttons.

The seat will move while a button is

touched.

■Automatic operation

The seat can be moved to preset posi-

tions.

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch the desired preset button.

When the operating conditions are not

met, the preset buttons will be grayed out.

Moves the left-hand rear seat to the

upright position (Business Mode)

Moves the right-hand rear seat to

the upright position (Business

Mode)

Moves the rear seat with an otto-

man to a slightly reclined position

(Entertainment Mode) (if

equipped)

Vehicle without rear seat entertainment

system: Moves the front passenger’s seat

forward.

Vehicle with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem: Moves the front passenger’s seat and

rear display to allow the rear display to be

comfortably viewed.

Moves the rear seat with an otto-

man to a deeply reclined position

(Relaxation Mode) (if equipped)

Moves the front passenger’s seat forward

and folds the seatback and head restraint

forward.

To stop the front passenger seat while it is

moving, touch “STOP”.

■Adjustment of the rear seat

When a rear seat is close to a front seat, the

operation of the rear seat may be restricted.

■Operating conditions of Business Mode

When the rear seat belt is not fastened and

137

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

weight is not detected on the rear seat,

Business Mode cannot be selected.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

rear door is opened then closed or the

power switch is turned off.

■The rear seat with an ottoman cannot be

moved to Entertainment Mode/Relax-

ation Mode when (if equipped)

In the following situations, Entertainment

Mode or Relaxation Mode cannot be

selected:

●The power switch is in ACCESSORY

mode or off.

●The rear seat belt is not fastened and

weight is not detected on the rear seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

rear door is opened then closed or the

power switch is turned off.

●The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on the front pas-

senger’s seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

front passenger’s door is opened then

closed or the power switch is turned off.

●The front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened.

●The front passenger’s door is open.

■When the front passenger’s seat is

folded forward

→P.132

■Automatic angle adjustment of the rear

displays (if equipped)

When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the

rear display will be adjusted automatically

to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the

rear display from the rear seat.

■Operation after the power switch is

turned off

After a certain time elapses after the power

switch is turned off, the following parts of

the rear seats will move to their neutral

positions.

●Shoulder bolster

●Lumbar/pelvic support

■Seat return function linked to the door

opening operation

The rear seat will return to the upright posi-

tion automatically when the rear door is

opened for easier entry and exit of the vehi-

cle.

For the rear seat with an ottoman (if

equipped): When the rear door on the side

with the rear seat with an ottoman is

opened, the seatback of the rear seat with

an ottoman will move to a more upright

position. The seatback will move to the

upright position after the door is closed and

the system determines that the rear passen-

ger has exited.

However, if the armrest is stowed, the rear

seat will not move.

■Shift-linked rear seat reclining function

When the shift position is shifted from P, to

enhance rear visibility for the driver, the rear

seats will recline slightly.

However, the shift-linked rear seat reclining

function will not operate in the following sit-

uations:

●The weight of an occupant or heavy

object, etc. is detected on a rear seat.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

rear door is opened then closed or the

power switch is turned off.

●A rear seat belt is fastened.

●A rear door is open.

●The armrest is stowed.

When a front seat is close to a rear seat, the

rear seats may not operate or the range of

movement may be restricted.

■Pre-collision seatbacks for the passen-

ger seats

→P.210, 220

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

138 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1Press the seat switch.

2Press the sub function button of the

Remote Touch. (→P.314)

3Select .

The rear seat will move to the upright posi-

tion.

■Operation of the rear seats from the

front seats

In the following situations, the rear seats

cannot be operated from the front seats.

●When the armrest is stowed and weight

of an occupant, heavy object, etc. is

detected on a rear seat

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

rear door is opened then closed or the

power switch is turned off.

●When the armrest is stowed and a rear

seat belt is fastened.

The rear seat relaxation system utilizes

pneumatic chambers and dedicated

heaters, and applies pressure to the

occupant’s body at different modes

and intensities.

To display the rear seat relaxation sys-

tem screen, display the home screen

on the Rear Multi Operation Panel

(→P.318) and then touch “Relaxation”.

Touch to select the desired rear

seat.

Touch to select the desired mode.

When a button is touched, operation will

begin.

Touch to adjust the intensity.

The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.

Touch to turn the spot heaters

on/off.

Touch to stop the operation.

If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the

Returning the rear seat from the

front seats

WARNING

■When returning the rear seats to the

neutral position

To avoid injuring the rear passengers,

wait until they have gotten out of the

vehicle before operating the switch.

Rear seat relaxation system (if

equipped)

139

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

rear seat relaxation system for that seat.

■Relaxation system

●Operating conditions

• The power switch is in ON mode.

• The temperature in the cabin is not

extremely high.

• The weight of an occupant is detected on

the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fas-

tened.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

rear door is opened then closed or the

power switch is turned off.

●Automatic stop function

• The operation will be canceled automati-

cally after approximately 15 minutes.

• If the door for a seat that the relaxation

system is currently being used is opened,

the relaxation system will stop operating.

The seat and steering wheel are auto-

matically adjusted to allow the driver to

enter and exit the vehicle easily.

Driver’s seat

When all of the following have been

performed, the seat and steering

wheel are automatically adjusted to a

position that allows driver to enter and

exit the vehicle easily.

• The shift position has been shifted to

• The power switch has been turned

off.

• The driver’s seat belt has been

unfastened.

When the driver’s seat adjustment

switches are in front passenger mode

(→P.130), the seat and steering wheel will

not move.

WARNING

■Using the relaxation system

●Those who are pregnant, have recently

given birth, or suffer from ailments

requiring rest (heart disease etc.)

should consult a doctor before use.

●Do not allow children to use the relax-

ation function.

●Do not use immediately after consum-

ing a meal or alcohol, or for an

extended period of time.

●If you feel sick while using the relax-

ation function, immediately discon-

tinue use.

Driving position memory

This feature automatically adjusts

the positions of the front seats,

steering wheel, outside rear view

mirrors and head-up display (if

equipped) to make entering and

exiting the vehicle easier or to suit

your preferences.

Up to 3 different driving positions

can be recorded.

Each electronic key (including a

card key) can be registered to

recall your preferred driving posi-

tion.

Power easy access system

140 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

On vehicles with adjustable seat cush-

ion side bolsters, when the driver’s

door is opened with the power switch

off, the seat cushion side bolsters will

lower if they are in the default position.

When any of the following has been

performed, the seat and steering

wheel automatically return to their

original positions.

• The power switch has been turned

to ACCESSORY mode or ON

mode.

• The driver’s seat belt has been fas-

tened.

Front passenger’s seat

If all of the following have been per-

formed while the vehicle is stopped,

the lumbar support, pelvic support,

shoulder bolster (if equipped), seat-

back side bolster (if equipped), and hip

support (if equipped) will be moved to

their default position. On vehicles with

adjustable seat cushion side bolsters,

the seat cushion side bolsters will

lower.

• The passenger’s seat belt has been

unfastened.

• The front passenger’s door is

opened.

■Operation of the power easy access sys-

tem

●When exiting the vehicle, the power easy

access system may not operate if the seat

is already in the rearmost or uppermost

position or close to the rear seat.

●If the seat position is adjusted during

power easy access system operation, the

automatic operation will stop. (The seat

will change to manual operation.)

●If the seat position is adjusted during or

after the power easy access system oper-

ation when the driver is exiting the vehi-

cle, the power easy access system will not

operate when entering the vehicle.

■Seat cushion side bolster adjustment (if

equipped)

If the seat cushion side bolsters have been

lowered, when the front door is closed, the

seat cushion side bolsters will move to their

default position.

If the seat is adjusted while the seat cushion

side bolsters are moving to the default posi-

tion, their movement will be temporarily

suspended. (The seat cushion side bolsters

will move to the default position after a cer-

tain amount of time.)

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

1Turn the power switch to ON

mode.

2Check that the shift position is in P.

3Adjust the driver’s seat, steering

wheel, outside rear view mirrors

and head-up display (if equipped)

to the desired positions.

4While pressing the “SET” button, or

within 3 seconds after the “SET”

Recording a driving position into

memory

141

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

button is pressed, press button “1”,

“2” or “3” until the buzzer sounds.

If the selected button has already been

preset, the previously recorded position

will be overwritten.

When the driver’s seat adjustment

switches are in front passenger mode

(→P.130), the position of the driver’s seat

cannot be registered.

To record the position of the front pas-

senger’s seat, adjust the front passen-

ger’s seat to the desired position and

perform step 4 using the buttons on

the front passenger’s side.

■In order to correctly use the driving

position memory function

If a seat position is already in the furthest

possible position and the seat is operated in

the same direction, the recorded position

may be slightly different when it is recalled.

1Turn the power switch to ON

mode.

2Check that the shift position is in P.

3Press one of the buttons for the

driving position you want to recall

until the buzzer sounds.

When the driver’s seat adjustment

switches are in front passenger mode

(→P.130), a driving position cannot be

recalled.

■To stop the position recall operation

part-way through

Perform any of the following operations:

●Press the “SET” button.

●Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.

●Press the mode change button.

●Operate any of the seat adjustment

switches (only cancels seat position

recall).

●Operate the tilt and telescopic steering

control switch (only cancels steering

wheel position recall).

■Recalling a driving position

If a driving position is recalled, the move-

ment of the front seat may be stopped part-

way if the seat moves close to the rear seat.

If a rear passenger is determined to be in

the vehicle, the rearward movement of the

front seat may be stopped partway to

ensure sufficient space for the rear passen-

ger.

■Recalling the front passenger’s seat

position (vehicles with a rear seat with

an ottoman)

If the ottoman of the rear seat is extended,

the front passenger’s seat position cannot

be recalled.

WARNING

■Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that

the seat does not strike the rear passen-

ger or squeeze your body against the

steering wheel.

Recalling a driving position

142 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Operating the driving position memory

after turning the power switch off

Driver’s seat:

Recorded seat positions can be activated

up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is

opened and another 60 seconds after it is

closed again.

Front passenger’s seat:

Recorded seat positions can be recalled up

to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s

door is opened.

■Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button

“1”, “2” or “3” before performing the

following:

Carry only the key you want to register,

and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the

driving position cannot be recorded

properly.

1Turn the power switch to ON

mode.

2Check that the shift position is in P.

3Recall the driving position that you

want to record.

4While pressing the recalled button,

press and hold the door lock switch

(either lock or unlock) until the

buzzer sounds.

If the button could not be registered, the

buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

■Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel

and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the

driving position cannot be canceled

properly.

1Turn the power switch to ON

mode.

2Check that the shift position is in P.

3While pressing the “SET” button,

press and hold the door lock switch

(either lock or unlock) until the

buzzer sounds twice.

If the button could not be canceled, the

buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

■Recall procedure

1Make sure that the doors are

locked before recalling the driving

position. Carry the electronic key

that has been registered to the driv-

ing position, and then unlock and

open the driver’s door using the

smart access system with push-but-

ton start or wireless remote control.

The driving position will move to the

recorded position (not including the steer-

ing wheel and head-up display [if

equipped]). However, the seat will move to

a position slightly behind the recorded

position in order to make entering the vehi-

Registering/canceling/recall a

driving position to an electronic

key (including a card key) (mem-

ory recall function)

143

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

cle easier.

If the driving position is in a position that

has already been recorded, the seat and

outside rear view mirrors will not move.

2Turn the power switch to ACCES-

SORY mode or ON mode, or fas-

ten a seat belt.

The seat, steering wheel and head-up dis-

play (if equipped) will move to the

recorded position.

■Recalling the driving position using the

memory recall function

●Different driving positions can be regis-

tered for each electronic key. Therefore,

the driving position that is recalled may

be different depending on the key being

carried.

●If a door other than the driver’s door is

unlocked with the smart access system

with push-button start, the driving posi-

tion cannot be recalled. In this case, press

the driving position button which has

been set.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

*: If equipped

1Turn the power switch to ON

mode.

2Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.

3Touch “Left” or “Right”.

4Adjust the rear seat to the desired

position and then touch “Set Mem-

ory”.

5Touch “1” or “2”.

If the preset is being used, the previously

recorded seat position will be overwritten.

■In order to correctly use the position

memory function

If a seat position is already in the furthest

possible position and the seat is operated in

the same direction, the recorded position

may be slightly different when it is recalled.

Rear seat position memory*

The rear seat position can be mem-

orized and recalled with the touch

of a button.

Recording a position into mem-

ory

WARNING

■Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that

the rear passengers do not strike the

front seats.

144 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1Turn the power switch to ON

mode.

2Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.

3Touch “1” or “2”.

When the operating conditions are not

met, the buttons will be grayed out.

To stop the operation touch “STOP”.

If the seat is adjusted while a memorized

position is being recalled, the automatic

operation will stop. (The seat will change to

manual operation.)

■Operating condition

The weight of an occupant is detected on

the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fas-

tened.

Once weight is detected on the seat, the

seat will be judged as occupied until the

rear door is opened then closed or the

power switch is turned off.

■Recalling a rear seat position

If a memorized rear seat position is recalled,

the seat may stop part-way to ensure suffi-

cient space for the rear passenger.

■Recalling the ottoman position (if

equipped)

When a seat position is recalled, the otto-

man will not raise or extend. The ottoman

position can only be recalled if the memo-

rized position is lower and shorter than the

current position.

Front seats

1Press the seat switch.

Recalling the memorized posi-

tion

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all

seats.

Vehicles with power rear seat: The

head restraint for the rear center

seat is integrated into the seatback

and cannot be adjusted.

WARNING

■Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions

regarding the head restraints. Failure to

do so may result in death or serious

injury.

●Use the head restraints designed for

each respective seat.

●Adjust the head restraints to the cor-

rect position at all times.

●Manual type: After adjusting the head

restraints, push down on them and

make sure they are locked in position.

●Do not drive with the head restraints

removed.

Adjusting a head restraint verti-

cally and horizontally (power

head restraints)

145

3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

2Using the Remote Touch pad,

select “Driver Seat Adjustment” or

“Passenger Seat Adjustment”.

3Select then the desired adjust-

ment button , , , or to

adjust the head restraint.

Backward

Down

Forward

The head restraint moves while the adjust-

ment button is selected.

Rear seats

1Display the home screen on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel

(→P.318) and then touch “Seat”.

2Touch “Left” or “Right”.

3Touch then the desired adjust-

ment button , , , or to

adjust the head restraint.

Backward

Down

Forward

The head restraint moves while the adjust-

ment button is touched.

1Up

Pull the head restraints up.

2Down

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the lock release button .

■Front seat head restraints (power head

restraints)

Depending on the position of the front seat,

the front head restraint may not be able to

be adjusted upward if it is close to the ceil-

ing.

■Adjusting the height of the head

restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are

Adjusting a head restraint verti-

cally (manual head restraints)

146 3-3. Adjusting the seats

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

adjusted so that the center of the head

restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

■Adjusting the rear seat head restraints

(manual head restraints)

Always raise the head restraint one level

from the stowed position when using.

Push the sides of the head restraint.

Pull the head restraint up while press-

ing the lock release button .

■Removing the head restraints (power

head restraints)

For removal and installation of the head

restraint, contact your Lexus dealer.

Align the head restraint with the instal-

lation holes and push it down to the

lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button

when lowering the head restraint.

Adjusting the side supports (if

equipped)

Removing the head restraints

(manual head restraints)

Installing the head restraints

(manual head restraints)

147

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

3-4.Adjusting th e steering wheel and mi rrors

Operating the switch moves the steer-

ing wheel in the following directions:

1Up

2Down

3Toward the driver

4Away from the driver

■The steering wheel can be adjusted

when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or

ON mode*.

*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the

steering wheel can be adjusted regard-

less of power switch mode.

■Automatic adjustment of the steering

position

A desired steering position can be entered

to memory and recalled automatically by

the driving position memory system.

(→P.139)

■Power easy access system

The steering wheel and driver’s seat move

in accordance with power switch mode and

the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P.139)

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

Press on or close to the mark.

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mis-

handle the vehicle and cause an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

Sounding the horn

148 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The height of the rear view mirror can

be adjusted to suit your driving pos-

ture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mir-

ror by moving it up and down.

Responding to the level of brightness

of the headlights of vehicles behind, the

reflected light is automatically

reduced.

Turn the automatic anti-glare function

mode on/off

When the automatic anti-glare function is

in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each

time the power switch is turned to ON

mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to

OFF mode. (The indicator also turns

off.)

■To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly,

do not touch or cover them.

Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirror’s position can

be adjusted to enable sufficient

confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view

mirror

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror

while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the

vehicle and cause an accident, resulting

in death or serious injury.

Anti-glare function

149

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

1To select a mirror to adjust, press

the switch.

The indicator comes on.

Left

Right

Pressing the same switch again will put the

switch in neutral.

2To adjust the mirror, press the

switch.

Right

Down

Left

■Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or

ON mode.

■Defogging the mirrors

The outside rear view mirrors can be

cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on

the rear window defogger to turn on the

outside rear view mirror defoggers.

(→P.324)

■Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror

is set to automatic mode, the outside rear

view mirrors will activate in conjunction with

the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to

reduce reflected light. (→P.148)

■Automatic adjustment of the mirror

angle

A desired mirror face angle can be entered

to memory and recalled automatically by

the driving position memory. (→P.139)

■Linked mirror function when reversing

When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select

switch is selected, the outside rear view mir-

rors will automatically angle downwards

when the vehicle is reversing in order to

give a better view of the ground.

To disable this function, select neither “L”

Outside rear view mirrors

The rear view mirror’s position can

be adjusted to enable sufficient

confirmation of the rear view.

WARNING

■Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while

driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of con-

trol of the vehicle and cause an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

●Both the driver and passenger side

mirrors must be extended and prop-

erly adjusted before driving.

Adjustment procedure

150 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

nor “R”.

To set the mirror angle used when the vehi-

cle is reversing, adjust the mirror angle at a

desired position with the shift position in R.

The adjusted angle will be memorized and

the mirror will automatically tilt to the mem-

orized angle whenever the shift position is

shifted to R from next time.

The memorized downward tilt position of

the mirror is linked to the normal position

(angle adjusted with the shift position in

other than R). Therefore, if the normal posi-

tion is changed after adjustment, the tilt

position will also change.

When the normal position is changed, read-

just the angle in reversing.

■Using the switch

Press the switch to fold the mirrors.

Press it again to extend them to the original

position.

■Setting automatic mode

Automatic mode allows the folding or

extending of the mirrors to be linked to

locking/unlocking of the doors.

Press the “AUTO” switch to set auto-

matic mode.

The indicator will come on.

Pressing the switch once more will return

to manual mode.

■When disconnecting and reconnecting

12-volt battery terminals

The automatic folding/extending mirror

function will return to off as default. To turn

the function on, press the switch again to

select on.

■Using automatic mode in cold weather

When automatic mode is used in cold

weather, the door mirror could freeze up

and automatic stowing and return may not

be possible. In this case, remove any ice and

snow from the door mirror, then either

operate the mirror using manual mode or

move the mirror by hand.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

WARNING

■When the mirror defoggers are oper-

ating

Do not touch the rear view mirror sur-

faces, as they can become very hot and

burn you.

Folding and extending the mir-

rors

WARNING

■When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror mal-

function, be careful not to get your hand

caught by the moving mirror.

151

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

3-5.Opening, clo sing the windows and m oon roof

The power windows can be opened

and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the win-

dows as follows:

1Closing

2One-touch closing*

3Opening

4One-touch opening*

*: To stop the window partway, operate the

switch in the opposite direction.

■The power windows can be operated

when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■When the driver’s power window switch

is used to open a rear power window

(vehicles with rear door sunshades)

If a rear door sunshade is extended or being

extended when the driver’s power window

switch is pushed, only the rear door sun-

shade will be retracted. To open the rear

power window from the driver’s seat, push

the driver’s power window switch again.

■Operating the power windows after

turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for

approximately 45 seconds even after the

power switch is turned to ACCESSORY

mode or turned off. They cannot, however,

be operated once either front door is

opened.

■Jam protection function

If an object becomes jammed between the

window and the window frame while the

window is closing, window movement is

stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught between the

door and window while the window is open-

ing, window movement is stopped.

■When the side window cannot be

opened or closed

When the jam protection function or catch

protection function operates unusually and

the side window cannot be opened or

closed, perform the following operations

with the power window switch of that door.

●Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in

ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam

protection function or catch protection

function activating, continuously operate

the power window switch in the

one-touch closing direction or one-touch

opening direction so that the side window

can be opened and closed.

●If the side window cannot be opened and

closed even when performing the above

operations, perform the following proce-

dure for function initialization.

1Turn the power switch to ON mode.

2Pull and hold the power window switch

in the one-touch closing direction and

completely close the side window.

3Release the power window switch for a

moment, resume pulling the switch in

the one-touch closing direction, and

hold it there for approximately 6 sec-

onds or more.

4Press and hold the power window

switch in the one-touch opening direc-

tion. After the side window is com-

pletely opened, continue holding the

switch for an additional 1 second or

more.

5Release the power window switch for a

moment, resume pushing the switch in

the one-touch opening direction, and

Power windows

Opening and closing the power

windows

152 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

hold it there for approximately 4 sec-

onds or more.

6Pull and hold the power window switch

in the one-touch closing direction

again. After the side window is com-

pletely closed, continue holding the

switch for a further 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is

moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window reverses and cannot be fully

closed or opened, have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Door lock linked window operation

●The power windows can be opened and

closed using the mechanical key.*

(→P.446)

●The power windows can be opened using

the wireless remote control.* (→P.108)

*: These settings must be customized at

your Lexus dealer.

■Power windows open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown

on the multi-information display in the

instrument cluster when the power switch is

turned off and the driver’s door is opened

with the power windows open.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■Closing the windows

●The driver is responsible for all the

power window operations, including

the operation for the passengers. In

order to prevent accidental operation,

especially by a child, do not let a child

operate the power windows. It is possi-

ble for children and other passengers

to have body parts caught in the power

window. Also, when riding with a child,

it is recommended to use the window

lock switch. (→P.153)

●Check to make sure that all passen-

gers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught

when a window is being operated.

●When using the wireless remote con-

trol or mechanical key and operating

the power windows, operate the

power window after checking to make

sure that there is no possibility of any

passenger having any of their body

parts caught in the window. Also do

not let a child operate window by the

wireless remote control or mechanical

key. It is possible for children and other

passengers to get caught in the power

window.

●When exiting the vehicle, turn the

power switch off, carry the key and exit

the vehicle along with the child. There

may be accidental operation, due to

mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to

an accident.

■Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protec-

tion function.

●The jam protection function may not

work if something gets jammed just

before the window is fully closed. Be

careful not to get any part of your body

jammed in the window.

■Catch protection function

●Never use any part of your body or

clothing to intentionally activate the

catch protection function.

153

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

This function can be used to prevent

children from accidentally opening or

closing a passenger window.

Press the switch.

The indicator will come on and the pas-

senger windows will be locked.

The passenger windows can still be

opened and closed using the driver’s

switch even if the lock switch is on.

■The power windows can be operated

when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■When the 12-volt battery is discon-

nected

The window lock switch is disabled. If nec-

essary, press the window lock switch after

reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

■Opening and closing

1Opens the moon roof*

The moon roof tilts up and then fully opens.

2Closes the moon roof*

*: Lightly press either side of the moon roof

switch to stop the moon roof partway.

■Tilting up and down

1Tilts the moon roof up*

2Tilts the moon roof down*

*: Lightly press either side of the moon roof

switch to stop the moon roof partway.

WARNING

●The catch protection function may not

work if something gets caught just

before the window is fully opened. Be

careful not to get any part of your body

or closing caught in the window.

Preventing accidental operation

(window lock switch)

Moon roof

Use the overhead switches to open

and close the moon roof and tilt it

up and down.

Operating the moon roof

154 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■The moon roof can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■Operating the moon roof after turning

the hybrid system off

The moon roof can be operated for approx-

imately 45 seconds after the power switch

is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned

off. It cannot, however, be operated once

either front door is opened.

■Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon

roof and the frame while the moon roof is

closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and

the moon roof opens slightly.

■Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed

manually. However, the sunshade will open

automatically when the moon roof is

opened.

■Door lock linked moon roof operation

●The moon roof can be opened and

closed using the mechanical key.*

(→P.446)

●The moon roof can be opened using the

wireless remote control.* (→P.108)

*: These settings must be customized at

your Lexus dealer.

■When the moon roof does not close nor-

mally

Perform the following procedure:

1Stop the vehicle.

2Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause

for approximately 10 seconds. Then it will

close again and stop at the completely

closed position.

3Check to make sure that the moon roof

is completely closed and then release

the switch.

*: If the switch is released at the incorrect

time, the procedure will have to be per-

formed again from the beginning.

If the moon roof does not fully close even

after performing the above procedure cor-

rectly, have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

■If the moon roof does not move normally

If the moon roof does not open or close

normally or the automatic opening function

does not operate, perform the following ini-

tialization procedure.

1Stop the vehicle.

2Press and hold the “DOWN” switch.*

The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up posi-

tion. After that, it will open, close, tilt up, tilt

down, and stop at the fully closed position.

3Confirm that the moon roof has com-

pletely stopped and release the switch.

*:If you release the switch while the moon

roof is moving, perform the procedure

again from the beginning.

If, after performing the above procedures

correctly, the moon roof still does not open

or close normally or the automatic opening

function does not operate, have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Moon roof open warning buzzer

A buzzer sounds and a message is shown

on the multi-information display in the

instrument cluster when the power switch is

turned off and the driver’s door is opened

with the moon roof open.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or seri-

ous injury.

■Opening the moon roof

●Do not allow any passengers to put

their hands or heads outside the vehi-

cle while it is moving.

●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

155

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Before driving

WARNING

■Opening and closing the moon roof

●The driver is responsible for moon roof

opening and closing operations.

In order to prevent accidental opera-

tion, especially by a child, do not let a

child operate the moon roof. It is possi-

ble for children and other passengers

to have body parts caught in the moon

roof.

●Check to make sure that all passen-

gers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught

when the moon roof is being operated.

●When using the wireless remote con-

trol or mechanical key and operating

the moon roof, operate the moon roof

after checking to make sure that there

is no possibility of any passenger hav-

ing any of their body parts caught in

the moon roof. Also, do not let a child

operate moon roof by the wireless

remote control or mechanical key. It is

possible for children and other passen-

gers to get caught in the moon roof.

●When exiting the vehicle, turn the

power switch off, carry the key and exit

the vehicle along with the child. There

may be accidental operation, due to

mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to

an accident.

■Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to

intentionally activate the jam protec-

tion function.

●The jam protection function may not

work if something gets caught just

before the moon roof is fully closed.

Also, the jam protection function is not

designed to operate while the moon

roof switch is being pressed. Take care

so that your fingers, etc. do not get

caught.

156 3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

157

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle.....................158

Cargo and luggage...................164

Vehicle load limits......................166

Trailer towing...............................166

Dinghy towing .............................167

4-2. Driving procedures

Power (ignition) switch............168

EV drive mode ............................ 172

Hybrid transmission..................174

Turn signal lever..........................180

Parking brake ...............................181

Brake Hold....................................183

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch.........................185

AHB (Automatic High Beam)

.........................................................188

Windshield wipers and washer

.........................................................190

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap......194

4-5. Using the driving support sys-

tems

Lexus Safety System+A...........196

Lexus Safety System+ .............203

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety Sys-

tem+A) .......................................209

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System+)

........................................................220

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

........................................................227

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ....230

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)

.......................................................240

RSA (Road Sign Assist).......... 247

Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range......................250

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)....260

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)

....................................................... 265

Intuitive parking assist............. 266

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

function....................................... 273

RCD (Rear Camera Detection)

function....................................... 277

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)

.......................................................280

Parking Support Brake function

(static objects).........................286

Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles)....... 291

Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians).................. 295

Driving mode select switch ..298

Electronically modulated air sus-

pension....................................... 299

Driving assist systems..............302

4-6. Driving tips

Hybrid vehicle driving tips ....307

Winter driving tips....................309

158 4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-1.Before driving

■Starting the hybrid system

→P.168

■Driving

1With the brake pedal depressed,

shift the shift position to D. (→P.174)

Check that the shift position indicator

shows D.

2If the parking brake is in manual

mode, release the parking brake.

(→P.181)

3Gradually release the brake pedal

and gently depress the accelerator

pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■Stopping

1With the shift position in D, depress

the brake pedal.

2If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an

extended period of time, shift the shift posi-

tion to P. (→P.176)

■Parking the vehicle

1With the shift position in D, depress

the brake pedal to stop the vehicle

completely.

2If the parking brake is in manual

mode, set the parking brake.

(→P.181)

3Shift the shift position to P. (→P.176)

4Press the power switch to stop the

hybrid system.

5Slowly release the brake pedal.

6Lock the door, making sure that you

have the electronic key on your

person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as

needed.

■Starting off on a steep uphill

1Make sure that the parking brake is

set and shift the shift position to D.

Hill-start assist control will operate.

(→P.303)

2Gently depress the accelerator

pedal.

3Release the parking brake.

■For fuel-efficient driving

Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar

to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary

to refrain from activities such as sudden

acceleration. (→P.307)

■Driving in the rain

●Drive carefully when it is raining, because

visibility will be reduced, the windows

may become fogged-up, and the road

will be slippery.

●Drive carefully when it starts to rain,

because the road surface will be espe-

cially slippery.

●Refrain from high speeds when driving on

an expressway in the rain, because there

may be a layer of water between the tires

and the road surface, preventing the

steering and brakes from operating prop-

erly.

■Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine

speed may become high while driving. This

is due to automatic up-shifting control or

down-shifting implementation to meet driv-

ing conditions. It does not indicate sudden

acceleration.

●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill

or downhill

●When the accelerator pedal is released

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be

observed to ensure safe driving:

Driving procedure

159

4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

●When the brake pedal is depressed

■Restraining the hybrid system output

(Brake Override System)

●When the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time, the

hybrid system output may be restrained.

●A warning message is displayed on the

multi-information display while the sys-

tem is operating.

■Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start

Control)

●When the following unusual operation is

performed, the hybrid system output may

be restrained.

• When the shift position is shifted from R

to D, D to R, N to R, P to D*, or P to R* (D

includes M) with the accelerator pedal

depressed, a warning message appears

on the multi-information display. If a

warning message is shown on the

multi-information display, read the mes-

sage and follow the instruction.

• When the accelerator pedal is depressed

too much while the vehicle is in reverse.

*: Depending on the situation, the shift

position may not be changed.

●While Drive-Start Control is being acti-

vated, your vehicle may have trouble

escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In

such case, deactivate TRAC (→P.304)

to cancel Drive-Start Control so that the

vehicle may become able to escape from

the mud or fresh snow.

■Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing

the following precautions is recommended:

●For the first 186 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

●For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for

extended periods.

■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type park-

ing brake system. This type of brake system

needs bedding-down of the brake shoes

periodically or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your

Lexus dealer perform the bedding down

operation.

■Brake pads and discs (F SPORT models)

The brake pads and discs are designed for

use under high load conditions. Therefore,

brake noise may be generated depending

on the vehicle speed, braking force and

vehicle environment (temperature, humid-

ity, etc.).

■Operating your vehicle in a foreign

country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registra-

tion laws and confirm the availability of the

correct fuel. (→P.461)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the “READY”

indicator is illuminated. This prevents the

vehicle from creeping.

■When driving the vehicle

●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with

the location of the brake and accelera-

tor pedals to avoid depressing the

wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelera-

tor pedal instead of the brake pedal

will result in sudden acceleration that

may lead to an accident.

• When backing up, you may twist your

body around, leading to a difficulty in

operating the pedals. Make sure to

operate the pedals properly.

160 4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

• Make sure to keep a correct driving

posture even when moving the vehicle

only slightly. This allows you to depress

the brake and accelerator pedals

properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your

right foot. Depressing the brake pedal

using your left foot may delay

response in an emergency, resulting in

an accident.

●The driver should pay extra attention

to pedestrians when the vehicle is

powered only by the electric motor

(traction motor). As there is no engine

noise, the pedestrians may misjudge

the vehicle’s movement. Even with the

vehicle proximity notification system

activate, drive with care as pedestrians

in the vicinity may still not notice the

vehicle if the surrounding area is noisy.

●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop

the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases

can be extremely hot. These hot parts

may cause a fire if there is any flamma-

ble material nearby.

●During normal driving, do not turn off

the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid

system off while driving will not cause

loss of steering or braking control,

however, power assist to the steering

will be lost. This will make it more diffi-

cult to steer smoothly, so you should

pull over and stop the vehicle as soon

as it is safe to do so.

In the event of an emergency, such as if

it becomes impossible to stop the vehi-

cle in the normal way: →P.420

●Use engine braking (downshift) to

maintain a safe speed when driving

down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may

cause the brakes to overheat and lose

effectiveness. (→P.174)

●Do not adjust the positions of the

steering wheel, the seat, or the inside

or outside rear view mirrors while driv-

ing.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

●Always check that all passengers’

arms, heads or other parts of their

body are not outside the vehicle.

●Do not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-

mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140

km/h) unless your vehicle has

high-speed capability tires. Driving

over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in

tire failure, loss of control and possible

injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer

to determine whether the tires on your

vehicle are high-speed capability tires

or not before driving at such speeds.

■When driving on slippery road sur-

faces

●Sudden braking, acceleration and

steering may cause tire slippage and

reduce your ability to control the vehi-

cle.

●Sudden acceleration, engine braking

due to shifting, or changes in engine

speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

●After driving through a puddle, lightly

depress the brake pedal to make sure

that the brakes are functioning prop-

erly. Wet brake pads may prevent the

brakes from functioning properly. If the

brakes on only one side are wet and

not functioning properly, steering con-

trol may be affected.

■When shifting the shift position

●Do not let the vehicle roll backward

while a forward driving position is

selected, or roll forward while the shift

position is in R.

Doing so may result in an accident or

damage to the vehicle.

161

4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

WARNING

●Do not shift the shift position to P while

the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission

and may result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol.

●Do not shift the shift position to R while

the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission

and may result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol.

●Do not shift the shift position to a driv-

ing position while the vehicle is moving

backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission

and may result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol.

●Changing the shift position to N while

the vehicle is moving will disengage

the hybrid system. Engine braking is

not available with the hybrid system

disengaged.

●Be careful not to change the shift posi-

tion with the accelerator pedal

depressed. Changing the shift posi-

tion to any positions other than P or N

may lead to unexpected rapid acceler-

ation of the vehicle that may cause an

accident and result in death or serious

injury.

After changing the shift position, make

sure to confirm the current shift posi-

tion displayed on the shift position indi-

cator inside the meter.

■Brake pad wear

If any of the following situations occurs,

have the brake pads visually checked and

replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as

possible.

●If the thickness of the brake pads

exceeds the brake pad wear limit when

visually checking all four brake pads

(for the brake pad wear limit, refer to

P.465)

●If a warning message is displayed on

the multi-information display (only the

right-side pads can be detected)

Rotor damage may result if the pads are

not replaced when needed.

F SPORT models: Moderate levels of the

brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced

braking power. As a result, the discs may

wear more quickly than conventional

brake discs. Therefore, when replacing

the brake pads, Lexus recommends that

you also have the thickness of the discs

measured.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when

the wear limits of the brake pads and/or

those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■When the vehicle is stopped

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

unnecessarily.

If the shift position is any position other

than P or N, the vehicle may acceler-

ate suddenly and unexpectedly, caus-

ing an accident.

●In order to prevent accidents due to

the vehicle rolling away, always keep

depressing the brake pedal while

stopped with the “READY” indicator is

illuminated, and apply the parking

brake as necessary.

●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline,

in order to prevent accidents caused

by the vehicle rolling forward or back-

ward, always depress the brake pedal

and securely apply the parking brake

as needed.

●Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed

while the vehicle is stopped may cause

the exhaust system to overheat, which

could result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

162 4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

■When the vehicle is parked

●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters,

spray cans, or soft drink cans in the

vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter

or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle

may cause the plastic lenses and plas-

tic material of glasses to deform or

crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing

the contents to spray over the interior

of the vehicle, and may also cause a

short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical

components.

●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the

vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a

place such as the glove box or on the

floor, it may be lit accidentally when

luggage is loaded or the seat is

adjusted, causing a fire.

●Do not attach adhesive discs to the

windshield or windows. Do not place

containers such as air fresheners on

the instrument panel or dashboard.

Adhesive discs or containers may act

as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

●Do not leave a door or window open if

the curved glass is coated with a met-

allized film such as a silver-colored

one. Reflected sunlight may cause the

glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

●Always apply the parking brake, shift

the shift position to P, stop the hybrid

system and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended

while the “READY” indicator is illumi-

nated.

●Do not touch the exhaust pipes while

the “READY” indicator is illuminated

or immediately after turning the hybrid

system off.

Doing so may cause burns.

■When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Other-

wise, if you accidentally move the shift

lever or depress the accelerator pedal,

this could cause an accident or fire due

to hybrid system overheating. Addition-

ally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly

ventilated area, exhaust gases may col-

lect and enter the vehicle, leading to

death or a serious health hazard.

■When braking

●When the brakes are wet, drive more

cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the

brakes are wet, and this may cause one

side of the vehicle to brake differently

than the other side. Also, the parking

brake may not securely hold the vehi-

cle.

●If the electronically controlled brake

system does not operate, do not follow

other vehicles closely and avoid hills or

sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but

the brake pedal should be depressed

more firmly than usual. Also, the brak-

ing distance will increase. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

●The brake system consists of 2 or more

individual hydraulic systems; if one of

the systems fails, the other(s) will still

operate. In this case, the brake pedal

should be depressed more firmly than

usual and the braking distance will

increase. Have your brakes fixed

immediately.

■If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when

a driven wheel is up in the air, or the vehi-

cle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may

damage the driveline components or

propel the vehicle forward or backward,

causing an accident.

163

4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

NOTICE

■When driving the vehicle

●Do not depress the accelerator and

brake pedals at the same time during

driving, as this may restrain the hybrid

system output.

●Do not use the accelerator pedal or

depress the accelerator and brake

pedals at the same time to hold the

vehicle on a hill.

■When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift

the shift position to P. Failure to do so

may cause the vehicle to move or the

vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the

accelerator pedal is accidentally

depressed.

■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in

either direction and hold it there for an

extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power

steering motor.

●When driving over bumps in the road,

drive as slowly as possible to avoid

damaging the wheels, underside of the

vehicle, etc.

■If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the fol-

lowing situations. Hold the steering

wheel firmly and gradually depress the

brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

●It may be difficult to control your vehi-

cle.

●The vehicle will make abnormal

sounds or vibrations.

●The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat

tire (→P.442)

■When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded

after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause

the following serious damage to the vehi-

cle:

●Engine stalling

●Short in electrical components

●Engine damage caused by water

immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded

road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure

to have your Lexus dealer check the fol-

lowing:

●Brake function

●Changes in quantity and quality of oil

and fluid used for the engine, hybrid

transmission, transfer (AWD models),

differential, etc.

●Lubricant condition for the propeller

shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible), and the function of

all joints, bearings, etc.

If the shift control system is damaged by

flooding, it may not be possible to shift

the shift position to P, or from P to other

positions. In this case, contact your Lexus

dealer.

■When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift

the shift position to P. Failure to do so

may cause the vehicle to move or the

vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the

accelerator pedal is accidentally

depressed.

164 4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Cargo capacity depends on the total

weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-

ity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit —

(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX

kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and luggage

load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750

(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in Step

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

(→P.166)

Lexus does not recommend towing a

trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not

designed for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle capac-

ity weight) (→P.460)

When 2 people with the combined

weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your

vehicle, which has a total load capacity

(vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),

the available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as

follows:

B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)

*1: A =Weight of people

*2: B =Total load capacity

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following infor-

mation about storage precautions,

cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

Calculation formula for your

vehicle

165

4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

*3: C =Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with

the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on,

the available cargo and luggage load will

be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)

*4: D =Additional weight of people

*5: E =Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the

number of occupants increases, the

cargo and luggage load will be

reduced by an amount that equals the

increased weight due to the additional

occupants. In other words, if an

increase in the number of occupants

causes an excess of the total load

capacity (combined weight of occu-

pants plus cargo and luggage load),

you must reduce the cargo and lug-

gage on your vehicle.

WARNING

■Things that must not be carried in the

trunk

The following things may cause a fire if

loaded in the trunk:

●Receptacles containing gasoline

●Aerosol cans

■Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals

from being depressed properly, may

block the driver’s vision, or may result in

items hitting the driver or passengers,

possibly causing an accident.

●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk

whenever possible.

●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on

the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats

(when stacking items)

• On the package tray

• On the instrument panel

•On the dashboard

• In front of the Center Display

●Secure all items in the occupant com-

partment.

■Capacity and distribution

●Do not exceed the maximum axle

weight rating or the total vehicle

weight rating.

●Even if the total load of occupant’s

weight and the cargo load is less than

the total load capacity, do not apply the

load unevenly. Improper loading may

cause deterioration of steering or

braking control which may cause

death or serious injury.

166 4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire

and loading information label. (→P.408)

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total

load capacity, seating capacity,

towing capacity and cargo capac-

ity.

-Total load capacity (vehicle

capacity weight): →P.460

Total load capacity means the combined

weight of occupants, cargo and lug-

gage.

-Seating capacity:5 occupants

(Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum

number of occupants whose estimated

average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per

person.

-Towing capacity

Lexus does not recommend towing a

trailer with your vehicle.

-Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or

decrease depending on the weight and

the number of occupants.

WARNING

■Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires,

but also degrade steering and braking

ability, resulting in an accident.

Trailer towing

Lexus does not recommend towing

a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus

also does not recommend the

installation of a tow hitch or the use

of a tow hitch carrier for a wheel-

chair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your

vehicle is not designed for trailer

towing or for the use of tow hitch

mounted carriers.

167

4-1. Before driving

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be

dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the

ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■To avoid serious damage to your vehi-

cle

Do not tow your vehicle with the four

wheels on the ground.

168 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-2.Driving pro cedures

1Press the parking brake switch to

check that the parking brake is set.

(→P.181)

The parking brake indicator will come on.

2Firmly depress the brake pedal.

and a message will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the hybrid system can-

not be started.

When the shift position is N, the hybrid sys-

tem cannot start. Shift the shift position to P

when starting the hybrid system. (→P.176)

3Press the power switch shortly and

firmly.

When operating the power switch, one

short, firm press is enough. It is not neces-

sary to press and hold the switch.

If the “READY” indicator turns on, the

hybrid system will operate normally.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until

the “READY” indicator is illuminated.

The hybrid system can be started from any

power switch mode.

4Check that the “READY” indicator

is illuminated.

The vehicle cannot be driven if the

“READY” indicator is off.

■Power switch illumination

According to the situation, the power

switch illumination operates as follows.

●When a door is opened, or the power

switch mode is changed from ACCES-

SORY or ON mode to off, the power

switch illumination slowly blinks.

●When depressing the brake pedal with

carrying the electronic key on your per-

son, the power switch illumination rapidly

blinks.

●When the power switch is in ACCES-

SORY or ON mode, the power switch

illumination illuminates.

■If the hybrid system does not start

●The immobilizer system may not have

been deactivated. (→P.66)

Contact your Lexus dealer.

●If a message related to start-up is shown

on the multi-information display, read the

message and follow the instructions.

■When the ambient temperature is low,

such as during winter driving conditions

●When starting the hybrid system, the

flashing time of the “READY” indicator

may be long. Leave the vehicle as it is until

the “READY” indicator is steady on, as

steady means the vehicle is able to move.

●When the hybrid battery (traction bat-

tery) is extremely cold (below approxi-

mately -22°F [-30°C]) under the

influence of the outside temperature, it

may not be possible to start the hybrid

system. In this case, try to start the hybrid

system again after the temperature of the

hybrid battery increases due to the out-

side temperature increase etc.

■Sounds and vibrations specific to a

hybrid vehicle

→P.59

Power (ignition) switch

Performing the following opera-

tions when carrying the electronic

key on your person starts the hybrid

system or changes power switch

modes.

Starting the hybrid system

169

4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■If the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started using

the smart access system with push-button

start. Refer to P.447 to restart the hybrid

system.

■Electronic key battery depletion

→P.104

■Conditions affecting operation

→P.120

■Notes for the entry function

→P.121

■Steering lock function

●After turning the power switch off and

opening and closing the doors, the steer-

ing wheel will be locked due to the steer-

ing lock function. Operating the power

switch again automatically cancels the

steering lock.

●When the steering lock cannot be

released, “Push Power Switch While

Turning Steering Wheel in Either Direc-

tion” will be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display.

Press the power switch shortly and firmly

while turning the steering wheel left and

right.

●To prevent the steering lock motor from

overheating, the motor may be sus-

pended if the hybrid system is turned on

and off repeatedly in a short period of

time. In this case, refrain from operating

the power switch. After about 10 sec-

onds, the steering lock motor will resume

functioning.

■If the “READY” indicator does not come

In the event that the “READY” indicator

does not come on even after performing

the proper procedures for starting the vehi-

cle, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

■If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

→P.64

■Electronic key battery

→P.413

■Operation of the power switch

●If the switch is not pressed shortly and

firmly, the power switch mode may not

change or the hybrid system may not

start.

●If attempting to restart the hybrid system

immediately after turning the power

switch off, the hybrid system may not start

in some cases. After turning the power

switch off, please wait a few seconds

before restarting the hybrid system.

■Customization

If the smart access system with push-button

start has been deactivated in a customized

setting, refer to P.445.

WARNING

■When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sit-

ting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress

the accelerator pedal while starting the

hybrid system under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident result-

ing in death or serious injury.

■Caution while driving

If hybrid system failure occurs while the

vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the

doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and

complete stop. Activation of the steering

lock in this circumstance may lead to an

accident, resulting in death or serious

injury.

NOTICE

■When starting the hybrid system

If the hybrid system becomes difficult to

start, have your vehicle checked by your

Lexus dealer immediately.

170 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1Stop the vehicle completely.

2If the parking brake is in manual

mode, set the parking brake.

(→P.181)

3Shift the shift position to P. (→P.176)

Check that the shift position indicator

shows P. (→P.176)

4Press the power switch.

The hybrid system will stop, and the meter

display will be extinguished (the shift posi-

tion indicator will be extinguished a few

seconds after the meter display).

5Release the brake pedal and check

that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNI-

TION ON” is not shown on the

meter.

■Automatic P position selection function

→P.177

Modes can be changed by pressing

the power switch with the brake pedal

released. (The mode changes each

time the switch is pressed.)

NOTICE

■Symptoms indicating a malfunction

with the power switch

If the power switch seems to be operat-

ing somewhat differently than usual, such

as the switch sticking slightly, there may

be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus

dealer immediately.

Stopping the hybrid system

WARNING

■Stopping the hybrid system in an

emergency

●If you want to stop the hybrid system in

an emergency while driving the vehi-

cle, press and hold the power switch

for more than 2 seconds, or press it

briefly 3 times or more in succession.

(→P.420)

However, do not touch the power

switch while driving except in an emer-

gency. Turning the hybrid system off

while driving will not cause loss of

steering or braking control, however,

power assist to the steering will be lost.

This will make it more difficult to steer

smoothly, so you should pull over and

stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to

do so.

●If the power switch is operated while

the vehicle is running, a warning mes-

sage will be shown on the multi-infor-

mation display and a buzzer sounds.

●When restarting the hybrid system

after an emergency shutdown, press

the power switch.

Changing power switch modes

171

4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

1Off

The emergency flashers can be used.

2ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the

audio system can be used.

“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the

meter.

3ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on the

meter.

■Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode

for more than 20 minutes or ON mode

(with hybrid system not operating) for more

than an hour with the shift position in P, the

power switch will automatically turn off.

However, this function cannot entirely pre-

vent the 12-volt battery discharge. Do not

leave the vehicle with the power switch in

ACCESSORY or ON mode for long peri-

ods of time when the hybrid system is not

operating.

■When the shift control system malfunc-

tions

When attempting to turn the power switch

off while there is a malfunction in the shift

control system, the power switch mode may

change to ACCESSORY mode. In this

case, ACCESSORY mode may be turned

off by applying the parking brake and press-

ing the power switch again. If there is a mal-

function in the system, have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

●Do not leave the power switch in

ACCESSORY or ON mode for long

periods of time without the hybrid sys-

tem on.

●If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION

ON” is displayed on the meter, the

power switch is not off. Exit the vehicle

after turning the power switch off.

172 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Turns EV drive mode on/off

When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV

drive mode indicator will come on. Press-

ing the switch when in EV drive mode will

return the vehicle to normal driving (using

the gasoline engine and electric motor

[traction motor]).

■Situations in which EV drive mode can-

not be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive

mode on in the following situations. If it can-

not be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a

message will be shown on the multi-infor-

mation display.

●The temperature of the hybrid system is

high.

The vehicle has been left in the sun,

driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.

●The temperature of the hybrid system is

low.

The vehicle has been left in temperatures

lower than about 32°F (0°C) for a long

period of time etc.

●The gasoline engine is warming up.

●The hybrid battery (traction battery) is

low.

The remaining battery level indicated in

the “Energy Monitor” display is low.

(→P.96)

●Vehicle speed is high.

●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly

or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

●The windshield defogger is in use.

●When the shift position is in M.

■Switching to EV drive mode when the

gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gas-

oline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will

start automatically in order to warm up. In

this case, you will become unable to switch

to EV drive mode.

To prevent gasoline engine warm up in

order to reduce noises, start the hybrid sys-

tem without starting the gasoline engine,

pressing the power switch with fully

depressing the brake pedal and pressing

the EV drive mode switch.

■Automatic cancelation of EV drive

mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gaso-

line engine may automatically restart in the

following situations. When EV drive mode

EV drive mode

In EV drive mode, electric power is

supplied by the hybrid battery

(traction battery), and only the

electric motor (traction motor) is

used to drive the vehicle.

This mode allows you to drive in res-

idential areas early in the morning

and late at night, or in indoor park-

ing lots etc. without concern for

noises and gas emissions.

However, when the vehicle proxim-

ity notification system is active, the

vehicle may produce sound.

Operating instructions

173

4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV

drive mode indicator will flash and go off.

●The hybrid battery (traction battery)

becomes low.

The remaining battery level indicated in

the “Energy Monitor” display is low.

(→P.96)

●Vehicle speed is high.

●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly

or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

When it is possible to inform the driver of

automatic cancelation in advance, a prior

notice screen will appear on the multi-infor-

mation display.

■Possible driving distance when driving in

EV drive mode

EV drive mode’s possible driving distance

ranges from a few hundred meters to

approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). However,

depending on vehicle conditions, there are

situations when EV drive mode cannot be

used.

(The distance that is possible depends on

the hybrid battery [traction battery] level

and driving conditions.)

■Fuel economy

The hybrid system is designed to achieve

the best possible fuel economy during nor-

mal driving (using the gasoline engine and

electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in

EV drive mode more than necessary may

lower fuel economy.

■If “EV Mode Unavailable” is shown on

the multi-information display

The EV drive mode is not available. The rea-

son the EV drive mode is not available (the

vehicle is idling, battery charge is low, vehi-

cle speed is higher than the EV drive mode

operating speed range or accelerator pedal

is depressed too much) may be displayed.

Use the EV drive mode when it becomes

available.

■If “EV Mode Deactivated” is shown on

the multi-information display

The EV drive mode has been automatically

canceled. The reason the EV drive mode is

not available (the battery charge is low,

vehicle speed is higher than the EV drive

mode operating speed range or accelera-

tor pedal is depressed too much) may be

displayed. Drive the vehicle for a while

before attempting to turn on the EV drive

mode again.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode, pay spe-

cial attention to the area around the vehi-

cle. Because there is no engine noise,

pedestrians, people riding bicycles or

other people and vehicles in the area

may not be aware of the vehicle starting

off or approaching them, so take extra

care while driving. Therefore, take extra

care while driving even if the vehicle

proximity notification system is active.

174 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce

noise, set the shift position in D for nor-

mal driving. You can choose gear range

suitable for your driving situation by

operating the paddle shift switches.

*2: Any gear range can be fixed when driv-

ing in M mode.

■For the shift positions

●When the power switch is off or in

ACCESSORY mode, the shift position

cannot be changed.

●When the power switch is in ON mode

(the hybrid system is not operating), the

shift position can only be changed to N.

●When the “READY” indicator is on, the

shift position can be changed from P to D,

N or R.

●When the “READY” indicator is flashing,

the shift position cannot be changed from

P to another position even if the shift lever

is operated. Wait until the “READY” indi-

cator changes from a flashing to a solid

light, and then operate the shift lever

again.

●The shift position can only be changed to

M directly from D.

In addition, if an attempt is made to change

the shift position by moving the shift lever or

by pressing the P position switch in any of

the following situations, the buzzer will

sound and the shifting operation will be dis-

abled or the shift position will automatically

change to N. When this happens, select an

appropriate shift position.

●Situations where the shifting operation

will be disabled:

• When an attempt is made to change the

shift position from P to another position

by moving the shift lever without depress-

ing the brake pedal.

• When an attempt is made to change the

shift position from P or N to M by moving

the shift lever.

• When the P position switch is pressed

while the vehicle is running.*1

●Situations where the shift position will

automatically change to N:

• When an attempt is made to select the R

position by moving the shift lever when

the vehicle is moving forward.*2

• When an attempt is made to select the D

position by moving the shift lever when

the vehicle is moving in reverse.*3

• When the shift position is changed from

R to M

●If N is selected while driving at a certain

speed, even if the shift lever is not held in

the N position, the shift position changes

to N. In this situation, the buzzer sounds

and a confirmation message is displayed

on the multi-information display to inform

the driver that the shift position has

changed to N.

*1: Shift position may be changed to P

when driving at extremely low speeds.

*2: Shift position may be changed to R

when driving at low speeds.

*3: Shift position may be changed to D

when driving at low speeds.

Hybrid transmission

Select the shift position depending

on your purpose and situation.

Shift position purpose and func-

tions

Shift posi-

tion Objective or function

PParking the vehicle/starting

the hybrid system

RReversing

NNeutral (Condition in which

the power is not transmitted)

DNormal driving*1

MM mode driving*2 (→P.179)

175

4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Reverse warning buzzer

When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to

inform the driver that the shift position is in

■To protect the hybrid transmission

If the transmission fluid temperature is high,

“Transmission Fluid Temp High See

Owner’s Manual” will be displayed on the

multi-information display and the vehicle

will go into transmission protection mode

automatically. Have the vehicle inspected

by your Lexus dealer.

■When driving with the dynamic radar

cruise control with full-speed range

activated

Even when performing the following

actions with the intent of enabling engine

braking, engine braking will not be acti-

vated because the dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range will not be

canceled.

●While driving in the D position, down-

shifting to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 or 4.

●When switching the driving mode to

sport mode while driving in the D position

(→P.298)

■Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start

Control)

→P.159

■AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suit-

able gear according to driver performance

and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when

the shift position is in D. (Shifting the shift

position to the M position cancels the func-

tion.)

■If a message about a shift operation is

shown

To prevent the shift position from being

selected incorrectly or the vehicle from

moving unexpectedly, the shift position may

be changed automatically or operating the

shift lever may be required. In this case,

change the shift position following the mes-

sages on the multi-information display.

■After recharging/reconnecting the

12-volt battery

→P.393

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

WARNING

■When driving on slippery road sur-

faces

Do not accelerate or shift the shift posi-

tion suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may

cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting

in an accident.

NOTICE

■Hybrid battery (traction battery)

charge

If the shift position is in N, the hybrid bat-

tery (traction battery) will not be

charged. To help prevent the battery

from discharging, avoid leaving the N

position selected for an extended period

of time.

■Situations where shift control system

malfunctions are possible

If any of the following situations occurs,

shift control system malfunctions are

possible.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place on level ground, apply the parking

brake, and then contact your Lexus

dealer.

●When the warning message indicating

the shift control system appears on the

multi-information display.

●The display indicates that no shift posi-

tion is selected for more than a few

seconds.

176 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Shift lever

Operate the shift lever gently and securely

in the direction of the arrow on the shift

position indicator.

To shift to N, slide the shift lever in the

direction of the arrow and hold it.

Release the shift lever after each shifting

operation to allow it to return to its regular

position ( ).

Shifting to M is only possible when the shift

position is in D.

When shifting from P to N, D or R, from N,

D, M or R to P, from D or M to R, or from R

to D, ensure that the brake pedal is being

depressed and the vehicle is stationary.

Shift position indicator

Meter display:

The current shift position is highlighted.

When any shift position other than D or M

is selected, the arrow toward M and the M

position indicator are displayed in gray.

Shift lever display:

The current shift position is illuminated.

When selecting the shift position, make

sure that the shift position has been

changed to the desired position by check-

ing the shift position indicator provided on

the instrument cluster.

P position switch

■When shifting the shift position to P

Fully stop the vehicle and set the park-

ing brake, and then press the P position

switch.

When the shift position is changed to P, the

switch illuminates.

Check that the shift position indicator

shows P.

Shifting the shift lever

WARNING

■For the shift lever

●Do not remove the shift lever knob or

use anything but a genuine Lexus shift

lever knob. Also, do not hang anything

on the shift lever.

Doing so could prevent the shift lever

from returning to position, causing

unexpected accidents to occur when

the vehicle is in motion.

●In order to prevent the shift position

from accidentally being changed, do

not touch the shift lever when not using

them.

P position switch

177

4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Shifting the shift position from P to

other positions

-While depressing the brake pedal

firmly, operate the shift lever. If the

shift lever is operated without

depressing the brake pedal, the

buzzer will sound and the shifting

operation will be disabled.

-When selecting the shift position,

make sure that the shift position has

been changed to the desired posi-

tion by checking the shift position

indicator provided on the instru-

ment cluster.

-The shift position cannot be

changed from P to M directly.

■Automatic P position selection function

In the following situations, the shift position

is automatically changed to P.

●When pressing the power switch with the

vehicle stopped while the power switch is

in ON mode and the shift position is in a

position other than P (after the shift posi-

tion has changed to P, the power switch

will turn off)*

●When the vehicle is stopped after the

hybrid system has been stopped in an

emergency while driving

●When voltage of the 12-volt battery

drops while the shift position is in a posi-

tion other than P

*: When the power switch is pressed while

driving at extremely slow speeds, such

as immediately before stopping the vehi-

cle, the shift position may automatically

change to P. Make sure that the vehicle

is completely stopped before pressing

the power switch.

■If the shift position cannot be shifted

from P

There is a possibility that the 12-volt battery

is discharged. Check the 12-volt battery in

this situation. (→P.447)

■Driving mode

→P.298

■Snow mode

Snow mode can be selected to suit the

conditions when driving on slippery

road surfaces, such as on snow.

Turn the snow mode switch backward.

The snow mode indicator illuminates.

Turn the snow mode switch backward

again to return to normal mode.

WARNING

■P position switch

●Do not press the P position switch

while the vehicle is moving.

If the P position switch is pressed when

driving at very low speeds (for exam-

ple, directly before stopping the vehi-

cle), the vehicle may stop suddenly

when the shift position switches to P,

which could lead to an accident.

●In order to prevent the shift position

from accidentally being changed, do

not touch the P position switch or shift

lever when not using them.

NOTICE

■Notes regarding shift lever and P

position switch operation

Avoid repeatedly operating the shift

lever and P position switch in quick suc-

cession.

The system protection function may acti-

vate and it will not be temporarily possi-

ble to shift the shift position other than P.

If this happens, please wait for a while

before attempting to change the shift

position again.

Selecting the driving mode

178 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

■Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if

the power switch is turned off after driving

in snow mode.

To drive using temporary shift range

selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle

shift switch.

When the “-” paddle shift switch is

operated, the shift range switches to a

range that enables engine braking

force that is suitable to driving condi-

tions. When the “+” paddle shift switch

is operated, the shift range switches to

a range that is one range higher than

the current range.

Changing the shift range allows

restriction of the highest gear, prevent-

ing unnecessary upshifting and

enabling the level of engine braking

force to be selected.

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

1Upshifting

2Downshifting

The selected shift range, from D1 to D10,

will be displayed on the meter.

To return to normal D position driving, the

“+” paddle shift switch must be held down

for a period of time.

A lower shift range will provide greater

engine braking forces than a higher shift

range.

■Automatic deactivation of shift range

selection in the D position

Shift range selection in the D position will

be deactivated in the following situations:

●When the vehicle comes to a stop

●If the accelerator pedal is depressed for

more than a certain period of time

●When the shift position is shifted to a

position other than D.

Selecting shift ranges in the D

position

Meter dis-

play Function

D2 - D10

A gear in the range between

D1 and the selected shift

range is automatically cho-

sen depending on vehicle

speed and driving condi-

tions

D1 Setting the shift range at D1

179

4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

●When the “+” paddle shift switch is

pressed and held

■Downshifting restriction warning

buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving perfor-

mance, downshifting operation may some-

times be restricted. In some circumstances,

downshifting may not be possible even

when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A

buzzer will sound twice.)

To enter M mode, shift the shift position

to M. Gears can be selected by oper-

ating the paddle shift switches, allowing

you to drive in the gear of your choos-

ing.

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

1Upshifting

2Downshifting

The gear changes once every time the

paddle shift switch is operated.

The selected gear, from M1 to M10, will be

fixed and displayed on the meter.

When in the M position, the gear will

not change unless the paddle shift

switches are operated.

However, even when in the M position,

the gears will be automatically

changed in the following situations:

-When vehicle speed drops (down-

shift only).

-When vehicle speed increases

(upshift only).

-When the accelerator pedal is firmly

depressed.

-When it is necessary to protect the

transmission when the transmission

fluid temperature is high or low, or

other reasons.

Also, the gear will not shift when the

vehicle speed is low, even if an upshift

operation is performed.

■Downshifting restrictions warning

buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving perfor-

mance, downshifting operation may some-

times be restricted. In some circumstances,

downshifting may not be possible even

when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A

buzzer will sound twice.)

Selecting gears in the M position

180 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1Right turn

2Lane change to the right (move the

lever partway and release it)

The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

3Lane change to the left (move the

lever partway and release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

4Left turn

■Turn signals can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear

turn signal lights has not burned out.

■If the turn signals stop flashing before a

lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

181

4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Using the manual mode

The parking brake can be set and

released manually.

U.S.A.

Canada

1Push the switch to set the parking

brake

The parking brake indicator light will turn

on.

Press and hold the parking brake switch if

an emergency occurs and it is necessary to

operate the parking brake while driving.

2Pull the switch to release the park-

ing brake

• Operate the parking brake switch while

depressing the brake pedal.

• Using the parking brake automatic

release function, the parking brake can

be released by depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. When using this function,

slowly depress the accelerator pedal.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator

light turn off.

If the parking brake indicator light

flashes, operate the switch again.

(→P.434)

■Turns automatic mode on

While the vehicle is stopped, press and

hold the parking brake switch until a

message is shown on the multi-infor-

mation display

When the automatic mode is turned

on, the parking brake operates as fol-

lows.

-When the shift position is shifted

from P, the parking brake will be

released, and the parking brake

indicator light will turn off.

-When the shift position is shifted to

P, the parking brake will be set, and

the parking brake indicator light will

turn on.

Parking brake

The parking brake can be set or

released automatically or manually.

In automatic mode, the parking

brake can be set or released auto-

matically according to the shift

lever operation. Also, even in auto-

matic mode, the parking brake can

be set or released manually.

Operating instructions

182 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Operate the shift lever and P position

switch with the vehicle stopped and the

brake pedal depressed.

■Turns automatic mode off

While the vehicle is stopped, pull and

hold the parking brake switch until a

message is shown on the multi-infor-

mation display

■Parking brake operation

●When the power switch is not in ON

mode, the parking brake cannot be

released using the parking brake switch.

●When the power switch is not in ON

mode, automatic mode (automatic brake

setting and releasing) is not available.

■Parking brake automatic release func-

tion

●When the shift position is shifted from P,

the parking brake will be released in

automatic mode.

●When all of the following conditions are

met in manual mode, the parking brake

can be released by depressing the accel-

erator pedal.

• The driver’s door is closed

• The driver is wearing the seat belt

• The shift position is in D, M or R

■If “EPB Frequently Operated Wait a

Minute” is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

If the parking brake is operated repeatedly

over a short period of time, the system may

restrict operation to prevent overheating. If

this happens, refrain from operating the

parking brake. Normal operation will return

after about 1 minute.

■If “EPB Activation Stopped Incom-

pletely” or “EPB unavailable” is dis-

played on the multi-information display

Operate the parking brake switch. If the

message does not disappear after operat-

ing the switch several times, the system may

be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor

sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

■Parking brake operation

●Depending on the power switch mode,

the parking brake indicator light will turn

on and stay on as described below:

ON mode: Comes on until the parking

brake is released.

Not in ON mode: Stays on for approxi-

mately 15 seconds.

●When the power switch is turned off with

the parking brake set, the parking brake

indicator light will stay on for about 15

seconds. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

■When the parking brake switch mal-

functions

Automatic mode (automatic brake setting

and releasing) will be turned on automati-

cally.

■Parking the vehicle

→P.158

■Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven

with the parking brake engaged. “EPB

Applied” is displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display. (with the vehicle reached a

speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])

■If the brake system warning light comes

→P.427

■Usage in winter time

→P.309

183

4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Press the brake hold switch to turn the

system on

The brake hold standby indicator (green)

comes on. While the system is holding

the brakes, the brake hold operated indica-

tor (yellow) comes on.

■Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on

in the following conditions:

●The driver’s door is not closed.

●The driver is not wearing the seat belt.

If any of the conditions above are detected

when the brake hold system is enabled, the

system will turn off and the brake hold

standby indicator light will go off. In addi-

tion, if any of the conditions are detected

while the system is holding the brake, a

warning buzzer will sound and a message

WARNING

■When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone.

The parking brake may be released unin-

tentionally and there is the danger of the

vehicle moving that may lead to an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, set the

parking brake, shift the shift position to P

and make sure that the vehicle does not

move.

■When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and

check the warning messages.

■When the parking brake cannot be

released due to a malfunction

Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake set will lead to brake components

overheating, which may affect braking

performance and increase brake wear.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

Brake Hold

The brake hold system keeps the

brake applied when the shift posi-

tion is in D, M or N with the system

on and the brake pedal has been

depressed to stop the vehicle. The

system releases the brake when the

accelerator pedal is depressed with

the shift position in D or M to allow

smooth start off.

Enabling the system

184 4-2. Driving procedures

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

will be shown on the multi-information dis-

play. The parking brake will then be set

automatically.

■Brake hold function

●If the brake pedal is left released for a

period of about 3 minutes after the sys-

tem has started holding the brake, the

parking brake will be set automatically. In

this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a

message is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display.

●To turn the system off while the system is

holding the brake, firmly depress the

brake pedal and press the button again.

●The brake hold function may not hold the

vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep

incline. In this situation, it may be neces-

sary for the driver to apply the brakes. A

warning buzzer will sound and the

multi-information display will inform the

driver of this situation. If a warning mes-

sage is shown on the multi-information

display, read the message and follow the

instructions.

■When the parking brake is set automati-

cally while the system is holding the

brakes

Perform any of the following operations to

release the parking brake.

●Depress the accelerator pedal. (The

parking brake will not be released auto-

matically if the seat belt is not fastened.)

●Operate the parking brake switch with

the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure that the parking brake indicator

light goes off. (→P.181)

■When an inspection at your Lexus

dealer is necessary

When the brake hold standby indicator

(green) does not illuminate even when the

brake hold switch is pressed with the brake

hold system operating conditions met, the

system may be malfunctioning. Have the

vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.

■If “Brake Hold Fault Depress Brake to

Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or “Brake

Hold Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is

displayed on the multiinformation dis-

play

The system may be malfunctioning. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to

indicate a system malfunction or to inform

the driver of the need for caution. If a warn-

ing message is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display, read the message and follow

the instructions.

■If the brake hold operated indicator

flashes

→P.434

WARNING

■When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a

steep incline exercise caution. The brake

hold function may not hold the vehicle in

such a situation.

■When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when

the gripping ability of the tires has been

exceeded. Do not use the system when

stopped on a slippery road.

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed

for use when parking the vehicle for a

long period of time. Turning the power

switch off while the system is holding the

brake may release the brake, which

would cause the vehicle to move. When

operating the power switch, depress the

brake pedal, shift the shift position to P

and set the parking brake.

185

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

4-3.Operati ng the lights and w ipers

Turning the end of the lever turns on

the lights as follows:

U.S.A.

Canada

1 The side marker, parking, tail,

license plate, instrument panel

lights, and daytime running lights

(→P.185) turn on.

2 The headlights and all lights

listed above (except daytime run-

ning lights) turn on.

3 The headlights, daytime run-

ning lights (→P.185) and all the

lights listed above turn on and off

automatically.

4 (U.S.A.) Off

(Canada) The daytime run-

ning lights turn on. (→P.185)

■AUTO mode can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■Daytime running light system

●The daytime running lights illuminate

using the same lights as the parking lights

and illuminate brighter than the parking

lights.

●To make your vehicle more visible to

other drivers during daytime driving, the

daytime running lights turn on automati-

cally when all of the following conditions

are met. (The daytime running lights are

not designed for use at night.)

• The hybrid system is operating

• The parking brake is released

• The headlight switch is in the (Can-

ada only), or * position

*: When the surroundings are bright

The daytime running lights remain on after

they illuminate, even if the parking brake is

set again.

●For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights

can be turned off by operating the switch.

●Compared to turning on the headlights,

the daytime running light system offers

greater durability and consumes less

electricity, so it can help improve fuel

economy.

■Headlight control sensor

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated

manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

186 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The sensor may not function properly if an

object is placed on the sensor, or anything

that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-

shield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detect-

ing the level of ambient light and may cause

the automatic headlight system to malfunc-

tion.

■Automatic light off system

●When the headlights are on: The head-

lights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds

after the driver’s door is opened and

closed if the power switch is turned to

ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The

lights turn off immediately if on the

key is pressed after all the doors are

closed.)

●When only the tail lights are on: The tail

lights turn off automatically if the power

switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode

or turned off and the driver’s door is

opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the power

switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch

off once and then back to or .

■Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the power switch is

turned off or turned to ACCESSORY

mode and the driver’s door is opened while

the lights are turned on.

■Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically

adjusted according to the number of pas-

sengers and the loading condition of the

vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not

interfere with other road users.

■Windshield wiper linked headlight illu-

mination

When driving during daytime with the

headlight switch turned to , if the wind-

shield wipers are used, the headlights will

turn on automatically after several seconds

to help enhance the visibility of your vehicle.

■12-volt battery-saving function

In order to prevent the 12-volt battery of the

vehicle from discharging, if the headlights

and/or tail lights are on when the power

switch is turned off the 12-volt battery sav-

ing function will operate and automatically

turn off all the lights after approximately 20

minutes. When the power switch is turned

to ON mode, the 12-volt battery-saving

function will be disabled.

When any of the following are performed,

the 12-volt battery-saving function is can-

celed once and then reactivated. All the

lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes

after the 12-volt battery-saving function has

been reactivated:

●When the headlight switch is operated

●When a door is opened or closed

■Welcome light illumination control

The front position and tail lights automati-

cally turn on at night when the doors are

unlocked using the entry function or wire-

less remote control if the light switch is in

the position.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

1With the headlights on, push the

lever away from you to turn on the

high beams.

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than

necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Turning on the high beam head-

lights

187

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Pull the lever toward you to the center

position to turn the high beams off.

2Pull the lever toward you and

release it to flash the high beams

once.

You can flash the high beams with the

headlights on or off.

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)

secures excellent visibility at intersec-

tions and on curves by automatically

adjusting the direction of the light axis

of the headlights according to vehicle

speed and the degree of the tire’s angle

as controlled by steering input.

AFS operates at speeds of approximately

6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

-When the steering wheel or turn

signal lever is operated while the

headlights are on (low beam), a cor-

nering light will turn on and light up

the direction of movement of the

vehicle. The cornering lights are

designed to ensure excellent visibil-

ity when making a turn at an inter-

section.

However, when vehicle speed is approxi-

mately 22 mph (35 km/h) or higher, the

cornering lights will not turn on.

-When the shift position is in R while

the headlights are on (low beam),

both cornering lights will turn on.

This is designed to enhance visibility

when parking.

■Cornering lights

When the cornering lights are on for more

than 30 minutes, they will turn off automati-

cally.

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting

System) (if equipped)

Cornering lights

188 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1Press the Automatic High Beam

switch.

2Push the lever away from you with

the headlight switch in the or

position.

The AHB indicator will come on when the

system is operating.

■Conditions to turn the high beams on/off

automatically

●When all of the following conditions are

met, the high beams will be turned on

automatically (after approximately 1 sec-

ond):

• The vehicle speed is approximately 21

mph (34 km/h) or more.

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with head-

lights or tail lights turned on.

• There are few streetlights on the road

ahead.

●If any of the following conditions are met,

the high beams will turn off automatically:

• The vehicle speed is below approxi-

mately 17 mph (27 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

• Vehicles ahead have their headlights or

tail lights turned on.

• There are many streetlights on the road

ahead.

■Camera sensor detection information

●The high beams may not be automatically

turned off in the following situations:

• When a vehicle suddenly appears from

around a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by

another vehicle

• When vehicles ahead cannot be

detected due to repeated curves, road

dividers or roadside trees

• When vehicles ahead appear in a far-

away lane on a wide road

• When the lights of vehicles ahead are not

●The high beams may be turned off if a

AHB (Automatic High

Beam)

The Automatic High Beam uses a

camera sensor located behind the

upper portion of the windshield to

assess the brightness of the lights of

vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc.,

and automatically turns the high

beams on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■Limitations of the Automatic High

Beam

Do not overly rely on the Automatic High

Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to

observe your surroundings and turning

the high beams on or off manually if nec-

essary.

■To prevent incorrect operation of the

Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

Activating the Automatic High

Beam

189

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

vehicle ahead that is using fog lights with-

out its headlights turned on is detected.

●House lights, street lights, traffic signals,

and illuminated billboards or signs and

other reflective objects may cause the

high beams to change to the low beams,

or the low beams to remain on.

●The following factors may affect the

amount of time taken for the high beams

to turn on or off:

• The brightness of the headlights, fog

lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles

ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has opera-

tional lights on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled

vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient,

curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of

luggage in the vehicle

●The high beams may turn on or off unex-

pectedly.

●Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be

detected.

●In the following situations the system may

not be able to correctly detect the sur-

rounding brightness level. This may cause

the low beams to remain on or the high

beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or

vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is neces-

sary to manually switch between the high

and low beams.

• When driving in inclement weather

(heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)

• When the windshield is obscured by fog,

mist, ice, dirt, etc.

• When the windshield is cracked or dam-

aged

• When the camera sensor is deformed or

dirty

• When the temperature of the camera

sensor is extremely high

• When the surrounding brightness level is

equal to that of headlights, tail lights or

fog lights

• When headlights or tail lights of vehicles

ahead are turned off, dirty, changing

color, or not aimed properly

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,

dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle

• When driving through an area of inter-

mittently changing brightness and dark-

ness

• When frequently and repeatedly driving

ascending/descending roads, or roads

with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces

(such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads,

etc.)

• When frequently and repeatedly taking

curves or driving on a winding road

• When there is a highly reflective object

ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or

mirror

• When the back of a preceding vehicle is

highly reflective, such as a container on a

truck

• When the vehicle’s headlights are dam-

aged or dirty, or are not aimed properly

• When the vehicle is listing or titling due to

a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.

• When the headlights are changed

between the high beams and low beams

repeatedly in an abnormal manner

• When the driver believes that the high

beams may be flashing or dazzling

pedestrians or other drivers

■Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be tempo-

rarily lowered.

1Turn the power switch on while the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

●The headlight switch is in or .

●The headlight switch lever is in high beam

position.

●Automatic High Beam switch is on.

2Turn the power switch to ON mode.

3Within 30 seconds after step 2, repeat

pulling the headlight switch lever to the

original position then pushing it to the

high beam position quickly 10 times,

then leave the lever in high beam posi-

tion.

4If the sensitivity is changed, the AHB

indicator is turn on and off 3 times.

Automatic High Beam (headlights) may

turn on even when the vehicle is stopped.

190 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Switching to the low beams

Pull the lever to its original position.

The AHB indicator will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to activate

the Automatic High Beam system again.

■Switching to the high beams

Press the Automatic High Beam

switch.

The AHB indicator will turn off and the

high beam indicator will turn on.

Press the switch to activate the Automatic

High Beam system again.

Operate the lever and switch as fol-

lows to use the wipers. When is

selected, the wipers will operate auto-

matically when the sensor detects fall-

ing rain. The system automatically

adjusts wiper timing in accordance

with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Turning the high beams on/off

manually

Windshield wipers and

washer

Operating the lever can switch

between automatic operation and

manual operation, or can use the

washer.

NOTICE

■When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may dam-

age the windshield.

Operating the wiper lever

191

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

1 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)

Off

2 Rain-sensing wiper operation

The wipers will operate automatically when

the sensor detects falling rain. The system

automatically adjusts wiper timing in

accordance with rain volume and vehicle

speed.

3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)

Low speed wiper operation

4 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)

High speed wiper operation

5 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)

Temporary operation

When is selected, the sensor sen-

sitivity can be adjusted by turning the

switch ring.

6Increases the sensitivity

7Decreases the sensitivity

8Washer/wiper dual operation

Wipers will automatically operate a couple

of times after the washer squirts.

(After operating several times, the wipers

operate once more time after a short delay

to prevent dripping. However, the dripping

prevention does not operate while the

vehicle is moving.)

Vehicles with headlight cleaners:

When the power switch is in ON mode

and the headlights are on, if the lever is

pulled, the headlight cleaners will operate

once. After this, the headlight cleaners will

operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.

■The windshield wiper and washer can be

operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■Effects of vehicle speed on wiper opera-

tion

Even when the wipers are not in AUTO

mode, vehicle speed affects the time until

the drip prevention wiper sweep occurs.

With low speed windshield wiper operation

selected, wiper operation will be switched

from low speed to intermittent wiper opera-

tion only when the vehicle is stationary.

(However, when the sensor sensitivity is

adjusted to the highest level, the mode can-

not be switched.)

■Raindrop sensor

●The raindrop sensor judges the amount

of raindrops.

An optical sensor is adopted. It may not

operate properly when sunlight from the

rising or setting of the sun intermittently

strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are

present on the windshield.

192 4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode

while the power switch is in ON mode,

the wipers will operate once to show that

AUTO mode is activated.

●If the temperature of the raindrop sensor

is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or 5°F

(-15°C) or lower, automatic operation

may not occur. In this case, operate the

wipers in any mode other than AUTO

mode.

■If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not

blocked if there is washer fluid in the wind-

shield washer fluid reservoir.

■Front door opening linked windshield

wiper stop function

When is selected and the windshield

wipers are operating, if a front door is

opened while the vehicle is stopped and the

P shift position is selected, operation of the

windshield wipers will be stopped to pre-

vent anyone near the vehicle from being

sprayed by water from the wipers. When

the front door is closed, wiper operation will

resume.

■When stopping hybrid system in an

emergency while driving

If the windshield wipers are operating when

hybrid system is stopped, the windshield

wipers will operate in high speed operation.

After the vehicle is stopped, operation will

return to normal when the power switch is

turned to ON mode, or operation will stop

when the driver’s door is opened.

■Outside rear view mirror defogger acti-

vation linked to windshield wiper opera-

tion

The outside rear view mirror defoggers

automatically turn on when you operate the

windshield wipers.

The outside rear view mirror defoggers

automatically turn off approximately 15

minutes after the wipers stop.

For details about the outside rear view mir-

ror defoggers: →P.324

When the windshield wipers are not

being used, they retract to below the

hood. To enable the windshield wipers

to be lifted when parking in cold condi-

tions or when replacing a windshield

WARNING

■Caution regarding the use of wind-

shield wipers in AUTO mode

The windshield wipers may operate

unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or

the windshield is subject to vibration in

AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers

or anything else do not become caught

in the windshield wipers.

■Caution regarding the use of washer

fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer

fluid until the windshield becomes warm.

The fluid may freeze on the windshield

and cause low visibility. This may lead to

an accident, resulting in death or serious

injury.

NOTICE

■When there is no washer fluid spray

from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may

be caused if the lever is pulled toward

you and held continually.

■When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other

object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Changing the windshield wiper

rest position/Lifting the wind-

shield wipers

193

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

wiper insert, change the rest position of

the windshield wipers to the service

position using the wiper lever.

■Raising the wipers to the service

position

Within approximately 45 seconds of

turning the power switch off, move the

wiper lever to the (U.S.A.) or

(Canada) position and hold it for

approximately 2 seconds or more.

The wipers will move to the service posi-

tion.

■Lifting the windshield wipers

While holding the hook portion of

the wiper arm, lift the windshield wiper

from the windshield.

■Lowering the windshield wipers to the

retracted position

With the windshield wipers placed on the

windshield, turn the power switch to ON

mode and then move the wiper lever to an

operating position. When the wiper switch

is turned off, the windshield wipers will stop

at the retracted position. Even if the wipers

deviate while the power switch is off, the

wipers will return to the normal position.

NOTICE

■When lifting the windshield wipers

●Do not lift the windshield wipers when

they are in the retracted position

below the hood. Otherwise, they may

contact the hood, possibly resulting in

damage to a windshield wiper and/or

the hood.

●Do not lift a windshield wiper by the

wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper

blade may be deformed.

●Do not operate the wiper lever when

the windshield wipers are lifted. Oth-

erwise, the windshield wipers may

contact the hood, possibly resulting in

damage to the windshield wipers

and/or hood.

194 4-4. Refueling

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-4.Refueling

-Close all the doors and windows,

and turn the power switch off.

-Confirm the type of fuel.

■Fuel types

→P.470

■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehi-

cle has a fuel tank opening that only accom-

modates the special nozzle on unleaded

fuel pumps.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The fuel tank of your vehicle has a

special structure, which requires a

reduction in fuel tank pressure

before refueling. After the opener

switch has been pressed, it will take

several seconds until the vehicle is

ready for refueling.

Before refueling the vehicle

WARNING

■When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while

refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may

result in death or serious injury.

●After exiting the vehicle and before

opening the fuel door, touch an

unpainted metal surface to discharge

any static electricity. It is important to

discharge static electricity before refu-

eling because sparks resulting from

static electricity can cause fuel vapors

to ignite while refueling.

●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank

cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard

when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard

before fully removing the cap. In hot

weather, pressurized fuel may spray

out the filler neck and cause injury.

●Do not allow anyone that has not dis-

charged static electricity from their

body to come close to an open fuel

tank.

●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are

harmful if inhaled.

●Do not smoke while refueling the vehi-

cle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite

and cause a fire.

●Do not return to the vehicle or touch

any person or object that is statically

charged.

This may cause static electricity to

build up, resulting in a possible ignition

hazard.

■When refueling

Observe the following precautions to

prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel

tank:

●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the

fuel filler neck.

●Stop filling the tank after the fuel noz-

zle automatically clicks off.

●Do not top off the fuel tank.

195

4-4. Refueling

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

1Press the opener switch.

The fuel filler door will open within about

10 seconds of the switch being pressed.

Before refueling is possible, a message will

be shown on the multi-information display

in the instrument cluster to indicate the

progress of the fuel filler door opener.

2Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and

remove it, then put it into the holder

on the fuel filler door.

■If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

→P.445

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap

until you hear a click. Once the cap is

released, it will turn slightly in the oppo-

site direction.

NOTICE

■Refueling

●Finish refueling within 30 minutes. If

more than 30 minutes passes, the

internal valve closes. In this condition,

fuel may overflow during the refueling

process.

Press the fuel filler door opener switch

again.

●Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle,

such as causing the emission control

system to operate abnormally or dam-

aging fuel system components or the

vehicle’s painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Closing the fuel tank cap

WARNING

■When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus

fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.

Doing so may cause a fire or other inci-

dent which may result in death or serious

injury.

196 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

4-5.Using the dr iving support systems

*:If equipped

■PCS (Pre-Collision System)(vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System+A)

→P.209

■FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)

→P.227

■LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

→P.230

■AHB (Automatic High Beam)

→P.188

■RSA (Road Sign Assist)

→P.247

■Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

→P.250

The pre-collision system is equipped

with a sophisticated computer that will

record certain data, such as:

• Accelerator status

•Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Operation status of the pre-collision

system functions

• Information (such as the distance

and relative speed between your

vehicle and the vehicle ahead or

other objects)

• Images from the camera sensor

(available only in situations when

sudden inputs occur while driving

[sudden acceleration, etc.], the

pre-collision braking function or the

pre-collision brake assist function

was operating, the Parking Support

Brake function [static objects] was

operating, or your vehicle was

involved in a collision)

The pre-collision system does not

Lexus Safety System+A*

The Lexus Safety System+A con-

sists of the following drive assist sys-

tems and contributes to a safe and

comfortable driving experience:

Drive assist systems of Lexus

Safety System+A

WARNING

■Lexus Safety System+A

The Lexus Safety System+A is designed

to operate under the assumption that the

driver will drive safely, and is designed to

help reduce the impact to the occupants

and the vehicle in the case of a collision

or assist the driver in normal driving con-

ditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recog-

nition accuracy and control performance

that this system can provide, do not

overly rely on this system. The driver is

always responsible for paying attention

to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving

safely.

Vehicle data recording

197

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

record conversations, sounds or

images of the inside of the vehicle.

-Data usage

Lexus may use the data recorded in this

computer to diagnose malfunctions, con-

duct research and development, and

improve quality.

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to

a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or

with the consent of the lessee if the vehi-

cle is leased

• In response to an official request by the

police, a court of law or a government

agency

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is

not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle

owner

-Recorded images can be erased

using a specialized device.

The image recording function can be dis-

abled. However, if the function is disabled,

data from when the pre-collision system

operates will not be available.

Four types of sensors, located behind

the front grille, front bumper, rear

bumper and windshield, detect infor-

mation necessary to operate the drive

assist systems.

-Front

Front radar sensor

Front side radar sensors

Camera sensor

-Rear

Rear side radar sensors (→P.260)

Sensors

198 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii

199

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

For vehicles sold in Canada

WARNING

■To avoid malfunction of the front

radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

200 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

●Keep the radar sensor and front grille

emblem clean at all times.

Radar sensor

Front grille emblem

If the front of the radar sensor or the front

or back of the front grille emblem is dirty

or covered with water droplets, snow,

etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and front grille

emblem with a soft cloth so you do not

mark or damage them.

●Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), or

other items to the radar sensor, front

grille emblem or surrounding area.

●Do not subject the radar sensor or sur-

rounding area to a strong impact.

If the radar sensor is moved even

slightly off position, the system may

malfunction and objects may not be

detected correctly.

If the radar sensor, front grille, or front

bumper has been subjected to a

strong impact, have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

●Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

●Do not modify or paint the radar sen-

sor, front grille emblem or surrounding

area.

●If the radar sensor, front grille, or front

bumper needs to be removed and

installed, or replaced, contact your

Lexus dealer.

■To avoid malfunction of the front side

radar sensors

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Keep the radar sensors and their sur-

rounding areas on the front bumper

clean at all times.

If a radar sensor or its surrounding area

on the front bumper is dirty or covered

with snow, the system may not operate

and a warning message (→P.440) will

be displayed.

If this occurs, clean off the dirt or snow

and drive the vehicle for approximately

10 minutes.

If the warning message does not disap-

pear, have your vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

●Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), alumi-

num tape or other items to the radar

sensors or their surrounding area.

201

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

WARNING

●Do not subject a radar sensor or its

surrounding area on the front bumper

to a strong impact.

If a radar sensor is moved even slightly

off position, the system may malfunction

and vehicles may not be detected cor-

rectly.

In the following situations, have your

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

• If a radar sensor or its surrounding

area is subject to a strong impact

• If the area on the front bumper around

a radar sensor is scratched or dented,

or the front bumper has become par-

tially disengaged

●Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

●Do not modify the radar sensors or

their surrounding area on the front

bumper.

●If a radar sensor or the front bumper

needs to be removed and installed, or

replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not paint the front bumper any

color other than an official Lexus color.

■To avoid malfunction of the camera

sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the camera sensor may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered

with an oily film, water droplets, snow,

etc., clear the windshield.

• As some glass coating agents may

affect the detection performance of

the camera sensor, consult your Lexus

dealer when using a glass coating

agent.

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the

windshield, it will still be necessary to

use the windshield wipers to remove

water droplets, etc. from the area of

the windshield in front of the camera

sensor.

• If the inner side of the windshield

where the camera sensor is installed is

dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not attach objects, such as stickers,

transparent stickers, and so forth, to

the outer side of the windshield in front

of the camera sensor (shaded area in

the illustration).

From the top of the windshield to

approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below

the bottom of the camera sensor

Approximately 14.2 in. (36 cm)

(Approximately 7.1 in. [18 cm] to the

right and left from the center of the

camera sensor)

●If the part of the windshield in front of

the camera sensor is fogged up or

covered with condensation or ice, use

the windshield defogger to remove the

fog, condensation or ice. (→P.324)

202 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

●If water droplets cannot be properly

removed from the area of the wind-

shield in front of the camera sensor by

the windshield wipers, replace the

wiper insert or wiper blade.

If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need

to be replaced, contact your Lexus

dealer.

●Do not attach window tinting to the

windshield.

●Replace the windshield if it is damaged

or cracked.

If the windshield needs to be replaced,

contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not get the camera sensor wet.

●Do not allow bright lights to shine into

the camera sensor.

●Do not dirty or damage the camera

sensor.

When cleaning the inside of the wind-

shield, do not allow glass cleaner to

contact the lens. Also, do not touch the

lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact

your Lexus dealer.

●Do not subject the camera sensor to a

strong impact.

●Do not change the installation position

or direction of the camera sensor or

remove it.

●Do not disassemble the camera sen-

sor.

●Do not modify any components of the

vehicle around the camera sensor

(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

●Do not attach any accessories that

may obstruct the camera sensor to the

hood, front grille or front bumper.

Contact your Lexus dealer.

●If a surfboard or other long object is to

be mounted on the roof, make sure

that it will not obstruct the camera sen-

sor.

●Do not modify the headlights or other

lights.

203

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

*:If equipped

■PCS (Pre-Collision System)(vehi-

cles with Lexus Safety System+)

→P.220

■LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)

→P.240

■AHB (Automatic High Beam)

→P.188

■Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

→P.250

The pre-collision system is equipped

with a sophisticated computer that will

record certain data, such as:

• Accelerator status

•Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Operation status of the pre-collision

system functions

• Information (such as the distance

and relative speed between your

vehicle and the vehicle ahead or

other objects)

• Images from the camera sensor

(available only when the pre-colli-

sion braking function or the pre-col-

lision brake assist function was

operating)

The pre-collision system does not

record conversations, sounds or

images of the inside of the vehicle.

-Data usage

Lexus may use the data recorded in this

computer to diagnose malfunctions, con-

duct research and development, and

improve quality.

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to

a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or

with the consent of the lessee if the vehi-

cle is leased

• In response to an official request by the

police, a court of law or a government

agency

Lexus Safety System+*

The Lexus Safety System+ consists

of the following drive assist systems

and contributes to a safe and com-

fortable driving experience:

Drive assist systems of Lexus

Safety System+

WARNING

■Lexus Safety System+

The Lexus Safety System+ is designed to

operate under the assumption that the

driver will drive safely, and is designed to

help reduce the impact to the occupants

and the vehicle in the case of a collision

or assist the driver in normal driving con-

ditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recog-

nition accuracy and control performance

that this system can provide, do not

overly rely on this system. The driver is

always responsible for paying attention

to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving

safely.

Vehicle data recording

204 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is

not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle

owner

-Recorded images can be erased

using a specialized device.

The image recording function can be dis-

abled. However, if the function is disabled,

data from when the pre-collision system

operates will not be available.

Two types of sensors, located behind

the front grille and windshield, detect

information necessary to operate the

drive assist systems.

Radar sensor

Camera sensor

Sensors

205

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

206 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For vehicles sold in Canada

WARNING

■To avoid malfunction of the radar sen-

sor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

207

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

WARNING

●Keep the radar sensor and front grille

emblem clean at all times.

Radar sensor

Front grille emblem

If the front of the radar sensor or the front

or back of the front grille emblem is dirty

or covered with water droplets, snow,

etc., clean it.

Clean the radar sensor and front grille

emblem with a soft cloth so you do not

mark or damage them.

●Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), or

other items to the radar sensor, front

grille emblem or surrounding area.

●Do not subject the radar sensor or sur-

rounding area to a strong impact.

If the radar sensor, front grille, or front

bumper has been subjected to a

strong impact, have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

●Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

●Do not modify or paint the radar sen-

sor, front grille emblem or surrounding

area.

●If the radar sensor, front grille, or front

bumper needs to be removed and

installed, or replaced, contact your

Lexus dealer.

■To avoid malfunction of the camera

sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the camera sensor may not

operate properly, possibly leading to an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered

with an oily film, water droplets, snow,

etc., clear the windshield.

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the

windshield, it will still be necessary to

use the windshield wipers to remove

water droplets, etc. from the area of

the windshield in front of the camera

sensor.

• If the inner side of the windshield

where the camera sensor is installed is

dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not attach objects, such as stickers,

transparent stickers, and so forth, to

the outer side of the windshield in front

of the camera sensor (shaded area in

the illustration).

From the top of the windshield to

approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below

the bottom of the camera sensor

Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)

(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the

right and left from the center of the

camera sensor)

208 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

●If the part of the windshield in front of

the camera sensor is fogged up or

covered with condensation or ice, use

the windshield defogger to remove the

fog, condensation or ice. (→P.324)

●If water droplets cannot be properly

removed from the area of the wind-

shield in front of the camera sensor by

the windshield wipers, replace the

wiper insert or wiper blade.

If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need

to be replaced, contact your Lexus

dealer.

●Do not attach window tinting to the

windshield.

●Replace the windshield if it is damaged

or cracked.

If the windshield needs to be replaced,

contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not get the camera sensor wet.

●Do not allow bright lights to shine into

the camera sensor.

●Do not dirty or damage the camera

sensor.

When cleaning the inside of the wind-

shield, do not allow glass cleaner to

contact the lens. Also, do not touch the

lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact

your Lexus dealer.

●Do not subject the camera sensor to a

strong impact.

●Do not change the installation position

or direction of the camera sensor or

remove it.

●Do not disassemble the camera sen-

sor.

●Do not modify any components of the

vehicle around the camera sensor

(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

●Do not attach any accessories that

may obstruct the camera sensor to the

hood, front grille or front bumper.

Contact your Lexus dealer.

●If a surfboard or other long object is to

be mounted on the roof, make sure

that it will not obstruct the camera sen-

sor.

●Do not modify the headlights or other

lights.

209

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Pedestrian alert

When the system determines that

there is a possibility of a frontal collision

with a stationary or moving pedestrian

in front of your vehicle, a message will

be displayed on the head-up display to

warn the driver.

■Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high, a

buzzer will sound and a warning mes-

sage will be displayed on the

multi-information display to urge the

driver to take evasive action.

■Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the system applies greater braking

force in relation to how strongly the

brake pedal is depressed.

■Pre-collision braking

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the system warns the driver. If the sys-

tem determines that the possibility of a

frontal collision is extremely high, the

brakes are automatically applied to

help avoid the collision or reduce the

collision speed.

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

(vehicles with Lexus Safety

System+A)

The pre-collision system uses a

front radar sensor and camera sen-

sor to detect vehicles and pedestri-

ans in front of your vehicle and front

side sensors to detect vehicles

approaching from the front left or

right side. When the system deter-

mines that the possibility of a frontal

collision with a vehicle or pedes-

trian is high, a warning operates to

urge the driver to take evasive

action and the potential brake pres-

sure is increased to help the driver

avoid the collision. If the system

determines that the possibility of a

frontal collision with a vehicle or

pedestrian is extremely high, the

brakes are automatically applied to

help avoid the collision or help

reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be dis-

abled/enabled and the warning tim-

ing can be changed. (→P.213)

System functions

210 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Active steering assist

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a collision with an object, such

as a guardrail, or pedestrian is high,

even though the brakes are applied,

and that the collision may be avoidable

through steering control, the system

will steer the vehicle automatically to

help avoid the collision or help reduce

the impact of the collision.

■Pre-collision seat belts (front seat

only)

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision is high, the

system will retract the seat belts. Addi-

tionally, the system may retract the seat

belts if the brakes are applied suddenly

or control of the vehicle is lost.

■Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas-

senger’s seat / power rear seat [if

equipped])

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision is high, it may

move the seatbacks of the front pas-

senger’s seat and power rear seats to

the upright position automatically, if

reclined.

If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be

moved by the pre-collision seat function.

■Suspension control

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-

tem (→P.303) will control the damp-

ing force of the shock absorbers to

help maintain an appropriate vehicle

posture.

■Steering control

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high

and the driver is operating the steering

wheel, the LDH system (→P.303) will

control the turning angle of the front

and rear wheels and effort necessary

to turn the steering wheel to help

enhance steering responsiveness.

WARNING

■Limitations of the pre-collision system

●The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking

care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system

instead of normal braking operations

under any circumstances. This system

will not prevent collisions or lessen col-

lision damage or injury in every situa-

tion. Do not overly rely on this system.

Failure to do so may lead to an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Although this system is designed to

help avoid a collision or help reduce

the impact of the collision, its effective-

ness may change according to various

conditions, therefore the system may

not always be able to achieve the same

level of performance.

Read the following conditions care-

fully. Do not overly rely on this system

and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system

may operate even if there is no possi-

bility of a collision: →P.214

• Conditions under which the system

may not operate properly: →P.216

●Do not attempt to test the operation of

the pre-collision system yourself, as the

system may not operate properly, pos-

sibly leading to an accident.

211

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

WARNING

■Pre-collision braking

●When the pre-collision braking func-

tion is operating, a large amount of

braking force will be applied.

●If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-

tion of the pre-collision braking func-

tion, the pre-collision braking function

operation will be canceled after

approximately 2 seconds. Depress the

brake pedal as necessary.

●The pre-collision braking function may

not operate if certain operations are

performed by the driver. If the acceler-

ator pedal is being depressed strongly

or the steering wheel is being turned,

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and may

prevent the pre-collision braking func-

tion from operating.

●In some situations, while the pre-colli-

sion braking function is operating,

operation of the function may be can-

celed if the accelerator pedal is

depressed strongly or the steering

wheel is turned and the system deter-

mines that the driver is taking evasive

action.

●If the brake pedal is being depressed,

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and pos-

sibly delay the operation timing of the

pre-collision braking function.

■Active steering assist

●The steering wheel may turn automati-

cally when active steering assist is

operating.

●As active steering assist operation will

be canceled when the system deter-

mines that a collision has been

avoided, operate the steering wheel as

necessary.

●In the following situations, the system

may determine that the driver is taking

evasive action. In this case, the active

steering assist may not operate or may

be canceled.

• If the accelerator pedal is being

depressed strongly or the steering

wheel is being operated. In this case

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and the

pre-collision braking may not operate.

• In some situations, while the active

steering assist is operating, operation

of the function may be canceled if the

accelerator pedal is depressed

strongly or the steering wheel is turned

and the system determines that the

driver is taking evasive action.

• When the active steering assist is

operating, if the steering wheel is held

firmly or is operated in the opposite

direction to that which the system is

generating torque, the function may be

canceled.

• If the brake pedal is depressed, the sys-

tem may determine that the driver is

taking evasive action and the active

steering assist operation may be

delayed.

■Pre-collision seat belts with comfort

function

If the pre-collision seat belts have oper-

ated and the seat belts are locked in a

retracted position, immediately stop the

vehicle in a safe place, release and

retract the seat belts to unlock them and

then fasten them again.

Also, if a seat belt can be loosened, it can

be unlocked by slightly retracting it with-

out releasing it.

■When to disable the pre-collision sys-

tem

In the following situations, disable the

system, as it may not operate properly,

possibly leading to an accident resulting

in death or serious injury:

●When the vehicle is being towed

212 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-

sion system

The pre-collision system can be

enabled/disabled on (→P.86) of

the multi-information display.

The system is automatically enabled each

time the power switch is turned to ON

mode

If the system is disabled, the PCS warn-

ing light will turn on and a message will

be displayed on the multi-information

display.

If the pre-collision system is disabled,

the pedestrian alert system will also be

disabled. At this time, the FCTA (Front

Cross Traffic Alert) (→P.227) system

will also be disabled.

■Enabling/Disabling the pedestrian

alert system

The pedestrian alert can be

enabled/disabled on (→P.86) of

the multi-information display. At this

time, the FCTA (Front Cross Traffic

Alert) system will also be enabled/dis-

abled.

WARNING

●When your vehicle is towing another

vehicle

●When transporting the vehicle via

truck, boat, train or similar means of

transportation

●When the vehicle is raised on a lift with

the hybrid system on and the tires are

allowed to rotate freely

●When inspecting the vehicle using a

drum tester such as a chassis dyna-

mometer or speedometer tester, or

when using an on vehicle wheel bal-

ancer

●When a strong impact has been

applied to the front bumper, rear

bumper or front grille, due to an acci-

dent or other situation

●If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-

ble manner, such as when the vehicle

has been in an accident or is malfunc-

tioning

●When the vehicle is driven in a sporty

manner or off-road

●When the tires are not properly

inflated

●When the tires are very worn

●When tires of a size other than speci-

fied are installed

●When tire chains are installed

●When a compact spare tire or an

emergency tire puncture repair kit is

used

●If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may

obstruct a sensor is temporarily

installed to the vehicle

Changing settings of the pre-col-

lision system

213

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Changing the pre-collision warn-

ing timing

The pre-collision warning timing can

be changed on (→P.86) of the

multi-information display. The warning

timing for the pedestrian and FCTA

(Front Cross Traffic Alert) system will

also be changed.

The operation timing setting is retained

when the power switch is turned off.

1Far

The warning will begin to operate earlier

than with the default timing.

2Middle

This is the default setting.

3Near

The warning will begin to operate later

than with the default timing.

■Changing the pedestrian alert tim-

ing

If the pre-collision warning timing is

changed, the pedestrian alert and

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) timing

will also be changed accordingly.

■Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the

system determines that the possibility of a

frontal collision with a vehicle, pedes-

trian/bicyclist, guardrail, etc. or a front side

collision with a vehicle is high. Each function

is operational at the following speeds:

●Pedestrian alert:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately

20 and 40 mph (30 and 65 km/h)

●Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately

3 and 110 mph (5 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehi-

cle speed is between approximately 3

and 50 mph [5 and 80 km/h] and for

detecting a vehicle approaching from the

front left or right side, vehicle speed is

between approximately 7 and 37 mph

[10 and 60 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle

and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or

vehicle ahead is approximately 3 mph (5

km/h) or more. (For detecting a vehicle

approaching from the front left or right

side, the speed of the approaching vehi-

cle is between approximately 10 and 37

mph [15 and 60 km/h].)

●Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately

20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehi-

cle speed is between approximately 20

and 50 mph [30 and 80 km/h] and for

detecting a vehicle approaching from the

front left or right side, vehicle speed is

between approximately 19 and 37 mph

[30 and 60 km/h].)

214 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• The relative speed between your vehicle

and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or

vehicle ahead is approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h) or more. (For detecting a vehi-

cle approaching from the front left or

right side, the speed of the approaching

vehicle is between approximately 10 and

37 mph [15 and 60 km/h].)

●Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately

3 and 110 mph (5 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehi-

cle speed is between approximately 3

and 50 mph [5 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle

and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or

vehicle ahead is approximately 3 mph (5

km/h) or more.

●Active steering assist

• Vehicle speed is between approximately

25 and 50 mph (40 and 80 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is

between approximately 25 and 40 mph

[40 and 65 km/h] and for detecting a

guardrail, vehicle speed is between

approximately 37 and 50 mph [60 and

80 km/h].)

The system may not operate in the following

situations:

●If a 12-volt battery terminal has been dis-

connected and reconnected and then the

vehicle has not been driven for a certain

amount of time

●If the shift position is in R

●If VSC is disabled (only the pedestrian

alert and pre-collision warning function

will be operational)

●When there is insufficient safe or unob-

structed space for the vehicle to be

steered into

●When an object is approaching the area

the vehicle is to be steered into

■Pedestrian and bicyclist detection func-

tion

The pre-collision system detects pedestri-

ans and bicyclists based on the size, profile,

and motion of the person. However, a

pedestrian or bicyclist may not be detected

depending on the surrounding brightness

and the motion, posture, and angle of the

person, preventing the system from operat-

ing properly. (→P.216)

■Cancelation of pre-collision braking

and active steering assist

If either of the following occur while the

pre-collision braking function is operating, it

will be canceled:

●The accelerator pedal is depressed

strongly.

●The steering wheel is turned sharply or

abruptly.

■Conditions under which the system may

operate even if there is no possibility of a

collision

●In some situations such as the following,

the system may determine that there is a

possibility of a frontal collision and oper-

ate.

• When passing a vehicle, pedestrian or

bicyclist

• When changing lanes while overtaking a

preceding vehicle

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle

that is changing lanes

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle

that is making a left/right turn

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming

lane that is stopped to make a right/left

turn

215

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

• When driving on a road where relative

location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent

lane may change, such as on a winding

road

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead

• When the road surface is uneven or

undulating

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered

• When approaching objects on the road-

side, such as guardrails, traffic signs, util-

ity poles, street lights, trees, walls, etc.

• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, bicy-

clist, or object by the roadside at the

entrance of a curve

• When driving on a narrow path sur-

rounded by a structure, such as in a tun-

nel or on an iron bridge

• When there is a metal object (manhole

cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, dips, or a

protrusion on the road surface or road-

side

• When a crossing pedestrian or bicyclist

approaches very close to the vehicle

• When passing through a place with a low

structure above the road such as a low

ceiling, underpass, bridge girder, traffic

sign, etc.

• When passing under an object (billboard,

etc.) at the top of an uphill road

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll

gate barrier, parking area barrier, or

other barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When driving through or under objects

that may contact the vehicle, such as thick

grass, tree branches, or a banner

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,

dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

216 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• When there are patterns or paint on the

road, a wall, or billboard that may be mis-

taken for a vehicle, pedestrian, or bicy-

clist

• When driving near an object that reflects

radio waves, such as a large truck or

guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower, broad-

casting station, electric power plant, or

other location where strong radio waves

or electrical noise may be present

• When passing an oncoming vehicle on a

narrow road

• When driving close to objects such as

walls or poles on a median

• When passing an oncoming vehicle

around a sharp curve

• When passing a vehicle which is making

a left/right turn

• When being passed by a vehicle

approaching from the left or right side in

front of your vehicle

• When making a left/right turn while a

vehicle is approaching from the left or

right side in front of your vehicle

• When passing an object on the side of the

road, such as a parked vehicle

• When passing an oncoming vehicle on a

S curve

• When there is an object that may be mis-

taken for a pedestrian, such as a utility

pole, tree, or pole on the roadside or at

the entrance of a curve

• When there is a bicycle or motorcycle on

the roadside at the entrance of a curve

• If the preceding vehicle is a bicycle or

motorcycle

●The system may operate the pedestrian

alert unnecessarily if it detects the follow-

ing:

• Pedestrians on a sidewalk

• Bicycles and motorcycles

• Patterns or paint on the road, a wall,

median, billboard, etc. that may be mis-

taken for a pedestrian or bicyclist

■Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

●In some situations, such as the following,

a vehicle or other object may not be

detected by the sensors, preventing the

system from operating properly:

• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching

your vehicle

• When approaching the side or front of a

vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear

end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,

such as a low bed trailer

217

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which

protrudes past its rear bumper

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high

ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,

such as a tractor or side car

• If the sun or other light is shining directly

on a vehicle or guardrail ahead

• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or

emerges from beside a vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt

maneuver (such as sudden swerving,

acceleration or deceleration)

• When suddenly cutting behind a preced-

ing vehicle

• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in

front of your vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such

as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,

dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When driving in a place where the sur-

rounding brightness changes suddenly,

such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• When a very bright light, such as the sun

or the headlights of oncoming traffic,

shines directly into the camera sensor

• When driving in a location where there

are many objects which reflect radar,

such as a tunnel or parking garage

• When driving at night or in a tunnel with

the headlights off

• When the surrounding area is dim, such

as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in

a tunnel

• After the hybrid system has started the

vehicle has not been driven for a certain

amount of time

• While making a left/right turn and for a

few seconds after making a left/right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few

seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera

sensor

• The vehicle is wobbling.

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely

high speeds.

• When driving on a hill

• If a sensor is misaligned

• If the headlights are misaligned

• When approaching a guardrail at a wide

or narrow angle

• When a vehicle approaches your vehicle

from the front left or right side while your

vehicle is entering an intersection with

poor visibility

• When a vehicle approaches your vehicle

from the rear left or right side

• When a vehicle approaches the side of

your vehicle at a shallow angle

• When driving on a road with a grade that

changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)

●In some situations, such as the following,

the sensors may not detect the lane lines

or a safe space the vehicle can be steered

218 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

into, preventing the active steering assist

from operating properly:

• When the white (yellow) lane lines are

difficult to see, such as when they are

faint, diverging/merging, or a shadow is

cast upon them

• When the lane is more wide or narrow

than normal

• When there is a light and dark pattern on

the road surface , such as due to road

repairs

• If the system determines that a collision

can be avoided by only using the brakes

• When a pedestrian is detected near the

centerline of the vehicle

●In some situations such as the following,

sufficient braking force or steering force

may not be obtained, preventing the sys-

tem from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to

their full extent, such as when the brake

parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,

or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained

(brakes or tires are excessively worn,

improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a

gravel road or other slippery surface

• If there are deep ruts in the road

• When driving on a slope

• When driving on a horizontally slanted

road

●Some pedestrians and bicyclists, such as

the following, may not be detected by the

sensors, preventing the system from

operating properly:

• Pedestrians and bicyclists shorter than

approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than

approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)

• Bicyclists riding on unusual bicycles

(bicycles for small children, tricycles,

folding bicycles, BMX bicycles, tandem

bicycles, etc.)

• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are wear-

ing white and look extremely bright

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are not

illuminated by the headlights at night, in a

tunnel, etc.

• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to

be nearly the same color or brightness as

their surroundings

• Pedestrians and bicyclists near walls,

fences, guardrails, or large objects

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are on a

metal object (manhole cover, steel plate,

etc.) on the road

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are mov-

ing fast

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which change

speed or direction abruptly

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which suddenly

emerge from behind a vehicle or large

object

• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are

extremely close to the side of the vehicle

(outside rear view mirror, etc.)

• Pedestrians and bicyclists wearing over-

sized clothing, such as a rain coat, long

skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are carry-

ing large baggage, holding an umbrella,

etc., hiding part of their body

• Pedestrians and bicyclists behind an

object that hides part of their body

• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are bend-

ing forward or squatting

• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller,

wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle

• Groups of pedestrians/bicyclists which

are close together

●Some guardrails, such as the following,

may not be detected by the sensors, pre-

venting the system from operating prop-

erly:

• Guardrails which are less than approxi-

mately 1.9 ft. (60 cm) tall

• Short guardrails

• Irregularly-shaped guardrails (wire cable

guardrails, guardrails made of thin poles,

etc.)

• Guardrails which are not illuminated by

the headlights at night, in a tunnel, etc.

• Guardrails which appear to be nearly the

same color or brightness as their sur-

roundings

• Guardrails which appear to be nearly the

same shape as their surroundings (walls,

etc.)

• Guardrails which are over a metal object

(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)

• Guardrails which are hidden behind thick

grass

• Guardrails which are extremely close to

the side of the vehicle (outside rear view

mirror, etc.)

• Curved guardrails or guardrails at the

entrance of a curve

219

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

●In some situations such as the following,

the system may detect a pedestrian and

display a warning on the head-up display,

even though no pedestrian exists:

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered, such as when the road surface is

uneven or undulating (due to ruts, etc.)

• When driving on a slope

• When driving on a horizontally slanted

road

• If the driver’s posture (driver seat posi-

tion) is extreme, such as excessively

reclined

• If the head-up display position is set

extremely high

■If the PCS warning light flashes or illumi-

nates and a warning message is dis-

played on the multi-information display

The pre-collision system may be temporar-

ily unavailable or there may be a malfunc-

tion in the system.

●In the following situations, the warning

light will turn off, the message will disap-

pear and the system will become opera-

tional when normal operating conditions

return:

• When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is hot, such as in the sun

• When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is cold, such as in an extremely cold

environment

• When a sensor is dirty or covered with

snow, etc.

• When the part of the windshield in front

of the camera sensor is fogged up or cov-

ered with condensation or ice (Defog-

ging the windshield: →P.324)

• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such

as when the hood is open or a sticker is

attached to the windshield near the cam-

era sensor

●If the PCS warning light continues to flash

or remains illuminated or the warning

message does not disappear even

though the vehicle has returned to nor-

mal, the system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer immediately.

■If VSC is disabled

●If VSC is disabled (→P.302), the

pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli-

sion braking functions are also disabled.

●The PCS warning light will turn on and

“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake

System Unavailable” will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

220 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high, a

buzzer will sound and a warning mes-

sage will be displayed on the

multi-information display to urge the

driver to take evasive action.

■Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the system applies greater braking

force in relation to how strongly the

brake pedal is depressed.

■Pre-collision braking

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the system warns the driver. If the sys-

tem determines that the possibility of a

frontal collision is extremely high, the

brakes are automatically applied to

help avoid the collision or reduce the

collision speed.

■Pre-collision seatbacks (front pas-

senger’s seat / power rear seat [if

equipped])

If the system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision is high, it may

move the seatbacks of the front pas-

senger’s seat and power rear seats to

the upright position automatically, if

reclined.

If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be

moved by the pre-collision seat function.

■Suspension control

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high,

PCS (Pre-Collision System)

(vehicles with Lexus Safety

System+)

The pre-collision system uses a

radar sensor and camera sensor to

detect vehicles and pedestrians in

front of your vehicle. When the sys-

tem determines that the possibility

of a frontal collision with a vehicle

or pedestrian is high, a warning

operates to urge the driver to take

evasive action and the potential

brake pressure is increased to help

the driver avoid the collision. If the

system determines that the possi-

bility of a frontal collision with a

vehicle or pedestrian is extremely

high, the brakes are automatically

applied to help avoid the collision or

help reduce the impact of the colli-

sion.

The pre-collision system can be dis-

abled/enabled and the warning tim-

ing can be changed. (→P.222)

System functions

221

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

the Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-

tem (→P.303) will control the damp-

ing force of the shock absorbers to

help maintain an appropriate vehicle

posture.

■Steering control

When the system determines that the

possibility of a frontal collision is high

and the driver is operating the steering

wheel, the LDH system (→P.303) will

control the turning angle of the front

and rear wheels and effort necessary

to turn the steering wheel to help

enhance steering responsiveness.

WARNING

■Limitations of the pre-collision system

●The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking

care to observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system

instead of normal braking operations

under any circumstances. This system

will not prevent collisions or lessen col-

lision damage or injury in every situa-

tion. Do not overly rely on this system.

Failure to do so may lead to an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Although this system is designed to

help avoid a collision or help reduce

the impact of the collision, its effective-

ness may change according to various

conditions, therefore the system may

not always be able to achieve the same

level of performance.

Read the following conditions care-

fully. Do not overly rely on this system

and always drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system

may operate even if there is no possi-

bility of a collision: →P.223

• Conditions under which the system

may not operate properly: →P.225

●Do not attempt to test the operation of

the pre-collision system yourself, as the

system may not operate properly, pos-

sibly leading to an accident.

■Pre-collision braking

●When the pre-collision braking func-

tion is operating, a large amount of

braking force will be applied.

●If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-

tion of the pre-collision braking func-

tion, the pre-collision braking function

operation will be canceled after

approximately 2 seconds. Depress the

brake pedal as necessary.

●The pre-collision braking function may

not operate if certain operations are

performed by the driver. If the acceler-

ator pedal is being depressed strongly

or the steering wheel is being turned,

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and pos-

sibly prevent the pre-collision braking

function from operating.

●In some situations, while the pre-colli-

sion braking function is operating,

operation of the function may be can-

celed if the accelerator pedal is

depressed strongly or the steering

wheel is turned and the system deter-

mines that the driver is taking evasive

action.

●If the brake pedal is being depressed,

the system may determine that the

driver is taking evasive action and pos-

sibly delay the operation timing of the

pre-collision braking function.

■When to disable the pre-collision sys-

tem

In the following situations, disable the

system, as it may not operate properly,

possibly leading to an accident resulting

in death or serious injury:

●When the vehicle is being towed

●When your vehicle is towing another

vehicle

222 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-

sion system

The pre-collision system can be

enabled/disabled on (→P.86) of

the multi-information display.

The system is automatically enabled each

time the power switch is turned to ON

mode

If the system is disabled, the PCS warn-

ing light will turn on and a message will

be displayed on the multi-information

display.

■Changing the pre-collision warn-

ing timing

The pre-collision warning timing can

be changed on (→P.86) of the

multi-information display.

The operation timing setting is retained

when the power switch is turned off.

1Far

The warning will begin to operate earlier

than with the default timing.

2Middle

WARNING

●When transporting the vehicle via

truck, boat, train or similar means of

transportation

●When the vehicle is raised on a lift with

the hybrid system on and the tires are

allowed to rotate freely

●When inspecting the vehicle using a

drum tester such as a chassis dyna-

mometer or speedometer tester, or

when using an on vehicle wheel bal-

ancer

●When a strong impact is applied to the

front bumper or front grille, due to an

accident or other reasons

●If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-

ble manner, such as when the vehicle

has been in an accident or is malfunc-

tioning

●When the vehicle is driven in a sporty

manner or off-road

●When the tires are not properly

inflated

●When the tires are very worn

●When tires of a size other than speci-

fied are installed

●When tire chains are installed

●When a compact spare tire or an

emergency tire puncture repair kit is

used

●If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may

obstruct the radar sensor or camera

sensor is temporarily installed to the

vehicle

Changing settings of the pre-col-

lision system

223

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

This is the default setting.

3Near

The warning will begin to operate later

than with the default timing.

■Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the

system determines that the possibility of a

frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian

is high.

Each function is operational at the following

speeds:

●Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately

7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is

between approximately 7 and 50 mph

[10 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is

approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

●Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately

20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is

between approximately 20 and 50 mph

[30 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or

more.

●Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately

7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is

between approximately 7 and 50 mph

[10 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is

approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

The system may not operate in the following

situations:

●If a 12-volt battery terminal has been dis-

connected and reconnected and then the

vehicle has not been driven for a certain

amount of time

●If the shift position is in R

●If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision

warning function will be operational)

■Pedestrian detection function

The pre-collision system detects pedestri-

ans based on the size, profile, and motion of

a detected object. However, a pedestrian

may not be detected depending on the sur-

rounding brightness and the motion, pos-

ture, and angle of the detected object,

preventing the system from operating prop-

erly. (→P.225)

■Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

If either of the following occur while the

pre-collision braking function is operating, it

will be canceled:

●The accelerator pedal is depressed

strongly.

●The steering wheel is turned sharply or

abruptly.

■Conditions under which the system may

operate even if there is no possibility of a

collision

●In some situations such as the following,

the system may determine that there is a

possibility of a frontal collision and oper-

ate.

• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian

• When changing lanes while overtaking a

preceding vehicle

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle

that is changing lanes

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle

that is making a left/right turn

224 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming

lane that is stopped to make a right/left

turn

• When driving on a road where relative

location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent

lane may change, such as on a winding

road

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered, such as when the road surface is

uneven or undulating

• When approaching objects on the road-

side, such as guardrails, utility poles,

trees, or walls

• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or

object by the roadside at the entrance of

a curve

• When driving on a narrow path sur-

rounded by a structure, such as in a tun-

nel or on an iron bridge

• When there is a metal object (manhole

cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protru-

sion on the road surface or roadside

• When a crossing pedestrian approaches

very close to the vehicle

• When passing through a place with a low

structure above the road (low ceiling,

traffic sign, etc.)

• When passing under an object (billboard,

etc.) at the top of an uphill road

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll

gate barrier, parking area barrier, or

other barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When driving through or under objects

that may contact the vehicle, such as thick

grass, tree branches, or a banner

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,

dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When there are patterns or paint on the

225

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

road or a wall that may be mistaken for a

vehicle or pedestrian

• When driving near an object that reflects

radio waves, such as a large truck or

guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower, broad-

casting station, electric power plant, or

other location where strong radio waves

or electrical noise may be present

■Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

●In some situations such as the following, a

vehicle may not be detected by the radar

sensor and camera sensor, preventing

the system from operating properly:

• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching

your vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicy-

cle

• When approaching the side or front of a

vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear

end, such as an unloaded truck

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,

such as a low bed trailer

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which

protrudes past its rear bumper

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high

ground clearance

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,

such as a tractor or side car

• If the sun or other light is shining directly

on a vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or

emerges from beside a vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt

maneuver (such as sudden swerving,

acceleration or deceleration)

• When suddenly cutting behind a preced-

ing vehicle

• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in

front of your vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such

as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow,

dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When driving in a place where the sur-

rounding brightness changes suddenly,

such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• When a very bright light, such as the sun

or the headlights of oncoming traffic,

shines directly into the camera sensor

• When the surrounding area is dim, such

as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in

a tunnel

• After the hybrid system has started the

vehicle has not been driven for a certain

amount of time

• While making a left/right turn and for a

few seconds after making a left/right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few

seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera

sensor

226 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

• The vehicle is wobbling.

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely

high speeds.

• When driving on a hill

• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is

misaligned

●In some situations such as the following,

sufficient braking force may not be

obtained, preventing the system from

performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to

their full extent, such as when the brake

parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,

or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained

(brakes or tires are excessively worn,

improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a

gravel road or other slippery surface

●Some pedestrians such as the following

may not be detected by the radar sensor

and camera sensor, preventing the sys-

tem from operating properly:

• Pedestrians shorter than approximately

3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately

6.5 ft. (2 m)

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing

(a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their

silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians who are carrying large bag-

gage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding

part of their body

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or

squatting

• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller,

wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle

• Groups of pedestrians which are close

together

• Pedestrians who are wearing white and

look extremely bright

• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night

or while in a tunnel

• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to

be nearly the same color or brightness as

their surroundings

• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails,

or large objects

• Pedestrians who are on a metal object

(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the

road

• Pedestrians who are walking fast

• Pedestrians who are changing speed

abruptly

• Pedestrians running out from behind a

vehicle or a large object

• Pedestrians who are extremely close to

the side of the vehicle (outside rear view

mirror, etc.)

■If the PCS warning light flashes or illumi-

nates and a warning message is dis-

played on the multi-information display

The pre-collision system may be temporar-

ily unavailable or there may be a malfunc-

tion in the system.

●In the following situations, the warning

light will turn off, the message will disap-

pear and the system will become opera-

tional when normal operating conditions

return:

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor

or the area around either sensor is hot,

such as in the sun

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor

or the area around either sensor is cold,

such as in an extremely cold environment

• When a front sensor is dirty or covered

with snow, etc.

• When the part of the windshield in front

of the camera sensor is fogged up or cov-

ered with condensation or ice (Defog-

ging the windshield: →P.324)

• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such

as when the hood is open or a sticker is

attached to the windshield near the cam-

era sensor

●If the PCS warning light continues to flash

or remains illuminated or the warning

message does not disappear even

though the vehicle has returned to nor-

mal, the system may be malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer immediately.

■If VSC is disabled

●If VSC is disabled (→P.302), the

pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli-

sion braking functions are also disabled.

●The PCS warning light will turn on and

“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake

System Unavailable” will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

227

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

*:If equipped

When the system detects a vehicle

approaching from the left or right in

front of your vehicle when approaching

an intersection, a notification will be

displayed on the head-up display and

panoramic view monitor*.

*: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-

MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-

UAL”.

When the system determines that your

vehicle may be about to enter an inter-

section even though a vehicle is

approaching from the left or right in

front of your vehicle, a buzzer will

sound and a message will be displayed

on the multi-information display to

urge you to depress the brake pedal.

-Head-up display

-Multi-information display

■The FCTA function is operational when

The system operates when all of the follow-

ing conditions are met.

FCTA (Front Cross Traffic

Alert)*

When approaching an intersection

at low speed, the radar sensors on

the front side of the vehicle can

detect approaching vehicles to the

left and right of the front of the vehi-

cle. In this case, the head-up display

is used to inform the driver of

detected vehicles.

FCTA system functions

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the

function

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking care

to observe your surroundings.

The FCTA system is a supplementary

system that informs the driver of vehicles

approaching from the left and right of the

front of the vehicle.

Do not overly rely on the FCTA system.

Over reliance on the system may lead to

an accident, resulting in death or serious

injury.

The details of the warning display may

differ from the actual traffic conditions.

Although the warning display will stop

being displayed after a certain amount of

time, this does not indicate that vehicles

or pedestrians are no longer around your

vehicle.

228 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●Setting for “PCS” and “CAUTION” in

(→P.86) of the multi-information

display.

●A shift position other than P or R is

selected.

●Your vehicle is approaching an intersec-

tion at approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or

lower.

●A vehicle is approaching from the left or

right in front of your vehicle at a speed

between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

and 37 mph (60 km/h).

●There are no preceding vehicles ahead of

your vehicle.

●The accelerator pedal is not strongly

depressed.

●The brake pedal is not being strongly

depressed.

■Situations in which the system may

operate even though no vehicles are

approaching

In certain situations, such as the following,

the system may operate even though no

vehicles are approaching:

●When approaching objects on the road-

side, such as guardrails, traffic signs, util-

ity poles, street lights, trees, or walls

●When driving near a TV tower, broad-

casting station, electric power plant, or

other location where strong radio waves

or electrical noise may be present

●When passing an object on the side of the

road, such as a parked vehicle

●When a vehicle or pedestrian is

approaching from the left or right in front

of your vehicle from far away

●When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving

within a parking spot, etc. next to the lane

your vehicle is driving in

●When a pedestrian or bicyclist is moving

on a sidewalk

●When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving

away from your vehicle

●When a vehicle approaching from the left

or right in front of your vehicle is deceler-

ating or stops

●When a vehicle approaching from the left

or right in front of your vehicle makes a

left/right turn immediately in front of your

vehicle

●When a pedestrian is approaching your

vehicle

●When an oncoming vehicle makes a

left/right turn

●When your vehicle enters an intersection

before a vehicle approaching from the

left or right in front of your vehicle

●When stopped at traffic light and a vehi-

cle approaches from the left or right in

front of your vehicle

●When driving in a location where there

are objects which reflect radar, such as

vehicles, guardrails, walls, traffic signs,

etc.

●When making a left/right turn in front of

an approaching vehicle

●When passing an oncoming vehicle

●When being overtaken by another vehi-

cle

●When driving next to another vehicle or a

pedestrian

●When a vehicle or pedestrian

approaches the side of your vehicle

Some objects, such as the following, may be

detected and cause the FCTA system to

operate:

●Pedestrians

■Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

In some situations, such as the following, a

vehicle may not be detected by a front side

radar sensor, preventing the system from

operating properly:

●If the front end or side of an approaching

vehicle is small (sports cars, etc.)

229

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

●If the front end of an approaching vehicle

is low (low-slung sports cars, etc.)

●If the ground clearance of an approach-

ing vehicle is extremely high

●If the shape of an approaching vehicle is

unusual (tractors, motorcycles with side-

cars, etc.)

●If a vehicle suddenly enters the detection

area on the left or right in front of your

vehicle from a parking lot, etc.

●If an approaching vehicle moves sud-

denly (sudden steering, acceleration,

deceleration, etc.)

●When driving in inclement weather such

as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

●After the hybrid system has been started

and the vehicle has not been driven for a

certain amount of time

●When driving on a road with a grade that

changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)

●When driving around a sharp curve or on

an undulating road

●If a vehicle is approaching from the left or

right of the front of your vehicle diago-

nally

●When a vehicle is approaching from the

left or right in front of your vehicle from

far away

●When there is an object between your

vehicle and an approaching vehicle

●When driving in a location where there

are objects which reflect radar, such as

guardrails, walls, vehicles, etc.

●When a group of vehicles which are close

together approach

●Immediately after the FCTA system has

been enabled

■When the PCS warning light is flashing

and a message is displayed on the

multi-information display

The system may be temporarily unavailable

or may be malfunctioning.

230 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*:If equipped

■Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the

vehicle might depart from its lane or

course*, a warning is displayed on the

multi-information display, and either a

warning buzzer will sound or the steer-

ing wheel will vibrate to alert the driver.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side

of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

When the warning buzzer sounds or

the steering wheel vibrates, check the

area around your vehicle and carefully

operate the steering wheel to move the

vehicle back to the center of the lane.

When the system determines that the

vehicle might depart from its lane and

that the possibility of a collision with an

LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)*

When driving on highways and

freeways with white or yellow lines,

this function alerts the driver when

the vehicle might depart from its

lane and provides assistance by

operating the steering wheel to

keep the vehicle in its lane. Further-

more, the system also provides

steering assistance when dynamic

radar cruise control with full-speed

range is operating to keep the vehi-

cle in its lane.

The LTA system recognizes white or

yellow lane lines using a camera

sensor. Additionally, it detects pre-

ceding and surrounding vehicles

using the camera sensor and front

radar sensor.

WARNING

■Before using LTA system

Do not rely solely upon the LTA system.

The LTA system does not automatically

drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of

attention that must be paid to the area in

front of the vehicle. The driver must

always assume full responsibility for driv-

ing safely by paying careful attention to

the surrounding conditions and operat-

ing the steering wheel to correct the path

of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take

adequate breaks when fatigued, such as

from driving for a long period of time.

Failure to perform appropriate driving

operations and pay careful attention may

lead to an accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

■To avoid operating LTA system by mis-

take

When not using the LTA system, use the

LTA switch to turn the system off.

Functions included in LTA system

231

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane

is high, the lane departure alert will

operate even if the turn signals are

operating.

■Steering assist function

When the system determines that the

vehicle might depart from its lane or

course*, the system provides assis-

tance as necessary by operating the

steering wheel in small amounts for a

short period of time to keep the vehicle

in its lane.

*: Boundary between asphalt and the side

of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb

If the system detects that the steering

wheel has not been operated for a cer-

tain amount of time or the steering

wheel is not being firmly gripped, the

steering assist function may be can-

celed temporarily, a warning message

may be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display and a warning buzzer may

sound. If the steering assist function is

canceled, release the steering wheel

and then grip it again to enable the

function.

When the system determines that the

vehicle might depart from its lane and

that the possibility of a collision with an

overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane

is high, the steering assist function will

operate even if the turn signals are

operating.

■Vehicle sway warning function

When the vehicle is swaying within a

lane, the warning buzzer will sound and

a message will be displayed on the

multi-information display to alert the

driver.

232 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Lane centering function

This function is linked with radar cruise

control and provides the required

assistance by operating the steering

wheel to keep the vehicle in its current

lane.

When radar cruise control is not oper-

ating, the lane centering function does

not operate.

In situations where the white (yellow)

lane lines are difficult to see or are not

visible, such as when in a traffic jam,

this function will operate to help follow

a preceding vehicle by monitoring the

position of the preceding vehicle.

If the system detects that the steering

wheel has not been operated for a

fixed amount of time or the steering

wheel is not being firmly gripped, a

warning is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display and the warning buzzer

sounds. Make sure to grip the steering

wheel firmly.

WARNING

■Situations unsuitable for LTA system

Do not use the LTA system in the follow-

ing situations, as doing so may lead to an

accident, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (→P.234) and the preced-

ing vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehi-

cle may follow the preceding vehicle

and also change lanes.)

●When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (→P.234) and the preced-

ing vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle

may sway accordingly and depart from

the lane.)

233

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

WARNING

●When the follow-up cruising display is

displayed (→P.234) and the preced-

ing vehicle is being driven extremely

close to the left/right lane line. (Your

vehicle may follow the preceding vehi-

cle and depart from the lane.)

●Vehicle is driven where the road

diverges, merges, etc.

●Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow)

line marks, etc. are present due to road

repair.

●Objects or patterns that could be mis-

taken for white (yellow) lines are pres-

ent on the side of the road (guardrails,

curbs, reflective poles, etc.).

●Vehicle is being driven around a sharp

curve.

●Vehicle is driven on a road surface

which is slippery due to rainy weather,

fallen snow, freezing, etc.

●Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered

road.

●White (yellow) lines are difficult to see

due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

●Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or

restricted lane due to construction

work.

●Vehicle is driven in a construction

zone.

●A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are

equipped.

●When the tires have been excessively

worn, or when the tire inflation pres-

sure is low.

●Tires which differ by structure, manu-

facturer, brand or tread pattern are

used.

●Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other

than on highways and freeways.

■Preventing LTA system malfunctions

and operations performed by mistake

●Do not modify the headlights or place

stickers, etc. on the surface of the

lights.

234 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA

system on.

The LTA indicator illuminates and a

message is displayed on the

multi-information display.

Press the LTA switch again to turn the

LTA system off.

When the LTA system is turned on or

off, operation of the LTA system contin-

ues in the same condition the next time

the hybrid system is started.

LTA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator

informs the driver of the system operation

status.

Illuminated in white:

LTA system is operating.

Illuminated in green:

Steering wheel assistance of the steering

assist function or lane centering function is

operating.

Flashing in orange:

Lane departure alert function is operating.

Operation display of steering

wheel operation support

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of

the steering assist function or lane center-

ing function is operating.

Displayed on the outer side of both lane

displays:

Indicates that steering wheel assist of the

lane centering function is operating.

Displayed on the outer side of a lane dis-

play:

Indicates that steering wheel assist of the

steering assist function is operating.

Display flashing on the outer side of both

lane displays:

Alerts the driver that their input is neces-

sary to stay in the center of the lane (lane

WARNING

●Do not modify the suspension etc. If

the suspension etc. needs to be

replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not install or place anything on the

hood or grille. Also, do not install a

grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar,

etc.).

●If your windshield needs repairs, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

Turning LTA system on

Indications on multi-information

display

235

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

centering function).

Lane departure alert function dis-

play

Displayed when the multi-information dis-

play is switched to the driving assist system

information screen.

Inside of displayed white lines is

white

Indicates that the system is recognizing

white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle

departs from its lane, the white line dis-

played on the side the vehicle departs from

flashes orange.

Inside of displayed white lines is

black

Indicates that the system is not able to rec-

ognize white (yellow) lines or is temporar-

ily canceled.

Follow-up cruising display

Indicates that steering assist of the lane

centering function is operating by monitor-

ing the position of a preceding vehicle.

When the follow-up cruising display is dis-

played, if the preceding vehicle changes

lanes, your vehicle may change lanes as

well. Always pay careful attention to your

surroundings and operate the steering

wheel as necessary to correct the path of

the vehicle and ensure safety.

■Warning display

When the lane centering function is oper-

ating and the system determines that the

vehicle may depart from its lane due to a

sharp curve, etc., a warning display urging

the driver to operate the steering wheel,

will be displayed.

In some situations a warning display may

not be displayed.

Some displays, which are the same as

those displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display, will be displayed.

■LTA system curve display on the

head-up display

Indications on head-up display

236 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The curve display on the head-up display

changes according to the direction and

curvature of the curve.

■Operation conditions of each function

●Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph

(50 km/h) or more.

•System recognizes white (yellow) lane

lines. (When a white [yellow] line is rec-

ognized on only one side, the system will

operate only for the recognized side.)

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8

ft. (3 m) or more.

• Turn signal lever is not operated. (Except

when a vehicle is in the lane on the side

the turn signal was operated)

• Vehicle is not being driven around a

sharp curve.

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(→P.238)

●Steering assist function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met in addition to the

operation conditions for the lane depar-

ture alert function.

•Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the

multi-information display is set to “On”.

(→P.86)

• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated

by a fixed amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a

steering force level suitable for changing

lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not oper-

ating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel alert is not dis-

played. (→P.237)

●Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the

multi-information display is set to “On”.

(→P.86)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph

(50 km/h) or more.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8

ft. (3 m) or more.

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(→P.238)

●Lane centering function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• LTA is turned on.

• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane

Center” in of the multi-information

display are set to “On”. (→P.86)

• This function recognizes white (yellow)

lane lines or the position of a preceding

vehicle (except when the preceding vehi-

cle is small, such as a motorcycle).

• The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range is operating in vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 10

to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is not being driven around a

sharp curve.

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(→P.238)

• Vehicle does not accelerate or deceler-

ate by a fixed amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a

steering force level suitable for changing

lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not oper-

ating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel alert is not dis-

played. (→P.237)

• The driver has one or both hands on the

steering wheel.

• The vehicle is being driven in the center

of a lane.

• Steering assist function is not operating.

■Temporary cancellation of functions

When operation conditions are no longer

met, a function may be temporarily can-

celed. However, when the operation condi-

tions are met again, operation of the

function is automatically restored.

(→P.236)

If the operating conditions are no longer

met while the lane centering function is

237

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

operating, a buzzer may sound to indicate

that the function has been temporarily can-

celed . If the alert type customization setting

is set to vibrate the steering wheel, the

buzzer will not sound. (The steering wheel

will vibrate.)

If a message urging operation of the steer-

ing wheel is displayed, operate the steering

wheel.

■Steering assist function/lane centering

function

Depending on the vehicle speed, lane

departure situation, road conditions, etc.,

the driver may not feel the function is oper-

ating or the function may not operate at all.

The steering control of the function is over-

rided by the driver’s steering wheel opera-

tion.

When the vehicle speed is approximately

31 mph (50 km/h) or less, the warning dis-

play of the lane centering function will not

operate.

Do not attempt to activate the steering

assist function.

■Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear

due to external noise, audio playback, etc.

Also, it may be difficult to feel steering

wheel vibrations due to the road conditions,

etc.

If the edge of the road is not clear or

straight, the lane departure alert function or

steering assist function may not operate.

In situations such as the following, it may not

be possible for the system to determine if

there is danger of a collision with an over-

taking vehicle in an adjacent lane:

●When the relative speed between your

vehicle and surrounding vehicles is large

●When driving around a curve

Do not attempt to activate the lane depar-

ture alert function.

■Hands off steering wheel alert

When the system determines that the driver

has removed the hands from the steering

wheel while the steering assist function or

lane centering function is operating, a warn-

ing message is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display. If the driver continues to

keep the hands off of the steering wheel for

6 seconds, a buzzer sounds, a warning

message is displayed and the function is

temporarily canceled. This alert also oper-

ates in the same way when the driver con-

tinuously operates the steering wheel only a

small amount. If the steering assist function

is canceled, release the steering wheel and

then grip it again to enable the function.

In situations such as the following, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect when the

driver’s hands are on the steering wheel:

●If a steering wheel cover is installed.

●If the driver is wearing gloves.

●If something is attached to the steering

wheel.

●If the driver is gripping the wood trim,

stitched area, spokes, or other part of the

steering wheel that does not have sen-

sors.

In situations such as the following, the hands

off steering wheel alert may not operate

and the steering assist function and lane

centering function may operate even if the

driver’s hands are off the steering wheel:

●If an object contacts the steering wheel.

●If a wide object or arms are held in front

of the steering wheel.

■Conditions in which functions may not

operate properly

In the following situations, the functions may

not operate properly:

●There are shadows on the road that run

parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow)

lines.

●The vehicle is driven in an area without

white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a

tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersec-

tion, etc.

●The white (yellow) lines are cracked,

“Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker”

or stones are present.

●The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen

or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a road surface

that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

238 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●The traffic lines are yellow (which may be

more difficult to recognize than lines that

are white).

●The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb,

etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a bright surface,

such as concrete.

●If the edge of the road is not clear or

straight.

●The vehicle is driven on a surface that is

bright due to reflected light, etc.

●The vehicle is driven in an area where the

brightness changes suddenly, such as at

the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

●Light from the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.

●The vehicle is driven on a slope.

●The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts

left or right, or a winding road.

●The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or

rough road.

●The vehicle is driven around a sharp

curve.

●The traffic lane is excessively narrow or

wide.

●The vehicle is extremely tilted due to car-

rying heavy luggage or having improper

tire pressure.

●The distance to the preceding vehicle is

extremely short.

●The preceding vehicle changes lanes.

(Your vehicle may follow the preceding

vehicle and also change lanes.)

●The preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your

vehicle may sway accordingly and depart

from the lane.)

●The vehicle is moving up and down a

large amount due to road conditions

during driving (poor roads or road

seams).

●When driving in a tunnel or at night with

the headlights off or when a headlight is

dim due to its lens being dirty or it being

misaligned.

●The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.

●The vehicle has just changed lanes

through operation of the steering wheel

by the driver or crossed an intersection.

●Snow tires, etc. are equipped.

●The vehicle is being driven at extremely

high speeds.

■Warning message

If the following warning message is dis-

played on the multi-information display and

the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, fol-

low the appropriate troubleshooting proce-

dure.

Warning message Details/Actions

“LTA Malfunction

Visit Your Dealer”

The system may not be

operating properly.

→Have the vehicle

inspected at your

Lexus dealer.

“Front Camera

Unavailable

Remove Debris

On Windshield”

Dirt, rain, condensa-

tion, ice, snow, etc., are

present on the wind-

shield in front of the

camera sensor.

→Turn the LTA system

off, remove any dirt,

rain, condensation, ice,

snow, etc., from the

windshield, and then

turn the LTA system

back on.

239

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

If a different warning message is displayed,

follow the instructions displayed on the

screen.

■Customization

The following settings can be changed.

For how to change settings, refer to

→P.481

“Front Camera

Unavailable”

The operation condi-

tions of the camera

sensor (temperature,

etc.) are not met.

→When the opera-

tion conditions of the

camera sensor (tem-

perature, etc.) are met,

the LTA system will

become available. Turn

the LTA system off, wait

for a little while, and

then turn the LTA sys-

tem back on.

“LTA Unavailable”

The LTA system is tem-

porarily canceled due

to a malfunction in a

sensor other than the

camera sensor.

→Turn the LTA system

off and follow the

appropriate trouble-

shooting procedures

for the warning mes-

sage. Afterward, drive

the vehicle for a short

time, and then turn the

LTA system back on.

“LTA Unavailable

at Current

Speed”

The LTA system cannot

be used as the vehicle

speed is too high.

→Slow down.

Warning message Details/Actions Function Setting details

Lane departure

alert function

Adjust alert sensitivity

Adjust alert type

Steering assist

function

Turn steering wheel

assistance on and off

Vehicle sway

warning function

Turn function on and

off

Adjust alert sensitivity

Lane centering

function

Turn function on and

off

240 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*:If equipped

■Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that the

vehicle might depart from its lane, a

warning is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display, and either the warning

buzzer sounds or the steering wheel

vibrates to alert the driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds or

the steering wheel vibrates, check the

surrounding road situation and care-

fully operate the steering wheel to

move the vehicle back to the center of

the lane.

■Steering assist function

When the system determines that the

vehicle might depart from its lane, the

system provides assistance as neces-

sary by operating the steering wheel in

small amounts for a short period of

time to keep the vehicle in its lane.

If the system detects that the steering

wheel has not been operated for a

fixed amount of time or the steering

wheel is not being firmly gripped, a

warning is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display and the function is tem-

porarily canceled.

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)*

When driving on highways and

freeways with white or yellow lines,

this function alerts the driver when

the vehicle might depart from its

lane and provides assistance by

operating the steering wheel to

keep the vehicle in its lane. Further-

more, the system also provides

steering assistance when dynamic

radar cruise control with full-speed

range is operating to keep the vehi-

cle in its lane.

The LKA system recognizes visible

white or yellow lines with the cam-

era sensor on the upper portion of

the windshield.

Functions included in LKA sys-

tem

241

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Vehicle sway warning function

When the vehicle is swaying or

appears as if it may depart from its lane

multiple times, the warning buzzer

sounds and a message is displayed on

the multi-information display to alert

the driver.

■Lane centering function

This function is linked with radar cruise

control and provides the required

assistance by operating the steering

wheel to keep the vehicle in its current

lane.

When radar cruise control is not oper-

ating, the lane centering function does

not operate.

If the system detects that the steering

wheel has not been operated for a

fixed amount of time or the steering

wheel is not being firmly gripped, a

warning is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display and the function is tem-

porarily canceled.

242 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Press the LKA switch to turn the LKA

system on.

WARNING

■Before using LKA system

Do not rely solely upon the LKA system.

The LKA system does not automatically

drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of

attention that must be paid to the area in

front of the vehicle. The driver must

always assume full responsibility for driv-

ing safely by paying careful attention to

the surrounding conditions and operat-

ing the steering wheel to correct the path

of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take

adequate breaks when fatigued, such as

from driving for a long period of time.

Failure to perform appropriate driving

operations and pay careful attention may

lead to an accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

■To avoid operating LKA system by

mistake

When not using the LKA system, use the

LKA switch to turn the system off.

■Situations unsuitable for LKA system

Do not use the LKA system in the follow-

ing situations.

The system may not operate properly

and lead to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

●A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are

equipped.

●When the tires have been excessively

worn, or when the tire inflation pres-

sure is low.

●Tires which differ by structure, manu-

facturer, brand or tread pattern are

used.

●Objects or patterns that could be mis-

taken for white (yellow) lines are pres-

ent on the side of the road (guardrails,

curbs, reflective poles, etc.).

●Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered

road.

●White (yellow) lines are difficult to see

due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

●Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow)

line marks, etc. are present due to road

repair.

●Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or

restricted lane due to construction

work.

●Vehicle is driven on a road surface

which is slippery due to rainy weather,

fallen snow, freezing, etc.

●Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other

than on highways and freeways.

●Vehicle is driven in a construction

zone.

■Preventing LKA system malfunctions

and operations performed by mistake

●Do not modify the headlights or place

stickers, etc. on the surface of the

lights.

●Do not modify the suspension etc. If

the suspension etc. needs to be

replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not install or place anything on the

hood or grille. Also, do not install a

grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar,

etc.).

●If your windshield needs repairs, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

Turning LKA system on

243

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

The LKA indicator illuminates and a

message is displayed on the

multi-information display.

Press the LKA switch again to turn the

LKA system off.

When the LKA system is turned on or

off, operation of the LKA system con-

tinues in the same condition the next

time the hybrid system is started.

LKA indicator

The illumination condition of the indicator

informs the driver of the system operation

status.

Illuminated in white:

LKA system is operating.

Illuminated in green:

Steering wheel assistance of the steering

assist function or lane centering function is

operating.

Flashing in orange:

Lane departure alert function is operating.

Operation display of steering

wheel operation support

Indicates that steering wheel assistance of

the steering assist function or lane center-

ing function is operating.

Lane departure alert function dis-

play

Displayed when the multi-information dis-

play is switched to the driving assist system

information screen.

Inside of displayed white lines is

white

Indicates that the system is recognizing

white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle

departs from its lane, the white line dis-

played on the side the vehicle departs from

flashes orange.

Indications on multi-information

display

244 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Inside of displayed white lines is

black

Indicates that the system is not able to rec-

ognize white (yellow) lines or is temporar-

ily canceled.

■Operation conditions of each function

●Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• LKA is turned on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph

(50 km/h) or more.

• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8

ft. (3 m) or more.

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or

around a gentle curve with a radius of

more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(→P.246)

●Steering assist function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met in addition to the

operation conditions for the lane depar-

ture alert function.

•Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the

multi-information display is set to “On”.

(→P.86)

• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated

by a fixed amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a

steering force level suitable for changing

lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not oper-

ating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel alert is not dis-

played. (→P.245)

●Vehicle sway warning function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the

multi-information display is set to “On”.

(→P.86)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph

(50 km/h) or more.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8

ft. (3 m) or more.

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(→P.246)

●Lane centering function

This function operates when all of the fol-

lowing conditions are met.

• LKA is turned on.

• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane

Center” in of the multi-information

display are set to “On”. (→P.86)

• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.

• Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range is operating.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 8.2

to 13.5 ft. (2.5 to 4.1 m).

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or

around a gentle curve with a radius of

more than approximately 656 ft. (200

m).

• No system malfunctions are detected.

(→P.246)

• Vehicle does not accelerate or deceler-

ate by a fixed amount or more.

• Steering wheel is not operated with a

steering force level suitable for changing

lanes.

• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not oper-

ating.

• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.

• Hands off steering wheel alert is not dis-

played. (→P.245)

• Steering assist function is not operating.

■Temporary cancellation of functions

When operation conditions are no longer

met, a function may be temporarily can-

celed. However, when the operation condi-

tions are met again, operation of the

245

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

function is automatically restored.

(→P.244)

■Steering assist function/lane centering

function

Depending on the vehicle speed, lane

departure situation, road conditions, etc.,

the driver may not feel the function is oper-

ating or the function may not operate at all.

■Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear

due to external noise, audio playback, etc.

Also, it may be difficult to feel steering

wheel vibrations due to the road conditions,

etc.

■Hands off steering wheel alert

When the system determines that the driver

has removed the hands from the steering

wheel while the steering assist function or

lane centering function is operating, a warn-

ing message is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display. If the driver continues to

keep the hands off of the steering wheel, a

warning message is displayed and the func-

tion is temporarily canceled. This alert also

operates in the same way when the driver

continuously operates the steering wheel

only a small amount. However, depending

on the road conditions, etc., the function

may not cancel.

■White (yellow) lines are only on one side

of road

The LKA system will not operate for the

side on which white (yellow) lines could not

be recognized.

■Conditions in which functions may not

operate properly

In the following situations, the camera sen-

sor may not detect white (yellow) lines and

various functions may not operate normally.

●There are shadows on the road that run

parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow)

lines.

●The vehicle is driven in an area without

white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a

tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersec-

tion, etc.

●The white (yellow) lines are cracked,

“Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker”

or stones are present.

●The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen

or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a road surface

that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

●The traffic lines are yellow (which may be

more difficult to recognize than lines that

are white).

●The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb,

etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a bright surface,

such as concrete.

●The vehicle is driven on a surface that is

bright due to reflected light, etc.

●The vehicle is driven in an area where the

brightness changes suddenly, such as at

the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

●Light from the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.

●The vehicle is driven where the road

diverges, merges, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a slope.

●The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts

left or right, or a winding road.

●The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or

rough road.

●The vehicle is driven around a sharp

curve.

●The traffic lane is excessively narrow or

wide.

●The vehicle is extremely tilted due to car-

rying heavy luggage or having improper

tire pressure.

●The distance to the preceding vehicle is

extremely short.

●The vehicle is moving up and down a

large amount due to road conditions

during driving (poor roads or road

seams).

●The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a

faint amount of light at night, or the beam

axis has deviated.

●The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.

●The vehicle has just changed lanes or

crossed an intersection.

●Snow tires, etc. are equipped.

246 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Warning message

If the following warning message is dis-

played on the multi-information display and

the LKA indicator illuminates in orange, fol-

low the appropriate troubleshooting proce-

dure.

If a different warning message is displayed,

follow the instructions displayed on the

screen.

■Customization

The following settings can be changed.

Warning message Details/Actions

“Lane Keeping

Assist Malfunc-

tion Visit Your

Dealer”

The system may not be

operating properly.

→Have the vehicle

inspected at your

Lexus dealer.

“Front Camera

Unavailable

Remove Debris

On Windshield”

Dirt, rain, condensa-

tion, ice, snow, etc., are

present on the wind-

shield in front of the

camera sensor.

→Turn the LKA sys-

tem off, remove any

dirt, rain, condensa-

tion, ice, snow, etc.,

from the windshield,

and then turn the LKA

system back on.

“Front Camera

Unavailable”

The operation condi-

tions of the camera

sensor (temperature,

etc.) are not met.

→When the opera-

tion conditions of the

camera sensor (tem-

perature, etc.) are met,

the LKA system will

become available. Turn

the LKA system off,

wait for a little while,

and then turn the LKA

system back on.

“Lane Keeping

Assist Unavail-

able”

The LKA system is

temporarily canceled

due to a malfunction in

a sensor other than the

camera sensor.

→Turn the LKA sys-

tem off and follow the

appropriate trouble-

shooting procedures

for the warning mes-

sage. Afterward, drive

the vehicle for a short

time, and then turn the

LKA system back on.

Function Setting details

Lane departure

alert function

Adjust alert sensitivity

Adjust alert type

Steering assist

function

Turn steering wheel

assistance on and off

Warning message Details/Actions

247

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

For how to change settings, refer to

→P.481

*: If equipped

Vehicle sway

warning function

Turn function on and

off

Adjust alert sensitivity

Lane centering

function

Turn function on and

off

Function Setting details RSA (Road Sign Assist)*

The RSA system recognizes spe-

cific road signs using the camera

sensor and navigation system

(when data is available) to provide

information to the driver via the

multi-information display and

head-up display.

If the system judges that the vehicle

is being driven over the speed limit,

performing prohibited actions, etc.

in relation to the recognized road

signs, it alerts the driver using a

warning display and warning

buzzer*.

*: This setting needs to be customized.

WARNING

■Before using the RSA

Do not rely solely upon the RSA system.

RSA is a system which supports the

driver by providing information, but it is

not a replacement for a driver’s own

vision and awareness. Drive safely by

always paying careful attention to the

traffic rules.

Inappropriate or negligent driving could

lead to an unexpected accident.

248 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When the camera sensor recognizes a

sign or information of a sign is available

from the navigation system , the sign

will be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display.

-When the driving support system

information is selected, a maximum

of 3 signs can be displayed.

(→P.86)

-When a tab other than the driving

support system information tab is

selected, only a recognized speed

limit sign or do not enter sign (when

notification is necessary) will be dis-

played. (→P.86)

If signs other than speed limit signs are rec-

ognized, they will be displayed in an over-

lapping stack under the current speed limit

sign.

The following types of road signs are recognized.

Non-official or recently introduced traffic signs may not be recognized.

Indication on the multi-informa-

tion display

Supported types of road signs

Type Multi-information display

Speed limit begins/ends*

Do Not Enter

249

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

*: Displayed when speed limit information for the road is available from the navigation sys-

tem

In the following situations, the RSA sys-

tem will alert the driver.

-When the vehicle speed exceeds

the speed warning threshold of the

speed limit sign displayed, the sign

display will be emphasized and a

buzzer will sound.

-When the RSA system recognizes a

do not enter sign and determines

that your vehicle has entered a

no-entry area, the displayed sign will

flash and a buzzer will sound.

Depending on the situation, traffic

environment (traffic direction, speed,

unit) may be detected incorrectly and a

warning display may not operate prop-

erly.

■Turning the system on/off

1Select on of the multi-informa-

tion display (→P.86)

2Press on the steering wheel.

■Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display

In the following situations, a displayed

speed limit sign will stop being displayed

automatically:

●A new sign is not recognized for a certain

distance. (When speed limit information

is not available from the navigation sys-

tem)

In the following situations, do not enter, stop

and yield signs will stop being displayed

automatically:

●The system determines that your vehicle

has passed the sign.

●The road changes due to a left or right

turn, etc.

■Conditions in which the function may

not operate or detect correctly

In the following situations, RSA does not

operate normally and may not recognize

signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. How-

ever, this does not indicate a malfunction.

●The camera sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact being applied to the sen-

sor, etc.

●Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the wind-

shield near the camera sensor.

●In inclement weather such as heavy rain,

fog, snow or sand storms

●Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun,

etc. enters the camera sensor.

●The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent.

●All or part of the sign is hidden by the

leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.

●The sign is only visible to the camera sen-

sor for a short amount of time.

●The driving scene (turning, lane change,

etc.) is judged incorrectly.

Stop

Yield

Type Multi-information display

Warning indication

250 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●Even if it is a sign not appropriate for the

currently traveled lane, such a sign exists

directly after a freeway branches, or in an

adjacent lane just before merging.

●Stickers are attached to the rear of the

preceding vehicle.

●A sign resembling a system compatible

sign is recognized.

●The front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load.

●The surrounding brightness is not suffi-

cient or changes suddenly.

●When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is

recognized.

●The navigation system map data is old.

●The navigation system is not operating.

●Side road speed signs may be detected

and displayed (if positioned in sight of the

camera sensor) while the vehicle is trav-

eling on the main road.

●Roundabout exit road speed signs may

be detected and displayed (if positioned

in sight of the camera sensor) while trav-

eling on a roundabout.

■Speed limit sign display

If the power switch was last turned off while

a speed limit sign was displayed on the

multi-information display, the same sign dis-

plays again when the power switch is turned

to ON mode.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

■Meter display

Display

Set speed

Indicators

Dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range

In vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode, the vehicle automati-

cally accelerates, decelerates and

stops to match the speed changes

of the preceding vehicle even if the

accelerator pedal is not depressed.

In constant speed control mode,

the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range on free-

ways and highways.

-Vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode (→P.253)

-Constant speed control mode

(→P.257)

System Components

251

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Operation switches

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch

“+RES” switch

Cruise control main switch

Cancel switch

“-SET” switch

WARNING

■Before using dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed range

Driving safely is the sole responsibility of

the driver. Do not rely solely on the sys-

tem, and drive safely by always paying

careful attention to your surroundings.

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range provides driving assis-

tance to reduce the driver’s burden.

However, there are limitations to the

assistance provided.

Set the speed appropriately depending

on the speed limit, traffic flow, road con-

ditions, weather conditions, etc. The

driver is responsible for checking the set

speed.

Even when the system is functioning nor-

mally, the condition of the preceding

vehicle as detected by the system may

differ from the condition observed by the

driver. Therefore, the driver must always

remain alert, assess the danger of each

situation and drive safely. Relying solely

on this system or assuming the system

ensures safety while driving can lead to

an accident, resulting in death or serious

injury.

■Cautions regarding the driving assist

systems

Observe the following precautions, as

there are limitations to the assistance

provided by the system.

Failure to do so may cause an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

●Assisting the driver to measure follow-

ing distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range is only intended to

help the driver in determining the fol-

lowing distance between the driver’s

own vehicle and a designated vehicle

traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism

that allows careless or inattentive driv-

ing, and it is not a system that can assist

the driver in low-visibility conditions. It

is still necessary for driver to pay close

attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

●Assisting the driver to judge proper

following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range determines whether

the following distance between the

driver’s own vehicle and a designated

vehicle traveling ahead is within a set

range. It is not capable of making any

other type of judgement. Therefore, it

is absolutely necessary for the driver to

remain vigilant and to determine

whether or not there is a possibility of

danger in any given situation.

●Assisting the driver to operate the

vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range does not include

functions which will prevent or avoid

collisions with vehicles ahead of your

vehicle. Therefore, if there is ever any

possibility of danger, the driver must

take immediate and direct control of

the vehicle and act appropriately in

order to ensure the safety of all

involved.

252 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

■To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar

cruise control with full-speed range

activation

Switch the dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range setting to off, using

the cruise control main switch when not

in use.

■Situations unsuitable for dynamic

radar cruise control with full-speed

range

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range in any of the follow-

ing situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate

speed control and could cause an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious injury.

●Roads where there are pedestrians,

cyclists, etc.

●In heavy traffic

●On roads with sharp bends

●On winding roads

●On slippery roads, such as those cov-

ered with rain, ice or snow

●On steep downhills, or where there

are sudden changes between sharp up

and down gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set

speed when driving down a steep hill.

●At entrances to freeways and highways

●When weather conditions are bad

enough that they may prevent the sen-

sors from detecting correctly (fog,

snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

●When there is rain, snow, etc. on the

front surface of the radar sensor or

camera sensor

●In traffic conditions that require fre-

quent repeated acceleration and

deceleration

●When an approach warning buzzer is

heard often

253

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approx-

imately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following

distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle

ahead.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance

can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates

your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies

the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in

the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by

the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to

prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by sys-

tem control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the “+RES” switch or depressing

the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising.

Vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A: If your vehicle is being driven at approximately 43

mph (70 km/h) or more, when the turn signal is operated and a lane change is made to

pass the vehicle ahead, the system will start accelerating your vehicle up to the set speed to

assist smooth overtaking.

Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

254 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant

speed cruising.

1Press the cruise control main switch

to activate the cruise control.

Radar cruise control indicator will come on

and a message will be displayed on the

multi-information display.

Press the switch again to deactivate the

cruise control.

If the cruise control main switch is pressed

and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the sys-

tem turns on in constant speed control

mode. (→P.257)

2Accelerate or decelerate, with

accelerator pedal operation, to the

desired vehicle speed (at or above

approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])

and press the “-SET” switch to set

the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come

on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the

switch is released becomes the set speed.

If the switch is operated while the vehicle

speed is below approximately 30 mph (50

km/h) and a preceding vehicle is present,

the set speed will be adjusted to approxi-

mately 30 mph (50 km/h).

To change the set speed, operate the

“+RES” or “-SET” switch until the

desired set speed is displayed.

1Increases the speed

(Except when the vehicle has been

stopped by system control in vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

2Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Press the switch.

Large adjustment: Press and hold the

switch to change the speed, and

release when the desired speed is

reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode, the set speed will be

Setting the vehicle speed (vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control

mode)

Adjusting the set speed

255

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

increased or decreased as follows:

For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1

km/h (0.6mph)*2 each time the switch is

pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases

in 1mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2

increments for as long as the switch is held

For Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1

km/h (0.6mph)*2 each time the switch is

pressed

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases

in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)*2

increments for as long as the switch is held

In the constant speed control mode

(→P.257), the set speed will be

increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1

km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the switch is

pressed

Large adjustment: The speed will continue

to change while the switch is held.

*1: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

*2: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

Pressing the switch changes the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

1Long

2Medium

3Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set auto-

matically to long mode when the power

switch is turned ON mode.

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the pre-

ceding vehicle mark will also be dis-

played.

Select a distance from the table below.

Note that the distances shown corre-

spond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

increases/decreases in accordance

with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is

stopped by system control, the vehicle

stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle

distance depending on the situation.

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode)

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance set-

tings (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode)

Distance

options

Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance

Long Approximately 160 ft. (50

256 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

After the vehicle ahead of you starts

off, press the “+RES” switch.

Your vehicle will also resume follow-up

cruising if the accelerator pedal is

depressed after the vehicle ahead of

you starts off.

1Pressing the cancel switch cancels

the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled when

the brake pedal is depressed.

(When the vehicle has been stopped by

system control, depressing the brake pedal

does not cancel the setting.)

2Pressing the “+RES” switch

resumes the cruise control and

returns vehicle speed to the set

speed.

However, when a vehicle ahead is not

detected, cruise control does not resume

when the vehicle speed is approximately

25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

When your vehicle is too close to a

vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic

deceleration via the cruise control is

not possible, the display will flash and

the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

An example of this would be if another

driver cuts in front of you while you are

following a vehicle. Depress the brake

pedal to ensure an appropriate vehi-

Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40

Short Approximately 100 ft. (30

Resuming follow-up cruising

when the vehicle has been

stopped by system control (vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control

mode)

Distance

options

Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance Canceling and resuming the

speed control

Approach warning (vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control

mode)

257

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

cle-to-vehicle distance.

■Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings

may not occur even when the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance is small.

-When the speed of the preceding

vehicle matches or exceeds your

vehicle speed

-When the preceding vehicle is trav-

eling at an extremely slow speed

-Immediately after the cruise control

speed was set

-When depressing the accelerator

pedal

When constant speed control mode is

selected, your vehicle will maintain a

set speed without controlling the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance. Select this

mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode does not function

correctly due to a dirty radar sensor,

etc.

1With the cruise control off, press

and hold the cruise control main

switch for 1.5 seconds or more.

Immediately after the switch is pressed, the

radar cruise control indicator will come on.

Afterwards, it switches to the cruise con-

trol indicator.

Switching to constant speed control mode

is only possible when operating the switch

with the cruise control off.

2Accelerate or decelerate, with

accelerator pedal operation, to the

desired vehicle speed (at or above

approximately 25 mph [40 km/h])

and press the “-SET” switch to set

the speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come

on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the

switch is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting: →P.254

Canceling and resuming the speed setting:

→P.256

■Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range can be set when

●The shift position is in D.

●Range 4 or higher of D has been selected

Selecting constant speed con-

trol mode

258 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

by using the paddle shift switch.

●Vehicle speed is at or above approxi-

mately 30 mph (50 km/h).

However, when a preceding vehicle is

detected, the dynamic radar cruise con-

trol with full-speed range can be set even

if the vehicle speed is below approxi-

mately 30 mph (50 km/h).

■Accelerating after setting the vehicle

speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the

accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the

set speed resumes. However, during vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the

vehicle speed may decrease below the set

speed in order to maintain the distance to

the preceding vehicle.

■When the vehicle stops while follow-up

cruising

●Pressing the “+RES” switch while the

vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up

cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off

within approximately 3 seconds after the

switch is pressed.

●If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 sec-

onds after your vehicle stops, follow-up

cruising will be resumed.

■Automatic cancelation of vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is

automatically canceled in the following situ-

ations.

●Actual vehicle speed falls at or below

approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when

there are no vehicles ahead.

●The preceding vehicle leaves the lane

when your vehicle is following at a vehicle

speed at or below approximately 25 mph

(40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor cannot

properly detect the vehicle. (“CRUISE

NOT AVAILABLE No Preceding Vehi-

cles” is displayed on the multi-information

display.)

●VSC is activated.

●TRAC is activated for a period of time.

●When the VSC or TRAC system is

turned off.

●When snow mode is set.

●The sensor cannot detect correctly

because it is covered in some way.

●Pre-collision braking is activated.

●The parking brake is operated.

●The vehicle is stopped by system control

on a steep incline.

●The following are detected when the

vehicle has been stopped by system con-

trol:

• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3

minutes.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

is automatically canceled for any other rea-

son, there may be a malfunction in the sys-

tem. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■Automatic cancelation of constant

speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automati-

cally canceled in the following situations:

●Actual vehicle speed is more than

approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below

the set vehicle speed.

●Actual vehicle speed falls below approxi-

mately 25 mph (40 km/h).

●VSC is activated.

●TRAC is activated for a period of time.

●When the VSC or TRAC system is

turned off.

●Pre-collision braking is activated.

If constant speed control mode is automati-

cally canceled for any other reason, there

may be a malfunction in the system. Con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

■If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable” is

shown on the multi-information display

The radar cruise control system cannot be

used temporarily. Use the system when it

becomes available again.

■Brake system operation sound

When the brakes are operated in vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance mode, a brake oper-

ating sound may be heard. This is not a

malfunction.

259

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Warning messages and buzzers for

dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

Warning messages and buzzers are used to

indicate a system malfunction or to inform

the driver of the need for caution while driv-

ing. If a warning message is shown on the

multi-information display, read the message

and follow the instructions.

■When the sensor may not be correctly

detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending

on the conditions, operate the brake pedal

when deceleration of the system is insuffi-

cient or operate the accelerator pedal

when acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly

detect these types of vehicles, the approach

warning (→P.256) may not be activated.

●Vehicles that cut in suddenly

●Vehicles traveling at low speeds

●Vehicles that are not moving in the same

lane

●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers

with no load on board, etc.)

●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

●When water or snow thrown up by the

surrounding vehicles hinders the detect-

ing of the sensor

●When your vehicle is pointing upwards

(caused by a heavy load in the luggage

compartment, etc.)

●Preceding vehicle has an extremely high

ground clearance

■Conditions under which the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance control mode

may not function correctly

In the case of the following conditions,

operate the brake pedal (or accelerator

pedal, depending on the situation) as nec-

essary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly

detect vehicles ahead, the system may not

operate properly.

●When driving around a curve, on a nar-

row road, or on a bridge, in a tunnel, etc.,

where there are objects on the roadside

●When steering wheel operation or your

position in the lane is unstable

●When the vehicle ahead of you deceler-

ates suddenly

●While the vehicle speed is decreasing to

the set speed after the vehicle acceler-

ates by depressing the accelerator pedal.

260 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Meter control switches

Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off.

Outside rear view mirror indicators

When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot

of the outside rear view mirrors or

approaching rapidly from behind into a

blind spot, the outside rear view mirror

indicator on the detected side will illumi-

nate. If the turn signal lever is operated

toward the detected side, the outside rear

view mirror indicator flashes.

BSM indicator

Illuminates when the Blind Spot Monitor is

enabled

■Outside rear view mirror indicator visi-

bility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir-

ror indicator may be difficult to see.

■When “BSM Not Available” is shown on

the multi-information display

Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the

rear bumper around the sensors. (→P.261)

The system should return to normal opera-

tion after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc.

from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sen-

sors may not operate normally when driving

in extremely hot or cold environments.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system

that uses rear side radar sensors

installed on the inner side of the

rear bumper on the left and right

side to assist the driver in confirm-

ing safety when changing lanes.

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the sys-

tem

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking care

to observe your surroundings.

The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplemen-

tary function which alerts the driver that a

vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside

rear view mirrors or is approaching rap-

idly from behind into a blind spot. Do not

overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. As

the function cannot judge if it is safe to

change lanes, over reliance could lead to

an accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

As the system may not function correctly

under certain conditions, the driver’s own

visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

System components

261

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

For vehicles sold in Canada

WARNING

■Handling the rear side radar sensor

Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed

behind the left and right sides of the rear

bumper respectively. Observe the fol-

lowing to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor

can operate correctly.

262 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Use the meter control switches to turn

on/off the function.

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select and

then press .

WARNING

●Keep the sensors and the surrounding

areas on the rear bumper clean at all

times.

If a sensor or its surrounding area on the

rear bumper is dirty or covered with

snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not

operate and a warning message

(→P.260) will be displayed. In this situa-

tion, clear off the dirt or snow and drive

the vehicle with the operation conditions

of the BSM function (→P.264) satisfied

for approximately 10 minutes. If the

warning message does not disappear,

have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

●Do not attach accessories, stickers

(including transparent stickers), alumi-

num tape, etc. to a sensor or its sur-

rounding area on the rear bumper.

●Do not subject a sensor or its sur-

rounding area on the rear bumper to a

strong impact.

If a sensor is moved even slightly off posi-

tion, the system may malfunction and

vehicles may not be detected correctly.

In the following situations, have your

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

• A sensor or its surrounding area is

subject to a strong impact.

• If the surrounding area of a sensor is

scratched or dented, or part of them

has become disconnected.

●Do not disassemble the sensor.

●Do not modify the sensor or surround-

ing area on the rear bumper.

●If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to

be removed/installed or replaced,

contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not paint the rear bumper any

color other than an official Lexus color.

Turning the Blind Spot Monitor

on/off

263

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor

The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the following vehi-

cles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehi-

cles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.

Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear

view mirrors (the blind spots)

Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible

using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

■The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of each detection area is:

Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle*1

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper*2

*1: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle

cannot be detected.

*2: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is,

Blind Spot Monitor operation

264 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indi-

cator to illuminate or flash.

■The Blind Spot Monitor is operational

when

The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when

all of the following conditions are met:

●The Blind Spot Monitor is on.

●The shift position is in a position other

than R.

●The vehicle speed is greater than approx-

imately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a

vehicle when

The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle

present in the detection area in the follow-

ing situations:

●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes

your vehicle.

●You overtake a vehicle in adjacent lane

slowly.

●Another vehicle enters the detection

area when it changes lanes.

■Conditions under which the Blind Spot

Monitor will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to

detect the following types of vehicles and/or

objects:

●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,

etc.*

●Vehicles traveling in the opposite direc-

tion

●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles

and similar stationary objects*

●Following vehicles that are in the same

lane*

●Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your

vehicle*

*: Depending on the conditions, detection

of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■Conditions under which the Blind Spot

Monitor may not function correctly

●The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect

vehicles correctly in the following situa-

tions:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

rounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is

covering the sensor or surrounding area

on the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is

wet with standing water during bad

weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When multiple vehicles are approaching

with only a small gap between each vehi-

cle

• When the distance between your vehicle

and a following vehicle is short

• When there is a significant difference in

speed between your vehicle and the vehi-

cle that enters the detection area

• Vehicles which are being overtaken rap-

idly by your vehicle.

• When the difference in speed between

your vehicle and another vehicle is

changing

• When a vehicle enters a detection area

traveling at about the same speed as your

vehicle

• As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehi-

cle remains in the detection area

• When driving up and down consecutive

steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the

road, etc.

• When driving on roads with sharp bends,

consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When vehicle lanes are wide, or when

driving on the edge of a lane, and the

vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away

from your vehicle

• When an accessory (such as a bicycle

carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehi-

cle

• When there is a significant difference in

height between your vehicle and the

vehicle that enters the detection area

• Immediately after the Blind Spot Monitor

is turned on

●Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor

unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or

object may increase in the following situ-

ations:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

265

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

rounding area

• When the distance between your vehicle

and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the

detection area is short

• When driving up and down consecutive

steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the

road, etc.

• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when

driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehi-

cle traveling in a lane other than the adja-

cent lanes enters the detection area

• When driving on roads with sharp bends,

consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When the tires are slipping or spinning

• When the distance between your vehicle

and a following vehicle is short

• When an accessory (such as a bicycle

carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehi-

cle

*: If equipped

■Intuitive parking assist

Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect

static objects in the detection area

when driving at a low speed or backing

up. (→P.266)

■RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

function

Radar sensors are used to detect

approaching vehicles in the detection

areas behind the vehicle when backing

up. (→P.273)

■RCD (Rear camera detection)

function (if equipped)

A rear camera sensor is used to detect

pedestrians in the detection area

behind the vehicle when backing up.

(→P.277)

PKSA (Parking Support

Alert)*

The Parking Support Alert system

consists of the following functions

that operate when driving at a low

speed or backing up, such as when

parking. When the system deter-

mines that a collision with a

detected object, such as a wall, or

pedestrian is high, a warning oper-

ates to urge the driver to take eva-

sive action.

PKSA (Parking Support Alert)

system

266 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Adjusting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on

the multi-information display. The vol-

ume of buzzers for the intuitive parking

assist, RCTA function and RCD func-

tion will be adjusted simultaneously.

Use the meter control switches to

change settings. (→P.87)

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “PKSA”

and then press .

3Press or to select and

then press .

Each time the switch is pressed, the volume

level will change between 1, 2, and 3.

■Muting a buzzer

A mute button will be displayed on the

multi-information display when an

object or pedestrian is detected. To

mute the buzzer, press .

The buzzers for the intuitive parking

assist, RCTA function and RCD func-

tion will be muted simultaneously.

Mute will be canceled automatically in

the following situations:

-When the shift position is changed.

-When the operating function is tem-

porarily canceled.

-When the operating function is dis-

abled manually.

-When the power switch is turned

off.

■Types of sensors

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

■Display

When the sensors detect an object,

such as a wall, a graphic is shown on

the multi-information display, head-up

display (if equipped) and Center Dis-

play depending on the position and dis-

tance to the object.

-Multi-information display and

head-up display

Setting the buzzer volume Intuitive parking assist

The distance from your vehicle to

objects, such as a wall, when paral-

lel parking or maneuvering into a

garage is measured by the sensors

and communicated via the

multi-information display, head-up

display (if equipped), Center Dis-

play and a buzzer. Always check the

surrounding area when using this

system.

System components

267

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Front corner sensor detection

Front center sensor detection

Rear corner sensor detection

Rear center sensor detection

-Center Display

A graphic is shown when the Lexus park-

ing assist monitor (if equipped) is dis-

played.

A simplified image is displayed on the

Center Display when an object is detected.

• When the R shift position is selected

• When the N, M or D shift position is

selected (vehicle moving forward)

When an object is detected, a graphic will

be displayed on the panoramic view moni-

tor (if equipped).

Use the meter control switches to

enable/disable the Lexus parking

assist-sensor. (→P.87)

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “PKSA”

and then press .

3Press or to select and

then press .

When the intuitive parking assist func-

tion is disabled, the intuitive parking

assist OFF indicator (→P.72) illumi-

nates on the multi-information display.

To re-enable the system when it was

disabled, select on the multi-infor-

mation display, select and then On.

If disabled using this method, the sys-

tem will not be re-enabled by turning

the power switch off and then to ON

mode.

Turning intuitive parking assist

on/off

268 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■The system can be operated when

●The power switch is in ON mode.

●Intuitive parking assist function is on.

●The vehicle speed is less than about 6

mph (10 km/h).

●A shift position other than P is selected.

■Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the

multi-information display. (→P.266)

■If “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean

Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on

the multi-information display

A sensor may be covered with ice, snow,

dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc.,

from the sensor to return the system to nor-

WARNING

■When using the intuitive parking

assist

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle

being unable to be driven safely and pos-

sibly cause an accident.

●Do not use the sensor at speeds in

excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

●The sensors’ detection areas and reac-

tion times are limited. When moving

forward or reversing, check the areas

surrounding the vehicle (especially the

sides of the vehicle) for safety, and

drive slowly, using the brake to control

the vehicle’s speed.

●Do not install accessories within the

sensors’ detection areas.

●The area directly under the bumpers is

not detected.

■When to disable the function

In the following situations, disable the

function as it may operate even though

there is no possibility of a collision.

●The vehicle is equipped with a fender

pole or wireless antenna.

●The front or rear bumper or a sensor

receives a strong impact.

●A non-genuine Lexus suspension

(lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.

●Towing eyelets are installed.

●A backlit licence plate is installed.

■When using intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system

may not function correctly due to a sen-

sor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle

checked by your Lexus dealer.

●The intuitive parking assist operation

display flashes or shows continuously,

and a buzzer sounds when no objects

are detected.

●If the area around a sensor collides

with something, or is subjected to

strong impact.

●If the bumper or grille collides with

something.

●If the display flashes or is displayed

continuously and a buzzer does not

sound, except when the mute function

has been turned on.

●If a display error occurs, first check the

sensor.

If the error occurs even when there is

no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is

likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

■Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or

steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor mal-

functioning.

●When using a high pressure washer to

wash the vehicle, do not spray the sen-

sors directly, as doing so may cause a

sensor to malfunction.

●When using steam to clean the vehicle,

do not direct steam too close to the

sensors as doing so may cause a sen-

sor to malfunction.

269

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

mal.

Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low

temperatures, a warning message may be

displayed or the sensor may not be able to

detect an object. Once the ice melts, the

system will return to normal.

■Sensor detection information

●The following situations may occur

during use.

• Depending on the shape of the object

and other factors, the detection distance

may shorten, or detection may be impos-

sible.

• There will be a short delay between

object detection and display. Even at low

speeds, there is a possibility that the

object will come within the sensor’s

detection areas before the display is

shown and the warning beep sounds.

• It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due

to the volume of the audio system or air

flow noise of the air conditioning system.

■Conditions under which the function

may not function correctly

Certain vehicle conditions and the sur-

rounding environment may affect the ability

of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Par-

ticular instances where this may occur are

listed below.

●There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.

(Cleaning the sensors will resolve this

problem.)

●A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will

resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is

frozen the sensor display may be dis-

played abnormally, or objects, such as a

wall, may not be detected.

●A sensor is covered in any way.

●When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is extremely hot or cold.

●On an extremely bumpy road, on an

incline, on gravel, or on grass.

●The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to

vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air

brakes of large vehicles, or other loud

noises producing ultrasonic waves.

●There is another vehicle equipped with

parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

●A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray

or heavy rain.

●If a sensor is hit by a large amount of

water, such as when driving on a flooded

road.

●If the vehicle is significantly tilted.

●The vehicle is approaching a tall or

curved curb.

●If objects draw too close to the sensor.

■Objects which may not be properly

detected

The shape of the object may prevent the

sensor from detecting it. Pay particular

attention to the following objects:

●Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

●Cotton, snow and other materials that

absorb sound waves

●Sharply-angled objects

●Low objects

●Tall objects with upper sections project-

ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-

cle

People may not be detected if they are

wearing certain types of clothing.

■Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

270 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For vehicles sold in Canada

■Detection range of the sensors

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 1.9 ft. (65 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range of

the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot

detect objects that are extremely close to

the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change

depending on the shape of the object, etc.

■Multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped) and Center Display

When an object is detected by a sensor, the approximate distance to the object will

be displayed on the multi-information display, Center Display, and head-up display

(if equipped). (As the distance to the object becomes short, the distance segments

may blink.)

-Approximate distance to object: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65 cm)* (Rear center

sensor)

Sensor detection display, object

distance

271

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

*: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272)

-Approximate distance to object: 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65 cm)* (Front center

sensor)

*: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272)

-Approximate distance to object: 1.9 ft. (65 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)*

*: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272)

-Approximate distance to object: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)*

*: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (→P.272)

-Approximate distance to object: 1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)*1

Multi-information display Center Display Head-up display

Multi-information display*2 Center Display*2 Head-up display

272 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*1: Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (→P.272)

*2: The distance segments will blink slowly.

-Approximate distance to object: Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)*1

*1: Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (→P.272)

*2: The distance segments will blink rapidly.

■Buzzer operation and distance to

an object

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are

operating.

-The buzzer beeps faster as the vehi-

cle approaches an object. When the

vehicle comes within the following

distance of the object, the buzzer

sounds continuously:

Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

-When 2 or more objects are

detected simultaneously, the buzzer

sounds for the nearest object. If one

or more objects come within

approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the

vehicle, the buzzer will repeat a long

tone, followed by fast beeps.

-Automatic buzzer mute function:

After a buzzer begins sounding, if

the distance between the vehicle

and the detected object does not

become shorter, the buzzer will be

muted automatically. (However, if

the distance between the vehicle

and object is 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less,

this function will not operate.)

The buzzer sounds volume can be

adjusted. (→P.266)

Multi-information display*2 Center Display*2 Head-up display

273

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Meter control switches

Turning the RCTA function on/off.

When the RCTA function is disabled, the

RCTA OFF indicator illuminates.

Outside rear view mirror indicators

When a vehicle approaching from the right

or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,

both outside rear view mirror indicators

will flash.

Center Display

If a vehicle approaching from the right or

left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,

the RCTA icon (→P.274) for the detected

side will be displayed on the Center Dis-

play. This illustration shows an example of a

vehicle approaching from both sides of the

vehicle.

RCTA buzzer

If a vehicle approaching from the right or

left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a

buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds

for approximately 1 second immediately

after the RCTA function is turned on.

Use the meter control switches to

enable/disable the RCTA function.

(→P.87)

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “PKSA”

and then press .

3Press or to select “RCTA”

and then press .

When the RCTA function is disabled, the

RCTA OFF indicator (→P.72) illuminates

on the multi-information display. (Each

time the power switch is turned off then

changed to ON mode, the RCTA function

will be enabled automatically.)

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) function

The RCTA function uses the BSM

rear side radar sensors installed

behind the rear bumper. This func-

tion is intended to assist the driver

in checking areas that are not easily

visible when backing up.

System components

Turning the RCTA function

on/off

274 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Outside rear view mirror indicator visi-

bility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir-

ror indicator may be difficult to see.

■Hearing the RCTA buzzer

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear

over loud noises, such as if the audio system

volume is high.

■When “RCTA NOT AVAILABLE” is

shown on the multi-information display

Water, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to

the rear bumper around the sensors.

(→P.262) Removing the water, snow, mud,

etc., from the attached to the rear bumper

around the sensors to normal.

Additionally, the function may not function

normally when used in extremely hot or

cold environments.

■Rear side radar sensors

→P.262

■Operation of the RCTA function

The RCTA function uses rear side radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching

from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence

of such vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a

buzzer.

Approaching vehicles

Detection areas of approaching vehicles

■RCTA icon display

When a vehicle approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle is

detected, the following will be dis-

played on the Center Display.

-Example (Lexus parking assist mon-

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the

function

The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive safely, taking care

to observe your surroundings.

The RCTA function is only a supplemen-

tary function which alerts the driver that a

vehicle is approaching from the right or

left at the rear of the vehicle. As the

RCTA function may not function cor-

rectly under certain conditions, the

driver’s own visual confirmation of safety

is necessary. Over reliance on this func-

tion may lead to an accident resulting

death or serious injury.

RCTA function

275

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

itor) (if equipped): Vehicles are

approaching from both sides of the

vehicle

■RCTA function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The buzzer can alert the driver of

faster vehicles approaching from far-

ther away.

Example:

■The RCTA function is operational when

The RCTA function operates when all of the

following conditions are met:

●The power switch is in ON mode.

●The RCTA function is on.

●The shift position is in R.

●The vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h).

●The approaching vehicle speed is

between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)

and 18 mph (28 km/h).

■Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the

multi-information display. (→P.266)

■Conditions under which the RCTA func-

tion will not detect a vehicle

The RCTA function is not designed to

detect the following types of vehicles and/or

objects:

●Vehicles approaching from directly

behind

●Vehicles backing up in a parking space

next to your vehicle

●Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect

due to obstructions

Approaching vehi-

cle speed Approximate

alert distance

18 mph (28 km/h)

(fast) 65 ft. (20 m)

5 mph (8 km/h)

(slow) 18 ft. (5.5 m)

276 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles

and similar stationary objects

●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,

etc.

●Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

●Vehicles approaching from the parking

spaces next to your vehicle

■Conditions under which the RCTA func-

tion may not function correctly

●The RCTA function may not detect vehi-

cles correctly in the following situations:

• When a sensor is misaligned due to a

strong impact to the sensor or its sur-

rounding area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is

covering a sensor or its surrounding area

on the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is

wet with standing water during bad

weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When multiple vehicles are approaching

with only a small gap between each vehi-

cle

• If a vehicle is approaching the rear of

your vehicle rapidly

• When a towing eyelet is installed to the

rear of the vehicle.

• When backing up on a slope with a sharp

change in grade

• When backing out of a shallow angle

parking spot

• Immediately after the RCTA function is

turned on

• Immediately after the hybrid system is

started with the RCTA function on

• When the sensors cannot detect a vehi-

cle due to obstructions

●Instances of the RCTA function unneces-

sarily detecting a vehicle and/or object

may increase in the following situations:

• When a vehicle passes by the side of your

vehicle

• When the parking space faces a street

and vehicles are being driven on the

street

277

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

• When the distance between your vehicle

and metal objects, such as a guardrail,

wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may

reflect electrical waves toward the rear of

the vehicle, is short

• When a towing eyelet is installed to the

rear of the vehicle

*: If equipped

Pedestrian detection icon

Displayed automatically when a pedestrian

is detected.

RCD OFF icon

When the RCD function is disabled, the

RCD OFF icon illuminates. (Each time the

power switch is turned off then changed to

ON mode, the RCD function will be

enabled automatically.)

Use the meter control switches to

enable/disable the RCD function.

(→P.87)

1Press or to select .

RCD (Rear Camera Detec-

tion) function*

When the vehicle is backing up, the

rear camera detection function can

detect pedestrians in the detection

area behind the vehicle. If a pedes-

trian is detected, a buzzer will

sound and an icon will be displayed

on the Center Display to inform the

driver of the pedestrian.

Center Display

Turning the RCD function on/off

278 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2Press or to select “PKSA”

and then press .

3Press or to select “RCD”

and then press .

When the RCD function is disabled, the

RCD OFF icon (→P.72) illuminates on the

multi-information display.

If the rear camera detection function

detects a pedestrian in the detection

area, the buzzer and pedestrian detec-

tion will operate as follows:

If a pedestrian is detected in area

Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly

Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3

times and then stays on

If a pedestrian is detected in area

Buzzer (When the vehicle is sta-

tionary): Sounds 3 times

Buzzer (When the vehicle is back-

ing up, when a pedestrian

approaches the rear of the vehicle):

Sounds repeatedly

Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3

times and then stays on

If the system determines that your

vehicle may collide with a pedes-

trian in area

Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly

Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3

times and then stays on

■The rear camera detection function is

operational when

●The power switch is in ON mode.

●RCD function is on.

●The shift position is in R.

■Setting the buzzer volume

The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the

multi-information display. (→P.266)

■If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable

Remove the Dirt of Rear Camera” is dis-

played on the multi-information display

A rear camera lens may be dirty or covered

with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is

removed from the rear camera lens, the sys-

tem should return to normal. (It may be nec-

essary to drive the vehicle for some time

before the system returns to normal.)

■If “Rear Camera Detection Unavail-

able” is displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display

●If this message is displayed after the

12-volt battery has been disconnected

and reconnected, fully turn the steering

wheel to the left and then the right on

level ground.

●If this message is displayed only when the

R shift position is selected, the rear cam-

era lens may be dirty. Clean the rear

camera lens.

■Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

●Some pedestrians, such as the following,

may not be detected by the rear camera

detection function, preventing the func-

tion from operating properly:

When a pedestrian is detected

279

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or

squatting

• Pedestrians who are lying down

• Pedestrians who are running

• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the

detection area

• Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard,

or other light vehicle

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing

such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making

their silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians whose body is partially hid-

den by an object, such as a cart or

umbrella

• Pedestrians which are obscured by dark-

ness, such as at night

●In some situations, such as the following,

pedestrians may not be detected by the

rear camera detection function, prevent-

ing the function from operating properly:

• When backing up in inclement weather

(rain, snow, fog, etc.)

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,

snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• When a very bright light, such as the sun,

or the headlights of another vehicle,

shines directly into the rear camera

• When backing up in a place where the

surrounding brightness changes sud-

denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a

garage or underground parking lot

• When backing up in a dim environment

such as during dusk or in an underground

parking lot

●Even though there are no pedestrians in

the detection area, some objects, such as

the following, may be detected, possibly

causing the rear camera detection func-

tion to operate.

• Three dimensional objects, such as a

pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehi-

cle

• Moving objects, such as a car or motor-

cycle

• Objects moving toward your vehicle

when backing up, such as flags or pud-

dles (or airborne matter, such as smoke,

steam, rain, or snow)

• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails,

road repairs, white lines, pedestrian

crossings or fallen leaves on the road

• Metal covers (gratings), such as those

used for drainage ditches

• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet

road surface

• The roadside or bumps on the road

•Shadows on the road

●In some situations, such as the following,

the rear camera detection function may

operate even though there are no pedes-

trians in the detection area.

• When backing up toward the roadside or

a bump on the road

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as

when carrying a heavy load

• When backing up toward an

incline/decline

• If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

• If an electronic component, such as a

backlit license plate or rear fog light, is

installed near the rear camera

• If a bumper protector, such as an addi-

tional trim strip, is installed to the rear

bumper

• If the orientation of the rear camera has

been changed due to a collision or other

impact, or removal and installation

• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of

the vehicle

• When water is flowing over the rear cam-

era lens

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,

snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• If there is a flashing light in the detection

area, such as the emergency flashers of

another vehicle

●Situations in which the rear camera

detection function may be difficult to

notice

• If buzzer may be difficult to hear if the

surrounding area is noisy, the volume of

the audio system volume is high, the air

conditioning system is being used, etc.

• If the temperature in the cabin is

extremely high or low, the audio system

screen may not operate correctly.

280 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*:If equipped

■Parking Support Brake function

(static objects) (if equipped)

Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect

static objects, such as a wall, in the

detection area when driving at a low

speed or backing up. (→P.286)

■Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles)(if

equipped)

Rear radar sensors are used to detect

approaching vehicles in the detection

area behind the vehicle when backing

up. (→P.291)

■Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) (if equipped)

A rear camera sensor is used to detect

pedestrians in the detection area

behind the vehicle when backing up.

(→P.295)

PKSB (Parking Support

Brake)*

The Parking Support Brake system

consists of the following functions

that operate when driving at a low

speed or backing up, such as when

parking. When the system deter-

mines that a collision with a

detected object or pedestrian is

high, a warning operates to urge

the driver to take evasive action. If

the system determines that the pos-

sibility of a collision with a detected

object or pedestrian is extremely

high, the brakes are automatically

applied to help avoid the collision or

help reduce the impact of the colli-

sion.

PKSB (Parking Support Brake)

system

WARNING

■Limitations of the Parking Support

Brake system

Do not overly rely on the system, as

doing so may lead to an accident.

●The driver is solely responsible for safe

driving. Always drive carefully, taking

care to observe your surroundings.

The Parking Support Brake system is

designed to provide support to lessen

the severity of collisions. However, it

may not operate in some situations.

●The Parking Support Brake system is

not designed to stop the vehicle com-

pletely. Additionally, even if the system

has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary

to depress the brake pedal immedi-

ately as brake control will be canceled

after approximately 2 seconds.

NOTICE

■If “Parking Support Brake Unavail-

able” is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display and the PKSB OFF

indicator is flashing

If this message is displayed immediately

after the power switch is changed to ON

mode, operate the vehicle carefully, pay-

ing attention to your surroundings. It may

be necessary to drive the vehicle for a

certain amount of time before the system

returns to normal. (If the system is not

return to normal after driving for a while,

clean the rear camera lens.)

281

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

The Parking Support Brake can be

enabled/disabled on the multi-informa-

tion display. All of the Parking Support

Brake functions (static objects,

rear-crossing vehicles, and rear pedes-

trians) are enabled/disabled simultane-

ously.

Use the meter control switches to

enable/disable the parking support

brake. (→P.87)

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select

and then press .

When the Parking Support Brake is dis-

abled, the PKSB OFF indicator (→P.72)

illuminates on the multi-information dis-

play.

To re-enable the system when it was dis-

abled, select on the multi-information

display, select and then On. If dis-

abled using this method, the system will not

be re-enabled by turning the power switch

off and then to ON mode.

If the hybrid system output restriction con-

trol or brake control operates, a buzzer will

sound and a message will be displayed on

the Center Display and multi-information

display, to alert the driver. On vehicles with

a head-up display, the head-up display will

display the same message as the

multi-information display.

Depending on the situation, hybrid system

output restriction control will operate to

either limit acceleration or restrict output

as much as possible.

-Hybrid system output restriction

control is operating (acceleration

restriction)

Acceleration greater than a certain

amount is restricted by the system.

Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):

No warning displayed

Multi-information display: “Object

Detected Acceleration Reduced”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Does not sound

-Hybrid system output restriction

control is operating (output

restricted as much as possible)

The system has determined that stron-

ger-than-normal brake operation is neces-

sary.

Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):

“BRAKE!”

Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

-Brake control is operating

The system determined that emergency

braking is necessary.

Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):

“BRAKE!”

Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”

PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

-Vehicle stopped by system opera-

tion

The vehicle has been stopped by brake

control operation.

Enabling/Disabling the Parking

Support Brake

Displays and buzzers for hybrid

system output restriction con-

trol and brake control

282 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):

“Press Brake Pedal”

Multi-information display: “Switch to

Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is not

depressed, “Press Brake Pedal” will be dis-

played.)

PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated

Buzzer: Short beep

If the Parking Support Brake determines that a collision with a detected object or

pedestrian is possible, the hybrid system output will be restricted to restrain any

increase in the vehicle speed. (Hybrid system output restriction control: See figure

2 below.)

Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be

applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See figure 3

below.)

-Figure 1 When the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) is disabled

Hybrid system output

Braking force

Time

-Figure 2 When hybrid system output restriction control operates

System overview

283

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Hybrid system output

Braking force

Time

Hybrid system output restriction control begins operating

System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high

Hybrid system output reduced

Example: Multi-infomation display:

“BRAKE!”

-Figure 3 When brake control operates

Hybrid system output

Braking force

Time

284 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Hybrid system output restriction control begins operating

System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high

Hybrid system output reduced

System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is extremely

high

Brake control begins operating

Brake control strength increased

Example: Multi-infomation display:

“BRAKE!”

Example: Multi-infomation display: “Switch to Brake”

■If the Parking Support Brake has oper-

ated

If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of

the Parking Support Brake, the Parking

Support Brake will be disabled and the

PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the

Parking Support Brake operates unneces-

sarily, brake control can be canceled by

depressing the brake pedal or waiting for

approximately 2 seconds for it to automati-

cally be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be

operated by depressing the accelerator

pedal.

■Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake

To re-enable the Parking Support Brake

when it is disabled due to operation of the

Parking Support Brake, either enable the

system again (→P.281), or turn the power

switch off and then back to ON mode.

Additionally, if the object becomes no lon-

ger in the traveling direction of the vehicle

or if the traveling direction of the vehicle

changes (such as changing from moving

forward to backing up, or from backing up

to moving forward), the system will be

re-enabled automatically.

■If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable”

is displayed on the multi-information

display and the PKSB OFF indicator is

flashing

If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of

the Parking Support Brake, the Parking

Support Brake will be disabled and the

PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate.

●A sensor may be covered with ice, snow,

dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc.,

from the sensor to return the system to

normal.

Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at

low temperatures, a warning message

may be displayed or the sensor may not

be able to detect an object. Once the ice

melts, the system will return to normal.

●If this message is displayed only when the

R shift position is selected, the rear cam-

era lens may be dirty. Clean the camera

lens. If this message is displayed in any

forward shift position , a sensor on the

front or rear bumper may be dirty. Clean

the sensors and their surrounding area

on the bumpers.

●If this message continues to be displayed

even after cleaning the sensor, or is dis-

played even though the sensor is clean,

have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

●Initialization may not have been per-

formed after a 12-volt battery terminal

was disconnected and reconnected. Ini-

tialize the system. (→P.284)

If this message continues to be displayed

even after initialization, have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■If a 12-volt battery terminal has been

disconnected and reconnected

The system needs to be initialized. To initial-

ize the system, drive the vehicle straight

ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of

approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more.

285

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Additionally, for vehicles with the Parking

Support Brake function, turn the steering

wheel fully to the left and right with the vehi-

cle stopped.

286 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*:If equipped

This function will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected

in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is

depressed late

Parking Support Brake function (static objects)*

If the sensors detect a static object, such as a wall, in the travelling direction of

the vehicle and the system determines that a collision may occur due to the

vehicle suddenly moving forward due to an accidental accelerator pedal oper-

ation, the vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong shift posi-

tion being selected, or while parking or traveling at low speeds, the system will

operate to lessen the impact with the detected static object and reduce the

resulting damage.

Examples of function operation

287

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively

■When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to the wrong shift

position being selected

→P.266

Types of sensors

WARNING

■To ensure the Parking Support Brake

can operate properly

Observe the following precautions

regarding the sensors (→P.287). Failure

to do so may cause a sensor to not oper-

ate properly, and may cause an accident.

●Do not modify, disassemble or paint

the sensors.

●Do not replace a sensor with a part

other than a genuine part.

●Do not subject a sensor or its sur-

rounding area to a strong impact.

●Do not damage the sensors, and

always keep them clean.

288 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■The Parking Support Brake function

(static object) will operate when

The function will operate when the PKSB

OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing

(→P.73, 74) and all of the following condi-

tions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or

less.

• There is a static object in the traveling

direction of the vehicle and 6 to 13 ft. (2

to 4 m) away.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that a stronger-than-normal brake opera-

tion is necessary to avoid a collision.

●Brake control

• Hybrid system output restriction control

is operating.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that an immediate brake operation is nec-

essary to avoid a collision.

■The Parking Support Brake function

(static objects) will stop operating when

The function will stop operating if any of the

following conditions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• The system determines that the collision

has become avoidable with normal brake

operation.

WARNING

●If the area around a radar sensor is

subjected to an impact, the system

may not operate properly due to a

sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Handling the suspension

Do not modify the suspension, as

changes to the height or inclination of the

vehicle may prevent the sensors from

detecting objects correctly or cause the

system to not operate or operate unnec-

essarily.

■If the Parking Support Brake function

(static objects) operates unnecessar-

ily, such as at a railroad crossing

In the event that the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) operates

unnecessarily, such as at a railroad cross-

ing, brake control will be canceled after

approximately 2 seconds, allowing you

to proceed forward and leave the area,

brake control can also be canceled by

depressing the brake pedal. Depressing

the accelerator pedal after brake control

is canceled will allow you to proceed for-

ward and leave the area.

■Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or

steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor mal-

functioning.

●When using a high pressure washer to

wash the vehicle, do not spray the sen-

sors directly, as doing so may cause a

sensor to malfunction.

●When using steam to clean the vehicle,

do not direct steam too close to the

sensors as doing so may cause a sen-

sor to malfunction.

■When to disable the Parking Support

Brake

In the following situations, disable the

Parking Support Brake as the system

may operate even though there is no

possibility of a collision.

●When inspecting the vehicle using a

chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free

roller

●When loading the vehicle onto a boat,

truck or other transport vessel

●If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

●If the front of the vehicle is raised or

lowered due to the carried load

●When equipment that may obstruct a

sensor is installed, such as a towing

eyelet, bumper protector (an addi-

tional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or

snow plow

289

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

• The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2

to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the

traveling direction of the vehicle.

●Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed

since the vehicle was stopped by brake

control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the

vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2

to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the

traveling direction of the vehicle.

■Detection range of the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects)

The detection range of the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) differs from

the detection range of the intuitive parking

assist. (→P.270) Therefore, even if the intui-

tive parking assist detects an object and

provides a warning, the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) may not start

operating.

■Objects that the Parking Support Brake

function (static objects) may not detect

The sensors may not be able to detect cer-

tain objects, such as the following:

●Pedestrian

●Cotton cloth, snow, and other materials

that are poor reflectors of ultrasonic

waves

●Objects which are not perpendicular to

the ground, are not perpendicular to the

traveling direction of the vehicle, are

uneven or are waving

●Low objects

●Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes

and signposts

●Objects that are extremely close to the

bumper

■Intuitive parking assist buzzer

Regardless of whether the intuitive parking

assist system is enabled or not (→P.267), if

the Parking Support Brake function (static

objects) is enabled (→P.281), the front or

rear sensors detect an object and brake

control is performed, the intuitive parking

assist buzzer will sound to notify the driver

of the approximate distance to the object.

■Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) may

operate even if there is no possibility of a

collision

In some situations, such as the following, the

Parking Support Brake function (static

objects) may operate even though there is

no possibility of a collision.

●Vehicle surroundings

• When driving on a narrow road

• When driving on a gravel road or in an

area with tall grass

• When driving toward a banner, flag,

low-hanging branch or boom barrier

(such as those used at railroad crossings,

toll gates and parking lots)

• When driving on a narrow path sur-

rounded by a structure, such as in a tun-

nel or on an iron bridge

• When parallel parking

• When there is a rut or hole in the surface

of the road

• When driving on a metal cover (grating),

such as those used for drainage ditches

• When driving on a steep slope

• If a sensor is hit by a large amount of

water, such as when driving on a flooded

road

290 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

●Weather

• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt,

etc. (when cleared, the system will return

to normal)

• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor

• When driving in inclement weather such

as fog, snow or a sandstorm

●Other ultrasonic wave sources

• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors,

motorcycle engines, air brakes of large

vehicles, the clearance sonar of other

vehicles or other devices which produce

ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle

• If a sticker or an electronic component,

such as a backlit license plate (especially

fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole

or wireless antenna is installed near a

sensor

●Changes in the vehicle posture

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

• If the orientation of a sensor has been

changed due to a collision or other

impact

■Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (static objects) may not

operate properly

In some situations, such as the following, this

function may not operate properly.

●Weather

• When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is extremely hot or cold

• When strong winds are blowing

• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt,

etc. (when cleared, the system will return

to normal)

• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor

• When driving in inclement weather such

as fog, snow or a sandstorm

●Vehicle surroundings

• When an object that cannot be detected

is between the vehicle and a detected

object

• If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle,

bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the

vehicle or runs out from the side of the

vehicle

●Other ultrasonic waves sources

• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors,

motorcycle engines, air brakes of large

vehicles, the clearance sonar of other

vehicles or other devices which produce

ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle

• If a sticker or an electronic component,

such as a backlit license plate (especially

fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole

or wireless antenna is installed near a

sensor

●Changes in the vehicle posture

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

• If the orientation of a sensor has been

changed due to a collision or other

impact

291

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

*:If equipped

This function will operate in situations such as the following if a vehicle is detected

in the traveling direction of the vehicle.

■When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal is not

depressed, or is depressed late

→P.262

Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)*

If a rear radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the

rear of the vehicle and the system determines that the possibility of a collision

is high, this function will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an

impact with the approaching vehicle.

Examples of function operation

Types of sensors

WARNING

Observe the following precautions

regarding the rear radar sensors

(→P.262). Failure to do so may cause a

sensor to not operate properly, and may

cause an accident.

●Do not modify, disassemble or paint

the sensors.

●Do not replace a rear radar sensor

with a part other than a genuine part.

●Do not damage the rear radar sensors,

and always keep the radar sensors and

their surrounding area on the bumper

clean.

■To prevent a rear radar sensor from

malfunctioning

●If the area around a rear radar sensor

is subjected to an impact, the system

may not operate properly due to a

sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

292 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) will operate

when

The function will operate when the PKSB

OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing

(→P.73, 74) and all of the following condi-

tions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or

less.

• Vehicles which are approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a

traveling speed of less than approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h)

• The shift position is in R.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that a stronger than normal brake opera-

tion is necessary to avoid a collision with

an approaching vehicle.

●Brake control

• Hybrid system output restriction control

is operating.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that an emergency brake operation is

necessary to avoid a collision with an

approaching vehicle.

■The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operat-

ing when

The function will stop operating if any of the

following conditions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• The collision becomes avoidable with

normal brake operation.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching from

the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

●Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed

since the vehicle was stopped by brake

control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the

vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• A vehicle is no longer approaching from

the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.

■Detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)

The detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) dif-

fers from the detection area of the RCTA

function (→P.275). Therefore, even if the

RCTA function detects a vehicle and pro-

vides an alert, the Parking Support Brake

function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not

start operating.

■Conditions under which the Parking

Support Brake function (rear-crossing

vehicles) will not detect a vehicle

The Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) is not designed to

detect the following types of vehicles and/or

objects:

●Vehicles approaching from directly

behind

●Vehicles backing up in a parking space

next to your vehicle

●Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect

due to obstructions

●Vehicles which suddenly accelerate or

decelerate near your vehicle

●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles

and similar stationary objects

●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,

etc.

●Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

●Vehicles approaching from the parking

spaces next to your vehicle

●Objects which are extremely close to a

radar sensor

●Vehicles which are approaching from the

WARNING

●Observe the rear radar sensor han-

dling precautions. (→P.281)

293

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a

traveling speed of less than approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h)

●Vehicles which are approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a

traveling speed of more than approxi-

mately 15 mph (24 km/h)

■PKSB buzzer

If the Parking Support Brake is enabled and

brake control is performed, a buzzer will

sound to notify the driver.

■Situations in which the system may

operate even though there is no possi-

bility of a collision

In some situations such as the following, the

Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) may operate even

though there is no possibility of a collision.

●When the parking space faces a street

and vehicles are being driven on the

street

●When a detected vehicle turns while

approaching the vehicle

●When a vehicle passes by the side of your

vehicle

●When the distance between your vehicle

and metal objects, such as a guardrail,

wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may

reflect electrical waves toward the rear of

the vehicle, is short

●When there are spinning objects near

your vehicle such as the fan of an air con-

ditioning unit

●When water is splashed or sprayed

toward the rear bumper, such as from a

sprinkler

■Situations in which the Parking Support

Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)

may not operate properly

In some situations, such as the following, the

radar sensors may not detect an object and

this function may not operate properly

●Stationary objects

●When a sensor or the area around a sen-

sor is extremely hot or cold

●If the rear bumper is covered with ice,

snow, dirt, etc.

●When it is raining heavily or water strikes

the vehicle

●If the vehicle is significantly tilted

●When equipment that may obstruct a

sensor is installed, such as a towing eye-

294 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

let, bumper protector (an additional trim

strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow

●If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

●If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

●If a sticker or an electronic component,

such as a backlit license plate (especially

fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole

or wireless antenna is installed near a

radar sensor

●If the orientation of a radar sensor has

been changed

●When multiple vehicles are approaching

with only a small gap between each vehi-

cle

●If a vehicle is approaching the rear of

your vehicle rapidly

●Situations in which the radar sensor may

not detect a vehicle

• When a vehicle approaches from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle while

you are turning while backing up

• When turning while backing up

• When backing out of a shallow angle

parking spot

• When backing up on a slope with a sharp

change in grade

• When a vehicle turns into the detection

area

295

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

*:If equipped

When a pedestrian is detected behind the vehicle while backing up, the brake

pedal is not depressed or is depressed late.

Displays a message to urge the driver

to take evasive action when a pedes-

trian is detected in the detection area

behind the vehicle. (A message will

also be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display and head-up display (if

equipped).) Pedestrian detection icon with

brake reminder

Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians)*

If the rear camera sensor detects a pedestrian behind the vehicle while back-

ing up and the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the

detected pedestrian is high, a buzzer will sound. If the system determines that

the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is extremely high, the

brakes will be applied automatically to help reduce the impact of the collision.

Examples of system operation

Center Display

296 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians) will operate when

The function will operate when the PKSB

OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing

(→P.73, 74) and all of the following condi-

tions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.

• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or

less.

• The shift position is in R.

• The rear camera sensor detects a pedes-

trian behind the vehicle while backing up

and the system determines that the possi-

bility of colliding with the detected

pedestrian is high.

●Brake control

• Hybrid system output restriction control

is operating.

• The Parking Support Brake determines

that an emergency brake operation is

necessary to avoid a collision with a

pedestrians.

■The Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) will stop operating

when

The function will stop operating if any of the

following conditions are met:

●Hybrid system output restriction control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• The collision becomes avoidable with

normal brake operation.

• The pedestrian is no longer detected

behind your vehicle.

●Brake control

• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.

• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed

since the vehicle was stopped by brake

control.

• The brake pedal is depressed after the

vehicle is stopped by brake control.

• The pedestrian is no longer detected

behind your vehicle.

■Detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear pedestrians)

The detection area of the Parking Support

Brake function (rear pedestrians) differs

from the detection area of the RCD func-

tion (→P.278). Therefore, even if the RCD

function detects a vehicle and provides an

alert, the Parking Support Brake function

(rear-crossing vehicles) may not start oper-

ating.

■Situations in which the system may not

operate properly

●Some pedestrians, such as the following,

may not be detected by the Parking Sup-

port Brake function (rear pedestrians),

preventing the function from operating

properly:

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or

squatting

• Pedestrians who are lying down

• Pedestrians who are running

• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the

detection area

• Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard,

or other light vehicle

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing

such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making

their silhouette obscure

• Pedestrians whose body is partially hid-

den by an object, such as a cart or

umbrella

• Pedestrians which are obscured by dark-

ness, such as at night

●In some situations, such as the following,

pedestrians may not be detected by the

Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians), preventing the function

from operating properly:

• When backing up in inclement weather

(rain, snow, fog, etc.)

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,

snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• When a very bright light, such as the sun,

or the headlights of another vehicle,

shines directly into the rear camera

• When backing up in a place where the

surrounding brightness changes sud-

WARNING

■If the Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) operates unneces-

sarily

Depress the brake pedal immediately

after the Parking Support Brake function

(rear pedestrians) operates. (Operation

of the function is canceled by depressing

the brake pedal.)

297

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a

garage or underground parking lot

• When backing up in a dim environment

such as during dusk or in an underground

parking lot

●Even though there are no pedestrians in

the detection area, some objects, such as

the following, may be detected, possibly

causing the Parking Support Brake func-

tion (rear pedestrians) to operate.

• Three dimensional objects, such as a

pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehi-

cle

• Moving objects, such as a car or motor-

cycle

• Objects moving toward your vehicle

when backing up, such as flags or pud-

dles (or airborne matter, such as smoke,

steam, rain, or snow)

• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails,

road repairs, white lines, pedestrian

crossings or fallen leaves on the road

• Metal covers (gratings), such as those

used for drainage ditches

• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet

road surface

• The roadside or bumps on the road

•Shadows on the road

●In some situations, such as the following,

the Parking Support Brake function (rear

pedestrians) may operate even though

there are no pedestrians in the detection

area.

• When backing up toward the roadside or

a bump on the road

• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as

when carrying a heavy load

• When backing up toward an

incline/decline

• If the suspension has been modified or

tires of a size other than specified are

installed

• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered due to the carried load

• If an electronic component, such as a

backlit license plate or rear fog light, is

installed near the rear camera

• If a bumper protector, such as an addi-

tional trim strip, is installed to the rear

bumper

• If the orientation of the rear camera has

been changed due to a collision or other

impact, or removal and installation

• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of

the vehicle

• When water is flowing over the rear cam-

era lens

• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt,

snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched

• If there is a flashing light in the detection

area, such as the emergency flashers of

another vehicle

298 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Except F SPORT models

F SPORT models

1Normal mode/Custom mode

Normal mode and custom mode are

selected by pressing the driving mode

select switch. Each time the switch is

pressed, the driving mode changes

between normal mode and custom mode.

When normal mode is selected, the normal

mode indicator comes on.

When custom mode is selected, the cus-

tom mode indicator comes on.

Press the switch to change the driving

mode to normal mode when not in normal

mode.

•Normal mode

Provides an optimal balance of fuel econ-

omy, quietness, and dynamic performance.

Suitable for city driving.

When the shift position is in D, an appropri-

ate gear for sporty driving may automati-

cally be selected according to driver

performance and driving conditions.

• Custom mode

Allows you to drive with the powertrain,

chassis and air conditioning system func-

tions set to your preferred settings. Cus-

tom mode settings can only be changed on

the drive mode customization display of

the Center Display. (→P.316)

2Comfort mode

By controlling the suspension, riding com-

fort is further enhanced. Suitable for city

driving.

When not in comfort mode and the driving

mode select switch is turned backward, the

comfort mode indicator comes on.

3Eco drive mode

Helps the driver accelerate in an

eco-friendly manner and improve fuel

economy through moderate throttle char-

acteristics and by controlling the operation

of the air conditioning system (heat-

ing/cooling).

When in comfort mode, if the driving mode

select switch is turned backward, the Eco

drive mode indicator comes on.

4Sport mode

• Sport S mode

Controls the hybrid system to provide

quick, powerful acceleration. This mode is

suitable for when agile driving response is

desired, such as when driving on roads

with many curves.

When not in Sport S mode, if the driving

mode select switch is turned forward, the

Sport S mode indicator comes on.

•Sport S+ mode

Driving mode select switch

The driving modes can be selected

to suit driving condition.

Selecting a drive mode

299

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Helps to ensure steering performance and

driving stability by simultaneously con-

trolling the steering and suspension in

addition to the hybrid system. Suitable for

sportier driving.

When in Sport S mode, if the driving mode

select switch is turned forward, the Sport

S+ mode indicator comes on.

■If the driving mode select switch is oper-

ated while the opening screen is being

displayed

If the driving mode select switch is operated

while the opening screen is being displayed,

the driving mode will be changed and the

meter display will change accordingly after

the opening screen operation has com-

pleted.

■Operation of the air conditioning sys-

tem in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cool-

ing operations and fan speed of the air con-

ditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency.

To improve air conditioning performance,

perform the following operations:

●Turn off eco air conditioning mode

(→P.327)

●Adjust the fan speed (→P.323)

●Turn off Eco drive mode

■Automatic deactivation of sport mode

and custom mode

If the power switch is turned off after driving

in sport mode or custom mode, the drive

mode will be changed to normal mode.

■Driving mode pop-up display

When the driving mode is changed, the

selected driving mode will be temporarily

displayed on the side display. (→P.317)

*: If equipped

■Situations in which the vehicle height

control may not operate properly

●In the following situations, the vehicle

height may change slowly or may not

change to the correct height:

• When the vehicle comes into contact

with snow, ice, stone, etc.

• When the ambient temperature is low

• When the accumulator tank pressure is

low

●In the following situations, the vehicle

height may not change:

• If the hood or trunk is not fully closed

• If the brake pedal depressed and the

vehicle is stopped

• When the vehicle is on a significantly

uneven or undulating road

• When the vehicle is on a slanted road or a

slope

■Operating sound of the air suspension

compressor and valves

When the vehicle height is changed, such

as due to passengers entering the vehicle or

cargo being loaded, or when the vehicle

height is changed using the vehicle height

adjustment switch, the air suspension com-

pressor and valves may operate and a

sound may be heard. This does not indicate

Electronically modulated air

suspension*

The height of the vehicle when driv-

ing can be selected using the vehi-

cle height adjustment switch. The

selected height level will be main-

tained regardless of the number of

passengers or weight of cargo.

Additionally, settings of the follow-

ing functions can be changed:

-Access mode control

-Parking height control

-Vehicle height control

300 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

a malfunction.

■When the accumulator tank pressure is

low

When the accumulator tank pressure is low,

the air suspension compressor and valves

may operate repeatedly even though the

vehicle height is not being changed. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

To adjust the vehicle height to one

appropriate for road and driving con-

ditions, press the vehicle height adjust-

ment switch.

When high mode is enabled, the high

mode indicator on the meter will illuminate.

When the vehicle height is increased by

the access mode control function, press

the vehicle height adjustment switch twice

to enable/disable high mode.

■The vehicle height adjustment switch

can be changed when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■System protection function

If the vehicle height is repeatedly increased

WARNING

■Situations in which the operation of

the electronically modulated air sus-

pension should be canceled

In the following situations, make sure to

disable all functions of the vehicle height

control of the electronically modulated

air suspension and then stopping the

hybrid system. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may change and part of your body

may be caught under the vehicle, possi-

bly causing injury.

●When the vehicle is parked on a curb

●If any of the wheels is not touching the

ground

●If the vehicle needs to be jacked up

●If the vehicle is to be tied down

●If the vehicle is to be towed

■Vehicle height control precautions

In the following situations, make sure to

check the safety of the area around the

vehicle, as the vehicle height may change

and part of someone’s body may be

caught in the vehicle, possibly causing

injury or the vehicle may be damaged.

●When opening a door

●When unlocking the doors using the

smart access system with push-button

start

●When changing the vehicle height

using the vehicle height adjustment

switch

NOTICE

■Parking precaution

If the vehicle is parked for a long time, the

vehicle height may change due to

changes in the ambient temperature.

When parking the vehicle, make sure

that the area above and below the vehi-

cle is clear, so that the vehicle will not

contact anything if its height changes.

Be careful when parking the vehicle in an

area with a low ceiling or near low hang-

ing objects, as the vehicle height will

increase when passengers exit the vehi-

cle and the access mode control oper-

ates.

Selecting the vehicle height

301

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

and decreased using the vehicle height

adjustment switch, etc., the system may not

operate temporarily.

The following settings can be changed

using the meter control switches for

the easy access to the vehicle. (→P.87)

1Press or to select .

2Press or to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press .

3Press or to select

and then press .

4Press or to select “Access

Mode” or “Select Parking Height”

and then press .

These settings are memorized even if the

power switch is turned off.

-Access mode control (“Access

Mode”)

When access mode control is enabled, the

vehicle height will increase automatically in

the following situations:

• When the doors are unlocked using the

smart access system with push-button

start

• When the doors are unlocked using the

wireless remote control and then a door

is opened.

The vehicle height will increase by approxi-

mately 1.2 in. (30 mm) from its normal

position.

The vehicle height may not increase, if the

vehicle height already reaches the

selected height.

The vehicle will return to its normal height

when the vehicle speed reaches approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h).

When access mode control is disabled, the

parking height control will also be disabled.

-Parking height control (“Select

Parking Height”)

When “High” is selected, the vehicle height

will automatically increase when the P shift

position is selected and a door is opened.

The vehicle height will increase by approxi-

mately 0.4 in. (10 mm) from its normal

position.

The vehicle height may not increase, if the

vehicle height already reaches the

selected height.

The vehicle will return to its normal height

when the vehicle speed reaches approxi-

mately 12 mph (20 km/h).

■When the vehicle height has been

increased by the access mode control

function

Press the vehicle height adjustment switch

with the power switch in any mode to return

the vehicle to its previous vehicle height.

■Situations in which the access mode

control function will not operate

The access mode control function will not

operate if the vehicle is not parked on a

level road surface.

The vehicle height control functions

can be disabled using the meter con-

trol switches. (→P.87)

1Press or to select .

Changing setting of the access

mode control and parking height

control

Disabling the vehicle height con-

trol functions

302 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2Press or to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press .

3Press or to select

and then press .

4Press or to select “Height

Control” and then press .

This setting is memorized even if the power

switch is turned off.

Even if the vehicle height control func-

tions are disabled, they will be enabled

automatically when the vehicle speed

reaches approximately 19 mph (30

km/h).

■When “Check Air Suspension System”

is displayed on the multi-information

display

The system may not operate properly. Have

the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

■ECB (Electronically Controlled

Brake System)

The electronically controlled system

generates braking force correspond-

ing to the brake operation

■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the

brakes are applied suddenly, or if the

brakes are applied while driving on a

slippery road surface

■Brake assist

Generates an increased level of brak-

ing force after the brake pedal is

depressed when the system detects a

panic stop situation

■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding

when swerving suddenly or turning on

slippery road surfaces.

■Secondary Collision Brake

When the airbag sensor detects a colli-

sion, the brakes and brake lights are

automatically controlled to reduce the

Driving assist systems

To keep driving safety and perfor-

mance, the following systems oper-

ate automatically in response to

various driving situations. Be aware,

however, that these systems are

supplementary and should not be

relied upon too heavily when oper-

ating the vehicle.

Summary of the driving assist

systems

303

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

vehicle speed and that helps reduce

the possibility of further damage due to

a secondary collision.

■TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and pre-

vent the drive wheels from spinning

when starting the vehicle or accelerat-

ing on slippery roads

■Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward move-

ment of the vehicle when starting on an

uphill

■VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steer-

ing) (if equipped)

Adjusts the front wheel turning angle in

accordance with the vehicle speed and

steering wheel movement

■DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering) (if

equipped)

Contributes to the turning characteris-

tics and responsiveness of the vehicle

by adjusting the rear wheel angle of the

vehicle in accordance with steering

wheel movement.

■EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce

the amount of effort needed to turn the

steering wheel.

■Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-

tem

By independently controlling the

damping force of the shock absorbers

for each of the 4 wheels according to

the road and driving conditions, this

system helps riding comfort with supe-

rior vehicle stability, and helps good

vehicle posture.

Also, the damping force changes

depending on the selected driving

mode. (→P.298)

■LDH (Lexus Dynamic Handling

system) (if equipped)

Provides integrated control of the

VGRS, DRS and EPS. Contributes to

turning characteristics at low speeds,

responsiveness at medium speeds and

safety at high speeds by controlling the

steering angle of the front and rear

wheels in accordance with the steering

wheel operation and vehicle speed.

■VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Inte-

grated Management)

Provides integrated control of the

ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC,

hill-start assist control, EPS, VGRS (if

equipped), DRS (if equipped) and

Adaptive Variable Suspension System

Helps to maintain vehicle stability when

swerving on slippery road surfaces by

controlling the brakes, hybrid system

output, steering assist, and steering

ratio

■When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are

operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the

TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.

304 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow,

the TRAC system may reduce power from

the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing

the switch to turn the system off may

make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in

order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press

and release the switch.

The “Traction Control Turned Off” will be

shown on the multi-information display.

Press the switch again to turn the sys-

tem back on.

■Disabling both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off,

press and hold the switch for more

than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will come on

and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will

be shown on the multi-information display.*

Press the switch again to turn the sys-

tem back on.

*: On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision

System), PCS will also be disabled (only

Pre-Collision warning is available). The

PCS warning light will come on and a

message will be displayed on the

multi-information display. (→P.219,

226)

■When the message is displayed on the

multi-information display showing that

TRAC has been disabled even if the

switch has not been pressed

TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your

Lexus dealer.

■Operating conditions of hill-start assist

control

When the following four conditions are met,

the hill-start assist control will operate:

●The shift position is in a position other

than P or N (when stating off for-

ward/backward on an upward incline)

●The vehicle is stopped

●The accelerator pedal is not depressed

●The parking brake is not engaged

■Automatic system cancelation of

hill-start assist control

The hill-start assist control will turn off in any

of the following situations:

●Shift the shift position to P or N

●The accelerator pedal is depressed

●The parking brake is engaged

●2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the

brake pedal is released

■VGRS is disabled when

VGRS may stop operating in the following

situations.

In this event, the steering wheel may move

from its straight forward position, but it will

return when the system restarts.

●When the steering wheel is operated for

an extended period of time while the

vehicle is stopped or is moving very

slowly (on vehicles with LDH, DRS is dis-

abled together with VGRS)

●When the steering wheel has been held

fully to the left or right

The center position of the steering wheel

may change when VGRS is disabled. How-

ever, the position will return to normal after

VGRS is reactivated.

■When the 12-volt battery is discon-

nected (vehicles with VGRS)

The steering wheel may move from its

straight forward position, but this will be

corrected automatically when driving.

305

4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

■Sounds and vibrations caused by the

ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, hill-start

assist control and VGRS systems

●A sound may be heard from the engine

compartment when the brake pedal is

depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid

system is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This sound does not indi-

cate that a malfunction has occurred in

any of these systems.

●Any of the following conditions may

occur when the above systems are oper-

ating. None of these indicates that a mal-

function has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle

body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard also after

the vehicle comes to a stop.

■ECB operating sound

ECB operating sound may be heard in the

following cases, but it does not indicate that

a malfunction has occurred.

●Operating sound heard from the engine

compartment when the brake pedal is

operated.

●Motor sound of the brake system heard

from the front part of the vehicle when

the driver’s door is opened.

●Operating sound heard from the engine

compartment when one or two minutes

passed after the stop of the hybrid sys-

tem.

■EPS, VGRS and DRS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a

motor sound (whirring sound) may be

heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and

VSC systems

After turning the TRAC and VSC systems

off, the systems will be automatically

re-enabled in the following situations:

●When the power switch is turned off

●If only the TRAC system is turned off, the

TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed

increases

If both the TRAC and VSC systems are

turned off, automatic re-enabling will not

occur when vehicle speed increases.

■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS sys-

tem

The effectiveness of the EPS system is

reduced to prevent the system from over-

heating when there is frequent steering

input over an extended period of time. The

steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.

Should this occur, refrain from excessive

steering input or stop the vehicle and turn

the hybrid system off. The EPS system

should return to normal within 10 minutes.

■Secondary Collision Brake operating

conditions

The vehicle speed is approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h) or more and the airbag sensor

detects a collision. (The Secondary Colli-

sion Brake will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph [10

km/h].)

■Secondary Collision Brake automatic

cancellation

The Secondary Collision Brake is automati-

cally canceled in the following situations:

●The vehicle speed drops below approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h)

●A certain amount of time elapses during

operation

●The accelerator pedal is depressed a

large amount

■When “Check VGRS System” or

“CHECK DRS” is displayed on the

multi-information display

The VGRS or DRS may not operate prop-

erly. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■The ABS does not operate effectively

when

●The limits of tire gripping performance

have been exceeded (such as exces-

sively worn tires on a snow covered

road).

●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving

at high speed on wet or slick roads.

306 4-5. Using the driving support systems

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

■Stopping distance when the ABS is

operating may exceed that of normal

conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the

vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-

tain a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you, especially in the following

situations:

●When driving on dirt, gravel or

snow-covered roads

●When driving with tire chains

●When driving over bumps in the road

●When driving over roads with potholes

or uneven surfaces

■TRAC/VSC may not operate effec-

tively when

Directional control and power may not

be achievable while driving on slippery

road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC

system is operating. Drive the vehicle

carefully in conditions where stability and

power may be lost.

■Hill-start assist control does not oper-

ate effectively when

●Do not overly rely on hill-start assist

control. Hill-start assist control may

not operate effectively on steep

inclines and roads covered with ice.

●Unlike the parking brake, hill-start

assist control is not intended to hold

the vehicle stationary for an extended

period of time. Do not attempt to use

hill-start assist control to hold the vehi-

cle on an incline, as doing so may lead

to an accident.

■When the TRAC/ABS/VSC is acti-

vated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always

drive carefully. Reckless driving may

cause an accident. Exercise particular

care when the indicator light flashes.

■When the TRAC/VSC systems are

turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed

appropriate to the road conditions. As

these are the systems to help ensure

vehicle stability and driving force, do not

turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless

necessary.

■Secondary Collision Brake

Do not overly rely on the Secondary Col-

lision Brake. This system is designed to

help reduce the possibility of further

damage due to a secondary collision,

however, that effect changes according

to various conditions. Overly relying on

the system may result in death or serious

injury.

■Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the speci-

fied size, brand, tread pattern and total

load capacity. In addition, make sure that

the tires are inflated to the recom-

mended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will

not function correctly if different tires are

installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further

information when replacing tires or

wheels.

■Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or

modifying the suspension will affect the

driving assist systems, and may cause a

system to malfunction.

307

4-6. Driving tips

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

4-6.Driving t ips

When using Eco drive mode, the

torque corresponding to the accelera-

tor pedal depression amount can be

generated more smoothly than it is in

normal conditions. In addition, the

operation of the air conditioning sys-

tem (heating/cooling) will be mini-

mized, improving the fuel economy.

(→P.298)

The Eco-friendly driving is possible by

keeping the indicate of Hybrid System

Indicator within Eco area. (→P.78, 83)

Shift the shift position to D when

stopped at a traffic light, or driving in

heavy traffic etc. Shift the shift position

to P when parking. When using the N

position, there is no positive effect on

fuel consumption. In the N position, the

gasoline engine operates but electric-

ity cannot be generated. Also, when

using the air conditioning system, etc.,

the hybrid battery (traction battery)

power is consumed.

-Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid

abrupt acceleration and decelera-

tion. Gradual acceleration and

deceleration will make more effec-

tive use of the electric motor (trac-

tion motor) without having to use

gasoline engine power.

-Avoid repeated acceleration.

Repeated acceleration consumes

hybrid battery (traction battery)

power, resulting in poor fuel con-

sumption. Battery power can be

restored by driving with the acceler-

ator pedal slightly released.

Make sure to operate the brakes gently

and in a timely manner. A greater

amount of electrical energy can be

regenerated when slowing down.

Repeated acceleration and decelera-

tion, as well as long waits at traffic

lights, will lead to bad fuel economy.

Check traffic reports before leaving

and avoid delays as much as possible.

When driving in a traffic jam, gently

release the brake pedal to allow the

vehicle to move forward slightly while

avoiding overuse of the accelerator

pedal. Doing so can help control

excessive gasoline consumption.

Hybrid vehicle driving tips

For economical and ecological

driving, pay attention to the follow-

ing points:

Using Eco drive mode

Use of Hybrid System Indicator

Changing the shift position

Accelerator pedal/brake pedal

operation

When braking

Delays

308 4-6. Driving tips

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Control and maintain the vehicle at a

constant speed. Before stopping at a

toll booth or similar, allow plenty of

time to release the accelerator and

gently apply the brakes. A greater

amount of electrical energy can be

regenerated when slowing down.

Use the air conditioning only when

necessary. Doing so can help reduce

excessive gasoline consumption.

In summer: When the ambient tem-

perature is high, use the recirculated

air mode. Doing so will help to reduce

the burden on the air conditioning sys-

tem and reduce fuel consumption as

well.

In winter: Because the gasoline engine

will not automatically cut out until it and

the interior of the vehicle are warm, it

will consume fuel. Also, fuel consump-

tion can be improved by avoiding over-

use of the heater.

Make sure to check the tire inflation

pressure frequently. Improper tire infla-

tion pressure can cause poor fuel

economy.

Also, as snow tires can cause large

amounts of friction, their use on dry

roads can lead to poor fuel economy.

Use tires that are appropriate for the

season.

Carrying heavy luggage will lead to

poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying

unnecessary luggage. Installing a large

roof rack will also cause poor fuel

economy.

Since the gasoline engine starts up and

cuts out automatically when cold,

warming up the engine is unnecessary.

Moreover, frequently driving short dis-

tances will cause the engine to repeat-

edly warm up, which can lead to excess

fuel consumption.

Highway driving

Air conditioning

Checking tire inflation pressure

Luggage

Warming up before driving

309

4-6. Driving tips

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

-Use fluids that are appropriate to

the prevailing outside temperatures.

•Engine oil

• Engine/power control unit coolant

•Washer fluid

-Have a service technician inspect

the condition of the 12-volt battery.

-Have the vehicle fitted with four

snow tires or purchase a set of tire

chains for the rear tires.*

Ensure that all tires are the specified size

and brand, and that chains match the size

of the tires.

*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehi-

cles with front and rear tires of differing

sizes.

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary prepara-

tions and inspections before driving

the vehicle in winter. Always drive

the vehicle in a manner appropriate

to the prevailing weather condi-

tions.

Preparation for winter

WARNING

■Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of

vehicle control and cause death or seri-

ous injury.

●Use tires of the specified size.

●Maintain the recommended level of air

pressure.

●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120

km/h), regardless of the type of snow

tires being used.

●Use snow tires on all, not just some

wheels.

■When installing tire chains

Before installing tire chains, make sure to

disable all functions of the vehicle height

control of the electronically modulated

air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle

height may change while installing the

tire chains and part or your body may be

caught under the vehicle, possibly caus-

ing injury. (→P.301)

■Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in the vehicle

being unable to be driven safely, and may

cause death or serious injury.

●Do not drive in excess of the speed

limit specified for the tire chains being

used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), which-

ever is lower.

●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces

or over potholes.

●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt

steering, sudden braking and shifting

operations that cause sudden engine

braking.

●Slow down sufficiently before entering

a curve to ensure that vehicle control is

maintained.

●Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)

system. (if equipped)

●Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping

Assist) system. (if equipped)

310 4-6. Driving tips

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Perform the following according to the

driving conditions:

-Do not try to forcibly open a window

or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour

warm water over the frozen area to

melt the ice. Wipe away the water

immediately to prevent it from

freezing.

-To ensure proper operation of the

climate control system fan, remove

any snow that has accumulated on

the air inlet vents in front of the

windshield.

-Check for and remove any excess

ice or snow that may have accumu-

lated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s

roof, chassis, around the tires or on

the brakes.

-Remove any snow or mud from the

bottom of your shoes before getting

in the vehicle.

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a

safe distance between you and the

vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced

speed suitable to road conditions.

Park the vehicle and shift the shift posi-

tion to P without setting the parking

brake. The parking brake may freeze

up, preventing it from being released. If

the vehicle is parked without setting

the parking brake, make sure to block

the wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous

because it may cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly, possibly leading to

an accident.

Vehicles with front and rear tires of

the same size

Use the correct tire chain size when

mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire

size.

Side chain (0.12 in. [3 mm] in diam-

eter)

Cross chain (0.16 in. [4 mm] in

diameter)

Vehicles with front and rear tires of

differing sizes

Tire chains cannot be mounted.

Snow tires should be used instead.

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow

tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire

retailers.

This is because the removal and attach-

ment of snow tires affects the operation

of the tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters.

Before driving the vehicle

When driving the vehicle

When parking the vehicle

Selecting tire chains

311

4-6. Driving tips

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Driving

Regulations regarding the use of tire

chains vary depending on location and

type of road. Always check local regu-

lations before installing chains.

■Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when

installing and removing chains:

●Install and remove tire chains in a safe

location.

●Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not

install tire chains on the front tires.

●Install tire chains on the rear tires as

tightly as possible. Retighten chains after

driving 1/4⎯1/2 mile (0.5⎯1.0 km).

●Install tire chains following the instruc-

tions provided with the tire chains.

To enable the windshield wipers to be

lifted when heavy snow or icy condi-

tions are expected, change the rest

position of the windshield wipers from

the retracted position below the hood

to the service position using the wiper

lever. (→P.193)

Regulations on the use of tire

chains

NOTICE

■Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters may not function correctly

when tire chains are fitted.

Windshield wipers

312 4-6. Driving tips

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

313

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

Remote Touch.............................314

Center Display............................316

Rear Multi Operation Panel

.........................................................318

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge...... 321

5-3. Using the air conditioning system

and defogger

Front automatic air conditioning

system.........................................323

Rear air conditioning system

........................................................333

Heated steering wheel/seat heat-

ers/seat ventilators................336

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list.........................340

5-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features............343

Trunk features.............................348

5-6. Using the other interior features

Other interior features ............351

Garage door opener...............358

Lexus Enform Safety Connect

........................................................364

314 5-1. Remote Touch/Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-1.Remote Touch/Display

■Switches

“MAP” button

Vehicles with navigation function:

Press this button to display the vehicle’s

current position.

Vehicles without navigation function:

Press this button to display the compass

mode screen.

“MENU” button

Press this button to display the menu

screen.

Back button

Press this button to display the previous

screen.

Touchpad

Slide your finger on the touchpad and

move the pointer to select a function, letter

and screen button.

Press the touchpad to enter the selected

function, letter or screen button. Certain

finger movements on the touchpad can

perform functions, such as changing map

scalings and scrolling list screens.

Sub function button

When is displayed on the screen, a

function screen assigned to the screen can

be displayed.

■Using the touchpad

1Select: Touch the touchpad to

select the desired button on the

screen.

2Enter: Buttons on the screen can be

selected by either depressing or

double tapping the touchpad.

Once a button has been selected,

the screen will change.

■Touch operation

Operations are performed by touching

the touchpad with your finger.

-Trace

Trace the pad surface while maintaining

contact with the touchpad. Moving the

cursor and the pointer.

Remote Touch

The Remote Touch can be used to

operate the Center Display.

For details on the Remote touch,

refer to “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Remote Touch operation

315

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

-Double tap

Tap the touchpad twice, quickly. Select the

button on the screen.

-Flick

Quick and short movement along the

touchpad with you finger. Move the list

screen.

-Pinch in/Pinch out

Slide fingers toward each other or apart on

the touchpad. Change the scale of the

map.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the Remote

Touch

Observe the following precautions. Fail-

ure to do so may cause damage to the

Remote Touch.

●Do not allow food, liquid, stickers or lit

cigarettes to contact the Remote

Touch.

●Do not subject the Remote Touch to

excessive pressure or strong impact.

●Do not push the touchpad with a

strong force or use a sharp pointed

object to operate the pad.

316 5-1. Remote Touch/Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Menu screen

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch to display the menu

screen.

The displays shown in the illustrations

are used for example only and may dif-

fer from the actual vehicle.

*1: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

*2: This function is not available on some

models.

■Split-screen display

Different information can be displayed on the left and right sides of the screen. For

example, air conditioning system screen can be displayed and operated while the

fuel consumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the

left of the display is called the main display, and the small screen to the right is

called the side display.

Center Display

Center Display overview

Switch Function

Select to display the

“Destination”

screen.*1

Select to display the

radio control

screen.*1

Select to display the

media control

screen.*1

Select to display the

hands-free control

screen.*1

Select to display the

“Apps” screen.*1, 2

Select to display the

information screen.*1

(→P.97)

Select to display the

setup screen.*1

Select to display the

air conditioning con-

trol screen.

(→P.326)

Switch Function

317

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

■Main display

For details about the functions and

operation of the main display, refer to

the respective section and “NAVIGA-

TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

■Side display

The following functions can be dis-

played and operated on the side dis-

play.

Select or to display the desired

screen.

Navigation system*

Audio*

Vehicle information (→P.100)

Air conditioning system (→P.329)

Show/hide the side display*

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

■Screen display during low temperatures

When the ambient temperature is

extremely low, screen response may be

delayed even if the Remote Touch is oper-

ated.

318 5-1. Remote Touch/Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*:If equipped

■Home screen

Touch to display the audio control

screen.

Refer to “NAVIGATION AND

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Touch to display the rear air condi-

tioning control screen. (→P.334)

Touch to display the rear seat

adjustment screen. (→P.136)

Touch to display the relaxation seat

(if equipped) control screen.

(→P.138)

Touch to display the rear sunshade

(if equipped)/rear interior light con-

trol screen. (→P.355)

Touch to display the Rear Multi

Operation Panel settings screen.

(→P.318)

Show the progress of unlocking the

Rear Multi Operation Panel.

Touch and hold to unlock the Rear

Multi Operation Panel.

Shortcut button

Shortcut screen is displayed. Touch to dis-

play/hide commonly used buttons for a

selected mode on the bottom portion of

the screen.

button

Press to display the home screen.

■Rear Multi Operation Panel set-

tings screen

Screen operation settings and the

brightness of the screen can be

changed.

Rear Multi Operation Panel*

The Rear Multi Operation Panel

built-into the rear armrest can be

used to operate the rear audio sys-

tem, air conditioning system, etc.

Rear Multi Operation Panel

overview

319

5-1. Remote Touch/Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

Touch to turn the screen off.

Touch to lock the Rear Multi Oper-

ation Panel.

Touch to adjust the brightness of

the screen.

Touch to display the automatic

screen transition settings screen.

(→P.319)

Touch to display the rear seat

return function settings screen.

(→P.137)

■Auto screen change settings

screen

Touch to turn the automatic screen

transition function on/off.

Touch to set whether the screen will

transition to the home screen or

turn off when the automatic screen

transition function operates.

Touch to set the amount of time

(10/30/60/120 seconds) the Rear

Multi Operation Panel must be idle

before the automatic screen transi-

tion function operates.

■Operating the Rear Multi Operation

Panel

●When operating the Rear Multi Opera-

tion Panel, only use the tip of a finger. The

Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be

operated with a fingernail, pen, etc.

●Use only one finger when operating the

Rear Multi Operation Panel. The Rear

Multi Operation Panel cannot be oper-

ated with multiple fingers .

●When the power switch is changed to

ACCESSORY or ON mode, if a hand

object, liquid or foreign matter is touch-

ing the Rear Multi Operation Panel, it

may not operate correctly. In this case,

remove anything touching the Rear Multi

Operation Panel and wait for approxi-

mately 30 seconds before operating it

again.

If the Rear Multi Operation Panel still

cannot be operated normally, press and

hold the button to turn the Rear

Multi Operation Panel off, and then press

the button again to turn it back

on and operate it.

●In the following situations, the Rear Multi

Operation Panel may not operate prop-

erly:

• If wearing gloves during operation, non

response may occur.

• If a wet hand is used to operate the Rear

Multi Operation Panel.

• If a screen cover or coating is applied to

on the Rear Multi Operation Panel.

• If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty

or has liquid attached to it, incorrect

operation or non-response may occur.

• If the Rear Multi Operation Panel

receives electro magnetic waves, incor-

rect operation or non-response may

occur.

• If a mobile phone or other wireless com-

munication device brought near the Rear

320 5-1. Remote Touch/Display

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Multi Operation Panel.

●If the a metal object, such as the follow-

ing, is touching or covering the Rear

Multi Operation Panel:

•Coins

•Keys

• Metallic wallets or bags

• Magnetic isolation cards

• Metallic foil, such as the inner packaging

of a cigarette box

• Disposable heat packs

• Discs, such as a CD or DVD, Cables,

such as a USB cable

• Mobile devices, such as smartphones,

mobile phones, tablets, etc.

●Make sure to keep the Rear Multi Oper-

ation Panel clean . If the Rear Multi Oper-

ation Panel is dirty, it may not operate

correctly. (When cleaning the Rear Multi

Operation Panel, turn the screen off to

avoid unexpected operation.)

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the Rear Multi

Operation Panel

Observe the following precautions. Fail-

ure to do so may cause damage to the

Rear Multi Operation Panel.

●Keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel

free of liquids, such as drinks or rain ,

as they may cause a short circuit.

●Do not sit on or set heavy objects on

the Rear Multi Operation Panel.

●Do not push the Rear Multi Operation

Panel with a strong force or use a

sharp pointed object to operate the

panel.

321

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

5-2.Lexus Climat e Concierge

Select

The indicator on the Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen illuminates, and the

automatic air conditioning system, seat

heaters and ventilators, and heated steer-

ing wheel operate in automatic mode.

If any of the system is operated manually,

the indicator turns off. However, all other

functions continue to operate in automatic

mode.

■Changing Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen between

front/rear (vehicles with 4-ZONE

climate control)

Select “Rear” to display the rear air

conditioning system screen.

Select “Front” to display the front air condi-

tioning system screen.

■When using the Lexus Climate Con-

cierge

Lexus Climate Concierge can be operated

on the sub function menu or option control

screen. (→P.326)

■Automatic air conditioning system

(→P.323, 333)

The temperature can be adjusted inde-

pendently for each seat.

■Seat heaters and ventilators

(→P.336)

Heating or ventilation is automatically

selected according to the set tempera-

ture of the air conditioning system, the

outside temperature, etc.

■Heated steering wheel (if

equipped) (→P.336)

Heated steering wheel operates auto-

matically according to the set tempera-

Lexus Climate Concierge

The seat heaters, seat ventilators

and heated steering wheel (if

equipped) are each automatically

controlled according to the set

temperature of the air conditioning

system, the outside and cabin tem-

perature, etc. Lexus Climate Con-

cierge allows a comfortable

condition to be maintained without

adjusting each system.

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch to display the main

menu and move the cursor to

to display the climate control short-

cut buttons. Then, select to dis-

play the Lexus Climate Concierge

control screen.

Turning on Lexus Climate Con-

cierge Operation of each system

322 5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

ture of the air conditioning system, the

outside temperature, etc.

■Passenger detection functions

●When a passenger is detected in the

front passenger seat, the seat heater and

ventilator will operate automatically.

●When a passenger is detected in a rear

seat, the seat heater and ventilator will

operate automatically. (vehicles with

4-ZONE climate control)

■Seat heater/ventilator operation

When automatic mode is selected using the

seat heater/ventilator switch, passenger

detection is not performed.

■Rear seat heater operation (vehicles

with DUAL-ZONE climate control)

The rear seat heaters are not controlled by

the Lexus Climate Concierge.

323

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

5-3.Using the a ir conditioning system an d defogger

Left-hand side temperature control switch

Automatic mode switch

Off switch

Fan speed decreases switch

Fan speed increases switch

Windshield defogger switch

Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch

Outside/recirculated air mode switch

Right-hand side temperature control switch

■Adjusting the temperature

Operate the temperature control

switch upwards to increase the tem-

perature and downwards to decrease

the temperature.

■Setting the fan speed

Operate the switch to increase the

fan speed and the switch to

decrease the fan speed.

Press the off switch to turn the fan off.

Front automatic air conditioning system

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tem-

perature setting.

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main menu and

move the cursor to to display the climate control shortcut buttons. Then,

select to display the air conditioning control screen.

The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.

Air conditioning controls

324 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Changing the air flow mode

→P.326

■Switching between outside air and

recirculated air modes

Press the outside/recirculated air

mode switch.

The mode changes as follows each time

the switch is pressed.

automatic mode → (outside air

mode) → (recirculated air mode)

→ automatic mode

When the system is switched to automatic

mode, the air conditioning system operates

automatically.

■Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the wind-

shield and front side windows.

Press the windshield defogger switch.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode

switch to outside air mode if the recircu-

lated air mode is used. (It may switch auto-

matically.)

To defog the windshield and the side win-

dows quickly, turn the air flow and tem-

perature up.

To return to the previous mode, press the

windshield defogger switch again when the

windshield is defogged.

■Defogging the rear window and

outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear

window, and to remove raindrops, dew

and frost from the outside rear view

mirrors.

Press the rear window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers switch.

The defoggers will automatically turn off

after a while. The operation time changes

according to the ambient temperature and

vehicle speed.

■Windshield wiper de-icer (if

equipped)

→P.329

■When the outside temperature exceeds

75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning

system is on

●In order to reduce the air conditioning

power consumption, the air conditioning

system may switch to recirculated air

mode automatically. This may also

reduce fuel consumption.

●It is possible to switch to outside air mode

at any time by pressing the outside/recir-

culated air mode switch.

■Fogging up of the windows

The windows will easily fog up when the

humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C”

on will dehumidify the air from the outlets

and defog the windshield effectively.

●If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog

up more easily.

●The windows may fog up if the recircu-

lated air mode is used.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

●When driving on dusty roads such as tun-

nels or in heavy traffic, set the out-

side/recirculated air mode switch to the

recirculated air mode. This is effective in

preventing outside air from entering the

vehicle interior. During cooling opera-

tion, setting the recirculated air mode will

also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

●Outside/recirculated air mode may auto-

matically switch depending on the tem-

perature setting or the inside

temperature.

■Registering air conditioning settings to

electronic keys

●Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic

key and turning the power switch to ON

mode will recall that key’s registered air

conditioning settings.

325

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

●When the power switch is turned off, the

current air conditioning settings will auto-

matically be registered to the electronic

key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

●The system may not operate correctly if

more than one electronic key is in the

vicinity or if the smart access system with

push-button start is used to unlock a pas-

senger door.

●The doors that can recall the air condi-

tioning setting* when unlocked using the

smart access system with push-button

start can be changed. For details, contact

your Lexus dealer.

*: The doors that can recall the driving

position memory are changed at the

same time.

■Operation of the air conditioning sys-

tem in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning sys-

tem is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel

efficiency:

●Engine speed and compressor operation

controlled to restrict heating/cooling

capacity

●Fan speed restricted when automatic

mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance,

perform the following operations:

●Turn off eco air conditioning mode

(→P.326)

●Adjust the fan speed

●Turn off Eco drive mode (→P.298)

■When the outside temperature falls to

nearly 32°F (0°C)

The dehumidification function may not

operate even when “A/C” is selected.

■Ventilation and air conditioning odors

●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning

system to the outside air mode.

●During use, various odors from inside and

outside the vehicle may enter into and

accumulate in the air conditioning sys-

tem. This may then cause odor to be

emitted from the vents.

●To reduce potential odors from occur-

ring:

• It is recommended that the air condition-

ing system be set to outside air mode

prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be

delayed for a short period of time imme-

diately after the air conditioning system is

started in automatic mode or with the

micro dust and pollen filter on.

●When parking, the system automatically

switches to outside air mode to encour-

age better air circulation throughout the

vehicle, helping to reduce odors that

occur when starting the vehicle.

■Using the voice command system

Air conditioning system can be operated

using voice commands. For details, refer to

the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

■Air conditioning filter

→P.411

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

WARNING

■To prevent the windshield from fog-

ging up

Do not use the windshield defogger

switch during cool air operation in

extremely humid weather. The difference

between the temperature of the outside

air and that of the windshield can cause

the outer surface of the windshield to fog

up, blocking your vision.

■When the outside rear view mirror

defoggers are operating

Do not touch the outside rear view mir-

ror surfaces, as they can become very

hot and burn you.

326 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Main control screen

Using the touchpad of the Remote

Touch, select the button on the screen.

to and can be adjusted by

performing the following operations.

Flick operation: Move the pointer to

the desired item and flick the touchpad

up or down.

The item can be adjusted by one level.

Trace operation: After selecting the

desired item, trace the pad surface.

The item can be adjusted by the amount

that you trace.

Trace operation cannot be used while driv-

ing.

Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate

control

Sub menu

Selecting the sub menu item to switch the

main screen.

: Display the air conditioning control

screen

: Display the heated steering

wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventila-

tor control screen

: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat

ventilator control screen (if equipped)

: Display the Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen

: Display the option control screen

Adjust the left side seat tempera-

ture setting

Adjust the fan speed setting

Select the air flow mode

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

: Air flows to the feet

: Air flows to the feet and the wind-

shield defogger operates

Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

Function on/off indicators

When the function is on, the indicator illu-

minates on the control screen.

Sub function menu

When the sub function button on the

Remote Touch is pressed, the following

functions can be switched on and off.

: Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(→P.321)

“AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off

(→P.330)

“OFF”: Turn the fan off

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system

on longer than necessary when the

hybrid system is off.

Air conditioning control screen

327

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification

function

“DUAL”: Adjust the temperature for driver

and passenger seats separately (“DUAL”

mode) (→P.331)

: Set eco air conditioning mode

Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-

trol

Sub menu

Selecting the sub menu item to switch the

main screen.

: Display the front air conditioning

control screen

: Display the heated steering

wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventila-

tor control screen

: Display the rear air conditioning con-

trol screen

: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat

ventilator control screen

: Display the Lexus Climate Con-

cierge control screen

: Display the option control screen

Adjust the left side seat tempera-

ture setting

Select the right side seat air flow

mode

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

: Air flows to the feet

: Air flows to the feet and the wind-

shield defogger operates

Select the left side seat air flow

mode

Adjust the fan speed setting

Function on/off indicators

When the function is on, the indicator illu-

minates on the control screen.

Sub function menu

When the sub function button on the

Remote Touch is pressed, the following

functions can be switched on and off.

: Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(→P.321)

“AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off

(→P.330)

“OFF”: Turn the fan off

“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification

function

“4-ZONE”: Adjust the temperature for the

driver, front passenger and left and right

rear passenger seats separately

(“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331)

: Set eco air conditioning mode

Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

■Option control screen

Select on the sub menu to display

the option control screen.

The functions can be switched on and off.

328 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When the function is on, the indicator illu-

minates on the screen.

Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate

control

Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(→P.321)

Adjusting the temperature for

driver and passenger seats sepa-

rately (“DUAL” mode) (→P.331)

Set eco air conditioning mode

Air conditioning and heater output is lim-

ited to prioritize fuel economy.

Cooling and dehumidification func-

tion

Select the S-FLOW mode

(→P.330)

Prevent ice from building up on the

windshield and wiper blades

(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if

equipped)

Removing pollen from the air

(Micro dust and pollen filter)

Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-

trol

Set Lexus Climate Concierge

(→P.321)

Adjust the temperature for driver,

passenger and rear seats sepa-

rately (“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331)

Set eco air conditioning mode

Air conditioning and heater output is lim-

ited to prioritize fuel economy.

Cooling and dehumidification func-

tion

Select the S-FLOW mode

(→P.330)

Prevent ice from building up on the

windshield and wiper blades

(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if

equipped)

Removing pollen from the air

(Micro dust and pollen filter)

329

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

■Side display

Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate

control

Display the front seat heaters/front

seat ventilators control screen

(→P.337)

Adjust the left-hand front seat side

temperature setting

Adjust the fan speed setting

Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

Set cooling and dehumidification

function on/off

Adjusting the temperature for

driver and passenger seats sepa-

rately (“DUAL” mode) (→P.331)

Select the air flow mode

Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-

trol

Display the front seat heaters/front

seat ventilators control screen

(→P.337)

Adjust the left-hand front seat side

temperature setting

Adjust the fan speed setting

Adjust the right side seat tempera-

ture setting

Select the left side seat air flow

mode

Set cooling and dehumidification

function on/off

Adjust the temperature for driver,

passenger and rear seats sepa-

rately (“4-ZONE” mode) (→P.331)

Select the right side seat air flow

mode

■Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)

This feature is used to prevent ice from

building up on the windshield and wiper

blades.

The windshield de-icer will automatically

turn off after a while.

■Eco air conditioning mode

When Eco drive mode is selected using the

driving mode select switch, eco air condi-

tioning mode turns on.

When a drive mode other than Eco drive

mode is selected, eco air conditioning

mode may turn off.

■Micro dust and pollen filter

Outside air mode switches to

(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed

from the air and the air flows to the upper

part of the body.

Usually the system will automatically turn

off after a while.

In order to prevent the windshield from fog-

ging up when the outside air is cold, the

dehumidification function may operate or

the outside/recirculated air mode may not

330 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

switch to (recirculated air) mode.

Pollen is filtered even if the micro dust and

pollen filter is turned off.

1Press the automatic mode switch or

select “AUTO” on the sub function

menu. (→P.326)

2Press the outside/recirculated air

mode switch to switch to automatic

air intake mode.

The air conditioning system automatically

switches between outside air and recircu-

lated air modes.

3Adjust the temperature setting.

4To stop the operation, press the off

switch or select “OFF” on the sub

function menu. (→P.326)

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes

are operated, the automatic mode indica-

tor goes off. However, automatic mode for

functions other than that operated is main-

tained.

■Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically accord-

ing to the temperature setting and the

ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until

warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-

ately after the automatic mode switch is

pressed or “AUTO” is selected.

Cool air may blow around the upper body

even when the heater is on due to sunlight.

■Windshield fog detection function

When automatic mode is set, the humidity

sensor detects fog on the windshield and

controls the air conditioning system to pre-

vent fog.

■Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects

exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-

matically switches between outside air and

recirculated air modes.

When the dehumidification function is off,

and the fan is operating, turning automatic

mode on will activate the dehumidification

function.

In S-FLOW mode, priority for the air-

flow is given to the front seats, reducing

the airflow and air conditioning effect

on the rear seats.

The system determines whether or not

WARNING

■To prevent burns (vehicles with wind-

shield wiper de-icer)

Do not touch the glass at lower part of

the windshield or to the side of the front

pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer

is on.

Using automatic mode

NOTICE

■Humidity sensor

In order to detect fog on the windshield,

a sensor which monitors the temperature

of the windshield, the surround humidity,

etc. is installed.

Follow these points to avoid damaging

the sensor:

●Do not disassemble the sensor

●Do not spray glass cleaner on the sen-

sor or subject it to strong impacts

●Do not stick anything on the sensor

S-FLOW mode

331

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

a front passenger is in the vehicle by

the opening and closing of the front

passenger’s door.

When a front passenger is determined

not to be in the vehicle, the tempera-

ture indicator and air flow indicator for

the front passenger side will turn off. In

this case, depending on the set tem-

perature and ambient temperature,

priority for the airflow will be given to

the driver’s seat only.

The following S-FLOW modes are

available:

Automatic S-FLOW mode

In this mode, the system determines

whether or not a rear passenger is in

the vehicle by the opening and closing

of a rear door. When a rear passenger

is determined to be in the vehicle,

S-FLOW mode will be automatically

disabled.

The indicator will illuminate on the air con-

ditioning control screen when S-FLOW

mode is enabled.

To enable/disable S-FLOW mode and

enter manual S-FLOW mode, select the

S-FLOW mode switch.

Manual S-FLOW mode

When the S-FLOW mode switch is

selected, S-FLOW mode will be manu-

ally enabled/ disabled.

The indicator will illuminate on the air con-

ditioning control screen when S-FLOW

mode is enabled.

■Operation of the air conditioning sys-

tem in S-FLOW mode

If the front passenger’s door or a rear door

is opened then closed, the air conditioning

system determines that a passenger is in the

vehicle. In this case, priority for the airflow

will be changed from the driver’s seat only

to the front seats only or all seats, respec-

tively.

(Depending on the set temperature or

ambient temperature, priority for the air-

flow may not be given to the driver’s seat

only.)

If a passenger is judged to be in the vehicle,

the system will retain the judgement for a

certain amount of time after the power

switch is turned off.

■Operation of automatic S-FLOW mode

When the system is operating in automatic

S-FLOW mode, if a rear door is opened

and then closed, S-FLOW mode will be dis-

abled. To enable S-FLOW mode, select the

S-FLOW mode switch.

■Changing from manual S-FLOW mode

to automatic S-FLOW mode

1Select the S-FLOW mode switch to dis-

able S-FLOW mode.

2Turn the power switch off.

3After 60 minutes have elapsed, change

the power switch to ON mode.

Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate

control

To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform

any of the following procedures:

-Select “DUAL” on the sub function

menu. (→P.326)

-Select “DUAL” on the option con-

trol screen.

-Adjust the passenger’s side tem-

perature setting.

The indicator on the main control screen

comes on when the “DUAL” mode is on.

Adjusting the temperature for

the driver and passenger seats

separately

332 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate con-

trol

To turn on the “4-ZONE” mode, per-

form any of the following procedures:

-Select “4-ZONE” on the sub func-

tion menu. (→P.326)

-Select “4-ZONE” on the option

control screen.

-Adjust a passenger seat tempera-

ture setting.

The indicator on the main control screen

comes on when the “4-ZONE” mode is on.

■Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume changes

according to the selected air flow

mode.

■Adjusting the position of and open-

ing and closing the air outlets

Front center/front side

1Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

2Turn the knob to open or close the

vent

Rear center/rear side

1Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

2Turn the knob to open or close the

vent

Air outlet layout and operations

333

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

*: If equipped

■Center Display

Using the touchpad of the Remote

Touch, select the button on the screen.

WARNING

■To prevent the windshield defogger

from operating improperly

Do not place anything on the instrument

panel which may cover the air outlets.

Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,

preventing the windshield defoggers

from defogging.

Rear air conditioning sys-

tem*

The air outlets and fan speed are

automatically adjusted according

to the temperature setting.

The rear air conditioning system

can be operated using the Center

Display and Rear Multi Operation

Panel.

-Center Display

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch to display the main menu

and move the cursor to to display

the climate control shortcut buttons.

Then, select to display the rear air

conditioning control screen.

-Rear Multi Operation Panel*

Touch “Climate” on the home screen to

display the rear air conditioning control

screen.(→P.318)

Touching the shortcut button on the

home screen will also display operation

buttons for some of the rear air condi-

tioning system functions.

*: The Rear Multi Operation Panel can-

not be used to operate the rear air

conditioning system if the function is

disabled. (→P.333)

Rear air conditioning control

screen

334 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

to can be adjusted by perform-

ing the following operations.

Flick operation: Move the pointer to

the desired item and flick the touchpad

up or down.

The item can be adjusted by one level.

Trace operation: After selecting the

desired item, trace the pad surface.

The item can be adjusted by the amount

that you trace.

Trace operation cannot be used while driv-

ing.

Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Select the left side rear seat air flow

mode

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

: Air flows to the feet

Adjust the rear seats fan speed set-

ting

Select the right side rear seat air

flow mode

Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Function on/off indicators

When the function is on, the indicator illu-

minates on the control screen.

Sub function menu

When the sub function button on the

Remote Touch is pressed, the following

functions can be switched on and off.

“Rear off”: Turn the rear seats fan off

“Rear AUTO”: Set the rear seats automatic

mode on/off (→P.335)

: Disables operation of the rear air

conditioning system using the Rear Multi

Operation Panel

■Rear Multi Operation Panel*

Various functions can be operated by

touching the displayed buttons on the

Rear Multi Operation Panel.

*: The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot

be used to operate the rear air condi-

tioning system if the function is disabled.

(→P.333)

Rear air conditioning control screen

Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Select the left side rear seat air flow

mode

: Air flows to the upper body

: Air flows to the upper body and feet

: Air flows to the feet

335

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

Set the rear seats automatic mode

on/off (→P.335)

Select the right side rear seat air

flow mode

Turn the rear seats fan off

Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Adjust the rear seats fan speed set-

ting

Shortcut screen

Adjust the left side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Adjust the right side rear seat tem-

perature setting

Center Display

1Select “Rear AUTO” on the sub

function menu. (→P.333)

2To stop the operation, select “Rear

off” on the sub function menu.

(→P.333)

If the fan speed setting or air flow

modes are operated, the automatic

mode indicator goes off. However,

automatic mode for functions other

than that operated is maintained.

Rear Multi Operation Panel

1Select “AUTO” on the rear air con-

ditioning control screen. (→P.334)

2To stop the operation, select “OFF”

on the rear air conditioning control

screen. (→P.333)

If the fan speed setting or air flow

modes are operated, the automatic

mode indicator goes off. However,

automatic mode for functions other

than that operated is maintained.

■Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically accord-

ing to the temperature setting and the

ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until

warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-

ately after “Rear AUTO” is selected or

“AUTO” is touched.

Cool air may blow around the upper body

even when the heater is on due to sunlight.

The temperature setting of the rear

seats can be adjusted using the follow-

ing methods:

-When the “4-ZONE” indicator is

off: Adjust the driver’s seat tempera-

ture.

Adjust the temperature setting of each

rear seat using the Center Display or Rear

Multi Operation Panel.

-Adjust the temperature setting of

each rear seat using the Center Dis-

play (rear air conditioning control

screen) or Rear Multi Operation

Panel.

Using automatic mode

Adjusting the temperature set-

ting of the rear seats

336 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The temperature setting of each rear seat

can be changed independently.

■Rear center outlets and rear side

outlets

1Direct air flow to the left or right, up

or down

2Turn the knob to open or close the

vent

*: If equipped

Air outlet layout and operations

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system

on longer than necessary when the

hybrid system is off.

Heated steering wheel*/seat

heaters/seat ventilators

-Heated steering wheel

Warms up the grip of the steering wheel

-Front seat heaters/Rear seat

heaters

Warm up the seat upholstery

-Front seat ventilators/Rear seat

ventilators

Maintain good ventilation by pulling air

through the seat upholstery

The Center Display and Rear Multi

Operation Panel/rear control

panel can be used to operate the

heated steering wheel, seat heaters

and seat ventilators as follows:

337

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

■Center Display

Main screen

Using the touchpad of the Remote

Touch, select the button on the screen.

to can be adjusted by perform-

ing the following operations.

Flick operation: Move the pointer to

the desired item and flick the touchpad

up or down.

The item can be adjusted by one level.

Trace operation: After selecting the

desired item, trace the touchpad sur-

face.

The item can be adjusted by the amount

that you trace.

Trace operation cannot be used while driv-

ing.

-Center Display

Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch to display the main menu

and move the cursor to to display

the shortcut buttons. Then, select

to display the heated steering

wheel/front seat heater/front seat venti-

lator control screen.

To display the rear seat heater/rear seat

ventilator control screen, select . (if

equipped)

-Rear Multi Operation Panel

Touch “Climate” on the home screen to

display the air conditioning control

screen.(→P.318)

Touching the shortcut button on the

home screen will display operation but-

tons for the rear seat heaters and rear

seat ventilators.

-Rear control panel

The rear seat heaters can be operated.

WARNING

■To prevent minor burn injuries

Care should be taken if anyone in the fol-

lowing categories comes in contact with

the steering wheel or seats when the

heater is on:

●Babies, small children, the elderly, the

sick and the physically challenged

●Persons with sensitive skin

●Persons who are fatigued

●Persons who have taken alcohol or

drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the seat heat-

ers and seat ventilators

Do not put heavy objects that have an

uneven surface on the seat and do not

stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)

into the seat.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the functions when the hybrid

system is off.

Control screen

338 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Adjust the seat ventilator fan speed

level

The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 lev-

els. (Low, Mid or Hi)

Adjust the seat heater temperature

level

The seat heater can be adjusted in 3 levels.

(Low, Mid or Hi)

Adjust the heated steering wheel

temperature level*

The heated steering wheel can be adjusted

in 2 levels. (Low or Hi)

Automatic mode on/off indicators

When the automatic mode is on, the indi-

cator illuminates on the screen.

Sub function menu

When the sub function button on the

Remote Touch is pressed, the following

functions can be set to automatic mode.

: Left-hand side seat heater/seat

ventilator

: Heated steering wheel*

: Right-hand side seat heater/seat

ventilator

*: Available on the front seat control

screen only

Side screen

Display the air conditioning control

screen →P.329

Adjust the front seat heater tem-

perature level

Each time the switch is selected, the tem-

perature level and level indicator (orange)

change as follows:

AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF

Adjust the front seat ventilator fan

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan

speed level and level indicator (blue)

change as follows:

AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF

Adjust the heated steering wheel

temperature level

Each time the switch is selected, the tem-

perature level and level indicator change

as follows:

AUTO→Hi→Lo→OFF

■Rear Multi Operation Panel (if

equipped)

Rear air conditioning control screen

Adjust the rear seat heater tem-

perature level

Each time the switch is selected, the tem-

perature level and level indicator (orange)

change as follows:

AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF

Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan

339

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

speed level and level indicator (blue)

change as follows:

AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF

Shortcut screen

Adjust the rear seat heater tem-

perature level

Each time the switch is selected, the tem-

perature level and level indicator (orange)

change as follows:

AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF

Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan

speed level

Each time the switch is selected, the fan

speed level and level indicator (blue)

change as follows:

AUTO→Hi→Mid→Lo→OFF

■Rear control panel (if equipped)

Increases the rear seat heater tem-

perature level

The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 lev-

els. (Low, Mid or Hi)

Enables/Disables the automatic

mode of the rear seat heaters

Decreases the rear seat heater

temperature level

If this switch is selected when the rear seat

heater temperature level is set to Lo, the

rear seat heater will turn off.

■The heated steering wheel, seat heaters

and seat ventilators wheel can be used

when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■Air conditioning system-linked control

mode

When the seat ventilator fan speed level is

Hi, the seat ventilator fan speed becomes

higher according to the fan speed of the air

conditioning system.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

WARNING

■To prevent overheating and minor

burn injuries

Observe the following precautions when

using the seat heaters.

●Do not cover the seat with a blanket or

cushion when using the seat heater.

●Do not use seat heater more than nec-

essary.

340 5-4. Using the interior lights

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5-4.Using the interior lights

Rear personal lights (→P.341)

Inside door handle lights

Instrument panel ornament lights (if equipped)

Front personal lights (→P.341)

Front interior lights (→P.341)

Clock light

Footwell lights

Power switch light

Door trim ornament lights

Door courtesy lights

Seat belt buckle lights

Outer foot lights

Rear interior light (→P.341)

Shift lever lights

Interior lights list

Location of the interior lights

341

5-4. Using the interior lights

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

■Turning the door position on

Press the door-linked interior light

switch

The lights are turned on and off according

to whether the doors are opened/closed.

When the door position is on, the indicator

illuminates.

■Turning the lights on/off

Front

Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)

When a door is opened while the door

position is on, the lights turn on.

Rear

On/off

The rear interior lights turn on/off together

the front interior lights.

When a door is opened while the door

position is on, the lights turn on.

■Using the Rear Multi Operation

Panel (if equipped)

1Display the home screen and then

touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.

(→P.318)

2To turn on/off the rear interior

lights, touch the respective button.

■Turning the lights on/off

Front

Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)

When a door is opened while the door

position is on, the lights turn on.

Operating the interior lights

Operating the personal lights

342 5-4. Using the interior lights

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Rear

On/dimmed/off

When a door is opened while the door

position is on, the lights turn on.

■Using the Rear Multi Operation

Panel (if equipped)

1Display the home screen and then

touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.

(→P.318)

2To turn on/dimmed/off the rear per-

sonal lights, touch the respective

button.

■Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off accord-

ing to the power switch mode, the presence

of the electronic key, whether the doors are

locked/unlocked, and whether the doors

are open/closed.

■To prevent the 12-volt battery from

being discharged

If the interior lights remain on when the

power switch is turned off, the lights will go

off automatically after 20 minutes.

■When front interior light or front per-

sonal lights do not respond as normal

●When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to

the lens surface

●When operated with a wet hand

●When wearing gloves, etc.

■Customization

Some functions can be customized.

(→P.481)

NOTICE

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than

necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■Removing light lenses

Never remove the lens for the front inte-

rior light and front personal lights. Other-

wise, the lights will be damaged. If a lens

needs to be removed, contact your Lexus

dealer.

343

5-5. Using the storage features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

5-5.Using th e storage features

Vehicles without power rear seat

Glove box (→P.344)

Auxiliary boxes (→P.347)

Cup holders (→P.345)

Console box (→P.346)

Coin holder (→P.345)

List of storage features

Location of the storage features

344 5-5. Using the storage features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicles with power rear seat

Glove box (→P.344)

Auxiliary boxes (→P.347)

Cup holders (→P.345)

Console box (→P.346)

Coin holder (→P.118)

1Open (push button)

2Unlock with the mechanical key

3Lock with the mechanical key

WARNING

■Items that should not be left in the

storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray

cans in the storage spaces, as this may

cause the following when cabin tempera-

ture becomes high:

●Glasses may be deformed by heat or

cracked if they come into contact with

other stored items.

●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If

they come into contact with other

stored items, the lighter may catch fire

or the spray can may release gas,

causing a fire hazard.

Glove box

345

5-5. Using the storage features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

■Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail

lights are on.

■Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in

the glove box. (→P.118)

■Removing the partition

The partition inside the glove box can be

removed by pulling it.

Push the button.

Front

Press in and release the button.

Rear (vehicles without power rear

seat)

Pull the armrest down then push in the

cup holder trim to extend the cup hold-

ers.

Rear (vehicles with power rear seat)

Press in and release the button.

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed. In the event

of sudden braking or sudden swerving,

an accident may occur due to an occu-

pant being struck by the open glove box

or the items stored inside.

Coin holder

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Keep the coin holder closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden braking.

Cup holders

346 5-5. Using the storage features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■When stowing the rear cup holders

(vehicles without power rear seat)

Stow the cup holder with the armrest down.

The cup holder cannot be stowed if the

armrest is not down.

Press a button to open the console box.

The console box can be opened from

either side.

■Tray in the console box

The tray can be slid and removed.

■Console box light

The console box light turns on when the tail

lights are on.

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or

beverage cans in the cup holders.

Inappropriate items must not be stored in

the cup holders even if the lid is closed.

Other items may be thrown out of the

holders in the event of an accident or

sudden braking and cause injury. If possi-

ble, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

■When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the rear cup

holder (vehicles without power rear

seat)

Stow the cup holder before stowing the

armrest.

■To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the lid of the power outlet in the

front cup holder when the power outlet is

not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that

enter the power outlet may cause a short

circuit.

Console box

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an acci-

dent or sudden braking.

NOTICE

■Tray

Do not insert items exceeding the height

of the tray. Doing so may prevent open-

ing and closing of the lid.

347

5-5. Using the storage features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

Overhead

Press in the button.

This box is useful for temporarily storing

sunglasses and similar small items.

Rear seat (vehicles without power

rear seat)

Pull the armrest down then push the

knob and lift the lid to open it.

Rear seat (vehicles with power rear

seat)

Pull the armrest down then press the

button to open the lid.

Auxiliary boxes

WARNING

■Caution while driving

Do not leave the auxiliary box open while

driving.

Items may fall out and cause death or

serious injury in case of an accident or

sudden stop.

■Items unsuitable for storing (over-

head)

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb.

(0.2 kg).

Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to

open and the items inside may fall out,

resulting in an accident.

348 5-5. Using the storage features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The cargo net is provided for securing

loose items on the floor or items inside

the trunk.

Raise the cargo hooks on the floor.

Hook the net on the cargo hooks.

Side

Pull the strap upwards to lift the lug-

gage mat and remove it.

Trunk features

Cargo net (if equipped)

WARNING

■When the cargo net is not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo

hooks on the floor to their stowed posi-

tions.

Shopping bag hooks

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the grocery

bag hooks

Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb.

(5 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.

Luggage mats

349

5-5. Using the storage features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

Front

1Pull the strap upwards and lift up

the luggage mat.

2Lift the luggage mat until it engages

with the hook.

To return the luggage mat to its original

position, push the hook and lower the

luggage mat.

Auxiliary boxes are under the luggage

mats.

1Loosen the belt

2Tighten the belt

■Using a belt to hold an object

1Loosen the belt

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the hook for

the front luggage mat

Do not hang a grocery bag or any other

object from the hook.

Auxiliary boxes

First-aid kit storage belt

Warning reflector storage belt

350 5-5. Using the storage features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2Pass the belt through the clip

3Tighten the belt

Depending on the size and shape of an

object, such as the case of a warning

reflector, the object may not be able to be

secured with the belts or stowed in an aux-

iliary box.

■Stowing the belt

1Fold the belt

2Secure the belt with the clip

To prevent damage to the warning reflec-

tor storage belt when it is not in use, stow

the belt.

351

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

5-6.Using the ot her interior features

The USB charging ports are used to

supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to

external devices.

The USB charging ports are for

charging only. They are not designed

for data transfer or other purposes.

Depending on the external device, it

may not charge properly. Refer to the

manual included with the device

before using a USB charging port.

■Using the USB charging ports

Open the console box lid and open the

lid.

Vehicles without power rear seat

Vehicles with power rear seat

■The USB charging ports can be used

when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or

ON mode.

■Situations in which the USB charging

ports may not operate correctly

●If a device which consumes more than 2.1

A at 5 V is connected

●If a device designed to communicate with

a personal computer, such as a USB

memory device, is connected

●If the connected external device is turned

off (depending on device)

●If the temperature inside the vehicle is

high, such as after the vehicle has been

parked in the sun

■About connected external devices

Depending on the connected external

device, charging may occasionally be sus-

pended and then start again. This is not a

malfunction.

Other interior features

USB charging ports

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the USB

charging ports

●Do not insert foreign objects into the

ports.

●Do not spill water or other liquids into

the ports.

●When the USB charging ports are not

in use, close the lids. If a foreign object

or liquid enters a port may cause a

short circuit.

●Do not apply excessive force to or

impact the USB charging ports.

●Do not disassemble or modify the USB

charging ports.

■To prevent damage to external

devices

●Do not leave external devices in the

vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in

damage to an external device.

352 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Vehicle without power rear seat

Pull the armrest down for use.

Vehicle with power rear seat

Pull the lock release lever and fold the

rear seatback down.

An assist grip installed on the ceiling

can be used to support your body

while sitting on the seat.

To use the coat hook, push it on.

NOTICE

●Do not push down on or apply unnec-

essary force to an external device or

the cable of an external device while it

is connected.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the USB charging ports for a

long period of time with the hybrid sys-

tem stopped.

Armrest

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the arm-

rest.

Assist grips

WARNING

■Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in

or out of the vehicle or rising from your

seat.

Doing so could damage the assist grip, or

could cause you to injure yourself by fall-

ing over.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a

heavy load on the assist grip.

Coat hooks

353

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

The GPS clock’s time is automatically

adjusted by utilizing GPS time infor-

mation. For details, refer to “NAVIGA-

TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

OWNER’S MANUAL”.

The power outlet can be used for the

following components:

12 V: Accessories that run on less than

10 A.

120 VAC: Accessories that use less

than 100 W.

■12 V

Front

Open the cup holder, and open the lid.

Console box

Open the console box and open the

lid.

Rear (if equipped)

Open the lid.

■120 VAC (if equipped)

Open the lid.

WARNING

■Items that must not be hung on the

hook

Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard

or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS

curtain shield airbags deploy, these items

may become projectiles that cause death

or serious injury.

Clock

Power outlets

354 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■The power outlet can be used when

●12 V

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or

ON mode.

●120 VAC

The power switch is in ON mode.

1To set the visor in the forward posi-

tion, flip it down.

2To set the visor in the side position,

flip down, unhook, and swing it to

the side.

3To use the side extender, place the

visor in the side position, then slide

it backward.

Front

Slide the cover to open.

The vanity light turns on.

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the

power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■To prevent the fuse from being blown

●12 V

Do not use an accessory that uses more

than 12 V 10 A.

●120 VAC

Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that

requires more than 100 W. If a 120 VAC

appliance that consumes more than 100

W is used, the protection circuit will cut

the power supply.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet longer than

necessary when the hybrid system is off.

■Appliances that may not operate

properly (120 VAC)

The following 120 VAC appliances may

not operate properly even if their power

consumption is under 100 W.

●Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age

●Measuring devices that process pre-

cise data

●Other appliances that require an

extremely stable power supply

Sun visors

Vanity mirrors

355

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

Rear

Press the button to open.

The vanity light turns on.

■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

If the vanity lights remain on when the

power switch is turned off, the lights will go

off automatically after 20 minutes.

The rear door/rear quarter sunshades

can be extended and retracted using

the driver’s power window switch and

Rear Multi Operation Panel.

■From driver’s seat

Operate the driver’s power window

switch.

Rear quarter sunshade (if

equipped)

Rear door sunshade

1Extend

2Retract*

*: If the driver’s power window switch is

operated when a rear door sun-

shade/rear quarter sunshade is

retracted or being retracted, the rear

window will open.

■From rear seat

The rear seat power window switches

cannot be used to extend the rear door

sunshades/rear quarter sunshades.

1Display the home screen and then

touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.

(→P.318)

NOTICE

■When not in use

Keep the rear vanity mirror closed.

■To prevent the 12-volt battery from

being discharged

Do not leave the vanity lights on for

extended periods while the hybrid sys-

tem is off.

Rear door/rear quarter sun-

shades (if equipped)

356 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

2To fully extend/retract a rear

door/rear quarter sunshade, touch

the respective button.

■Operating conditions

●The power switch is in ON mode.

●The rear side windows are fully closed.

■Operation of rear door sunshades/rear

quarter sunshades when extended

If a rear door power window switch is oper-

ated when the rear door sunshade/rear

quarter sunshade is extended, the rear door

sunshade/rear quarter sunshade will retract

while the rear window is opening.

■Operating the rear door/rear quarter

sunshades after turning the hybrid sys-

tem off

The rear door/rear quarter sunshades can

be operated for a while even after the

power switch is turned to ACCESSORY

mode or off.

However, they cannot be operated using

the driver’s power window switch after

either front door is opened.

■Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between a rear

door sunshade and the window frame, the

rear door sunshade will stop and then

extend/retract slightly.

■When reconnecting the 12-volt battery

The rear door/rear quarter sunshades will

always be retracted the first time the button

is pressed.

The rear sunshade can be raised and

lowered by operating any of the

switches shown below.

■From front seat

Extend/retract

WARNING

■When the rear door/rear quarter sun-

shades are being extended or

retracted

Do not place fingers or other objects in

the shade mechanism or in the opening

as injury may result.

■Jam protection function

Never use any part of your body to inten-

tionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

NOTICE

■To ensure normal operation of the

sunshades

Observe the following precautions:

●Do not place excessive load on the

motor or other components.

●Do not place objects where they may

hinder opening and closing opera-

tions.

●Do not attach items to the rear

door/rear quarter sunshades.

●Keep the opening clean and clear of

obstructions.

●Do not operate the rear door/rear

quarter sunshades continuously for

long periods of time.

Rear sunshade (if equipped)

357

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

■From rear seat

Vehicles without power rear seat

Extend/retract

Vehicles with power rear seat

1Display the home screen and then

touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.

(→P.318)

2To fully extend/retract a rear door

sunshade, touch the respective but-

ton.

■The rear sunshade can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.

■Operating the rear sunshade after turn-

ing the hybrid system off

The rear sunshade can be operated for a

while even after the power switch is

switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned

off.

■Reverse operation feature

To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear

sunshade automatically lowers when the

shift position is shifted to R.

However, the rear sunshade is raised again

if any of the following occurs:

●The switch is pressed again.

●The shift position is shifted to P.

●The shift position is shifted out of P and R,

and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h).

If the hybrid system is turned off when the

rear sunshade has been lowered due to the

reverse operation feature, it will not be

raised even when the hybrid system is

turned on again and the vehicle reaches a

speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sun-

shade again, press the switch.

WARNING

■When the rear sunshade is being

raised or lowered

Do not place fingers or other objects in

the shade mechanism or in the opening

as injury may result.

NOTICE

■To ensure normal operation of the

sunshade

Observe the following precautions:

●Do not place excessive load on the

motor or other components.

●Do not place objects where they may

hinder opening and closing opera-

tions.

●Do not attach items to the rear sun-

shade.

358 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The HomeLink® wireless control sys-

tem in your vehicle has 3 buttons which

can be programmed to operate 3 dif-

ferent devices. Refer to the program-

ming methods on the following pages

to determine the method which is

appropriate for the device.

HomeLink® indicator light

Garage door operation indicators

HomeLink® icon

Illuminates while HomeLink® is operating.

Buttons

■Codes stored in the HomeLink® mem-

ory

●The registered codes are not erased even

if the 12-volt battery cable is discon-

nected.

NOTICE

●Keep the opening clean and clear of

obstructions.

●Do not operate the rear sunshade con-

tinuously for long periods of time.

Garage door opener

The garage door opener can be

programmed using the Home-

Link® to operate garage doors,

gates, entry doors, door locks,

home lighting systems, security sys-

tems, and other devices.

System components

359

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

●If learning failed when registering a dif-

ferent code to a HomeLink® button that

already has a code registered to it, the

already registered code will not be

erased.

■Certification for the garage door opener

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

For vehicles sold in Canada

■When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.home-

link.com/lexus or call 1-800-355-3515.

WARNING

■When programming a garage door or

other remote control device

The garage door or other device may

operate, so ensure people and objects

are out of danger to prevent potential

harm.

360 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Before programming HomeLink®

-During programming, it is possible

that garage doors, gates, or other

devices may operate. For this rea-

son, make sure that people and

objects are clear of the garage door

or other devices to prevent injury or

other potential harm.

-It is recommended that a new bat-

tery be placed in the remote control

transmitter for more accurate pro-

gramming.

-Garage door opener motors manu-

factured after 1995 may be

equipped with rolling code protec-

tion. If this is the case, you may need

a stepladder or other sturdy, safe

device to reach the “Learn” or

“Smart” button on the garage door

opener motor.

■Programming HomeLink®

Steps 1 through 3 must be performed

within 60 seconds, otherwise the indi-

cator light will stop flashing and pro-

gramming will not be able to be

completed.

1Press and release the HomeLink®

button you want to program and

check that the HomeLink® indica-

tor light flashes (orange).

2Point the remote control transmit-

ter for the device at the rear view

mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)

from the HomeLink® buttons.

Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in

view while programming.

3Program a device.

Programming a device other than

an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)

Press and hold the handheld transmit-

ter button until the HomeLink® indica-

tor light changes from slowly flashing

orange to rapidly flashing green (roll-

ing code) or continuously lit green

(fixed code), then release the button.

WARNING

■Conforming to federal safety stan-

dards

Do not use the HomeLink® compatible

transceiver with any garage door opener

or device that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by federal

safety standards.

This includes any garage door that can-

not detect an interfering object. A door

or device without these features

increases the risk of death or serious

injury.

■When operating or programming

HomeLink®

Never allow a child to operate or play

with the HomeLink® buttons.

Programming the HomeLink®

361

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

Programming an entry gate (for

U.S.A. owners)/Programming a

device in the Canadian market

Press and release the remote control

transmitter button at 2 second inter-

vals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink®

indicator light changes from slowly

flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing

(green) (rolling code) or continuously

lit (green) (fixed code).

4Test the HomeLink® operation by

pressing the newly programmed

button and observing the indicator

light:

-Indicator light illuminates: Program-

ming of a fixed code device has

completed. The garage door or

other device should operate when a

HomeLink® button is pressed and

released.

-Indicator light flashes rapidly: The

garage door opener motor or other

device is equipped with a rolling

code. To complete programming,

firmly press and hold the Home-

Link® button for 2 seconds then

release it.

-If the garage door or other device

does not operate, proceed to “Pro-

gramming a rolling code system”.

5Repeat the steps above to program

another device for any of the

remaining HomeLink® buttons.

■Programming a rolling code sys-

tem

2 or more people may be necessary to

complete rolling code programming.

1Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” but-

ton on the garage door opener

motor in the garage.

This button can usually be found where the

hanging antenna wire is attached to the

unit. The name and color of the button may

vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s

manual supplied with the garage door

opener motor for details.

2Press and release the “Learn” or

“Smart” button.

Perform 3 within 30 seconds after per-

forming 2.

362 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

3Press and hold the desired Home-

Link® button (inside the vehicle)

for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat

this sequence (press/hold/release)

up to 3 times to complete pro-

gramming.

If the garage door opener motor

operates when the HomeLink®

button is pressed, the garage door

opener motor recognizes the

HomeLink® signal.

■Enabling 2-way communication

with a garage door (only available

for compatible devices)

When enabled, 2-way communication

allows you to check the status of the

opening and closing of a garage door

through indicators in your vehicle.

2-way communication is only available

if the garage door opener motor used

is a compatible device. (To check

device compatibility, refer to

www.homelink.com.)

1Within 5 seconds after program-

ming the garage door opener has

been completed, if the garage door

opener motor is trained to Home-

Link®, both garage door operation

indicators will flash rapidly (green)

and the light on the garage door

opener motor will blink twice, indi-

cating that 2-way communication is

enabled.

If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and

3 within the first 10 presses of the Home-

Link® button after programming has been

completed.

2Press a programmed HomeLink®

button to operate a garage door.

3Within 1 minute of pressing the

HomeLink® button, after the

garage door operation has

stopped, press the “Learn” or

“Smart” button on the garage door

opener motor. Within 5 seconds of

the establishment of 2-way com-

munication with the garage door

opener, both garage door opera-

tion indicators in the vehicle will

flash rapidly (green) and the light

on the garage door opener motor

will blink twice, indicating that

2-way communication is enabled.

■Reprogramming a single Home-

Link® button

When the following procedure is per-

formed, buttons which already have

devices registered to them can be

overwritten:

1With one hand, press and hold the

desired HomeLink® button.

2When the HomeLink® indicator

starts flashing (orange), continue to

hold the HomeLink® button and

perform “Programming Home-

Link®” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for

363

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

the HomeLink® indicator to start

flashing).

■Before programming

●Install a new battery in the transmitter.

●The battery side of the transmitter must

be pointed away from the HomeLink®.

Press the appropriate HomeLink®

button. The HomeLink® indicator light

should turn on.

The status of the opening and closing

of a garage door is shown by the indi-

cators.

Opening

Closing

This function is only available if the garage

door opener motor used is a compatible

device. (To check device compatibility,

refer to www.homelink.com.)

The indicators can operate within

approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the

garage door. However, if there are

obstructions between the garage door

and the vehicle, such as houses and

trees, feedback signals from the

garage door may not be received.

To recall the previous door operation

status, press and release either Home-

Link® buttons and or

and simultaneously. The

last recorded status will be displayed

for 3 seconds.

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons

for 10 seconds until the HomeLink®

indicator light changes from continu-

ously lit (orange) to rapidly flashing

(green).

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the

programs stored in the HomeLink® mem-

ory.

Operating HomeLink®

Color Status

Orange (flashing) Currently open-

ing/closing

Green Opening/closing has

completed

Red (flashing) Feedback signals

cannot be received

Erasing the entire HomeLink®

memory (all three codes)

364 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*:If equipped

“SOS” button

LED light indicators

Microphone

Lexus Enform Safety Con-

nect*

Safety Connect is a subscrip-

tion-based telematics service that

uses Global Positioning System

(GPS) data and embedded cellular

technology to provide safety and

security features to subscribers.

Safety Connect is supported by

Lexus’ designated response center,

which operates 24 hours per day, 7

days per week.

Safety Connect service is available

by subscription on select, telemat-

ics hardware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect ser-

vice, you are agreeing to be bound

by the Telematics Subscription Ser-

vice Agreement and its Terms and

Conditions, as in effect and

amended from time to time, a cur-

rent copy of which is available at

Lexus.com. All use of the Safety

Connect service is subject to such

then-applicable Terms and Condi-

tions.

System components

365

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

■Certification for Lexus Enform

Subscribers have the following Safety

Connect services available:

-Automatic Collision Notification*

Helps drivers receive necessary response

from emergency service providers.

(→P.367)

Services

366 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

-Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft.

(→P.367)

-Emergency Assistance Button

(“SOS”)

Connects drivers to response-center sup-

port. (→P.367)

-Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assis-

tance. (→P.367)

After you have signed the Telematics

Subscription Service Agreement and

are enrolled, you can begin receiving

services.

A variety of subscription terms is avail-

able for purchase. Contact your Lexus

dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS

(1-800-255-3987) in the Unites

States (1-877-539-8777 in Puerto

Rico, 1-800-26-LEXUS in Canada) or

push the “SOS” button in your vehicle

for further subscription details.

■Safety Connect Services Information

●Phone calls using the vehicles Blue-

tooth® technology will not be possible

during Safety Connect.

●Safety Connect is available beginning Fall

2009 on select Lexus models (in the

contiguous United States only). Contact

with the Safety Connect response center

is dependent upon the telematics device

being in operative condition, cellular con-

nection availability, and GPS satellite sig-

nal reception, which can limit the ability to

reach the response center or receive

emergency service support. Enrollment

and Telematics Subscription Service

Agreement required. A variety of sub-

scription terms is available; charges vary

by subscription term selected and loca-

tion.

●Automatic Collision Notification, Emer-

gency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle

Location will function in the United

States, including Hawaii and Alaska,

Puerto Rico and in Canada, and

Enhanced Roadside Assistance will func-

tion in the United States, Puerto Rico and

in Canada.

●Automatic Collision Notification, Emer-

gency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Loca-

tion and Enhanced Roadside Assistance

will not function in the United States Vir-

gin Islands.

No Safety Connect services will function

outside of the United States in countries

other than Canada.

For vehicles first sold in the USVI, no

Safety Connect services will function in

and outside the United States Virgin

Islands.

●Safety Connect services are not subject

to section 255 of the Telecommunica-

tions Act and the device is not TTY com-

patible.

■Languages

The Safety Connect response center will

offer support in multiple languages. The

Safety Connect system will offer voice

prompts in English, Spanish, and French.

Please indicate your language of choice

when enrolling.

■When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response

center if the network is busy.

When the power switch is turned to

ON mode, the red indicator light

comes on for 2 seconds then turns off.

Afterward, the green indicator light

comes on, indicating that the service is

active.

Subscription

Safety Connect LED light Indi-

cators

367

5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Interior features

The following indicator light patterns

indicate specific system usage condi-

tions:

-Green indicator light on = Active

service

-Green indicator light flashing =

Safety Connect call in process

-Red indicator light (except at vehi-

cle start-up) = System malfunction

(contact your Lexus dealer)

-No indicator light (off) = Safety

Connect service not active

■Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or

severe rear-end collision, the system is

designed to automatically call the

response center. The responding agent

receives the vehicle’s location and

attempts to speak with the vehicle

occupants to assess the level of emer-

gency. If the occupants are unable to

communicate, the agent automatically

treats the call as an emergency, con-

tacts the nearest emergency services

provider to describe the situation, and

requests that assistance be sent to the

location.

■Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect

can work with local authorities to assist

them in locating and recovering the

vehicle. After filing a police report, call

the Safety Connect response center at

1-800-25-LEXUS

(1-800-255-3987) and follow the

prompts for Safety Connect to initiate

this service.

In addition to assisting law enforce-

ment with recovery of a stolen vehicle,

Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle

location data may, under certain cir-

cumstances, be shared with third par-

ties to locate your vehicle. Further

information is available at Lexus.com.

■Emergency Assistance Button

(“SOS”)

In the event of an emergency on the

road, push the “SOS” button to reach

the Safety Connect response center.

The answering agent will determine

your vehicle’s location, assess the

emergency, and dispatch the neces-

sary assistance required.

If you accidentally press the “SOS” button,

tell the response-center agent that you are

not experiencing an emergency.

■Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds

GPS data to the already included war-

ranty-based Lexus roadside service.

Subscribers can press the “SOS” but-

ton to reach a Safety Connect

response-center agent, who can help

with a wide range of needs, such as:

towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a

description of the Roadside Assistance

services and their limitations, please

see the Safety Connect Terms and

Conditions, which are available at

Lexus.com.

Safety Connect services

368 5-6. Using the other interior features

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Important! Read this information about

exposure to radio frequency signals

before using Safety Connect;

The Safety Connect system installed in

your vehicle is a low-power radio trans-

mitter and receiver. It receives and also

sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Commu-

nications Commission (FCC) adopted

RF exposure guidelines with safety lev-

els for mobile wireless phones. Those

guidelines are consistent with the

safety standards previously set by the

following U.S. and international stan-

dards bodies.

-ANSI (American National Stan-

dards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

-NCRP (National Council on Radia-

tion Protection and Measurement)

Report 86 [1986]

-ICNIRP (International Commission

on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protec-

tion) [1996]

Those standards were based on com-

prehensive and periodic evaluations of

the relevant scientific literature. Over

120 scientists, engineers, and physi-

cians from universities, and govern-

ment health agencies and industries

reviewed the available body of

research to develop the ANSI Stan-

dard (C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect com-

plies with the FCC guidelines in addi-

tion to those standards.

Safety information for Safety

Connect

369

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehi-

cle exterior................................370

Cleaning and protecting the vehi-

cle interior.................................373

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

........................................................378

General maintenance.............379

Emission inspection and mainte-

nance (I/M) programs.........382

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

........................................................383

Hood...............................................385

Positioning a floor jack............385

Engine compartment...............387

12-volt battery.............................393

Tires ................................................395

Replacing the tire......................405

Tire inflation pressure..............408

Wheels............................................410

Air conditioning filter................. 411

Electronic key battery..............413

Checking and replacing fuses

.........................................................414

Light bulbs.....................................417

370 6-1. Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-1.Maintenance and care

-Working from top to bottom, liber-

ally apply water to the vehicle body,

wheel wells and underside of the

vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

-Wash the vehicle body using a

sponge or soft cloth, such as a

chamois.

-For hard-to-remove marks, use car

wash soap and rinse thoroughly with

water.

-Wipe away any water.

-Wax the vehicle when the water-

proof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface,

apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■Self-restoring coat

The vehicle body has a self-restoring coat-

ing that is resistant to small surface

scratches caused in a car wash etc.

●The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from

when the vehicle is delivered from the

plant.

●The restoration time differs depending on

the depth of the scratch and outside tem-

perature.

The restoration time may become

shorter when the coating is warmed by

applying warm water.

●Deep scratches caused by keys, coins,

etc. cannot be restored.

●Do not use wax that contains abrasives.

■Automatic car washes

●Before washing the vehicle:

• Fold the mirrors

• Turn off the power trunk opener and

closer

Start washing from the front of the vehicle.

Extend the mirrors before driving.

●Brushes used in automatic car washes

may scratch the vehicle surface and harm

your vehicle’s paint.

■High pressure car washes

●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash

to come within close proximity of the win-

dows and the air suspension unit (if

equipped).

●Before using the car wash, check that the

fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed

properly.

■When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the

electronic key is within the effective range,

the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In

that case, follow the following correction

procedures to wash the vehicle:

●Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or

more separate from the vehicle while the

vehicle is being washed. (Take care to

ensure that the key is not stolen.)

●Set the electronic key to battery-saving

mode to disable the smart access system

with push-button start. (→P.120)

■Aluminum wheels

●Remove any dirt immediately by using a

neutral detergent.

●Wash detergent off with water immedi-

ately after use.

●To protect the paint from damage, make

sure to observe the following precau-

tions.

• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive

detergent

• Do not use hard brushes

• Do not use detergent on the wheels when

they are hot, such as after driving or park-

ing in hot weather

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle exterior

Perform cleaning in a manner

appropriate to each component

and its material.

Cleaning instructions

371

6-1. Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

■Brake caliper coating (F SPORT mod-

els)

●When using detergent, use neutral deter-

gent. Do not use hard brushes or abra-

sive cleaners, as they will damage the

coating.

●Do not use detergent on the brake cali-

pers when they are hot.

●Wash detergent off immediately after

use.

■Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

■Front side windows water-repellent

coating (if equipped)

●The following precautions can extend the

effectiveness of the water-repellent coat-

ing.

• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side

windows regularly.

• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate

on the windows for a long period.

Clean the windows with a soft, damp

cloth as soon as possible.

• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that

contain abrasives when cleaning the win-

dows.

• Do not use any metallic objects to

remove condensation build up.

●When the water-repellent performance

has become insufficient, the coating can

be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■Plated portions

If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as

follows:

●Use a soft cloth dampened with an

approximately 5% solution of neutral

detergent and water to clean the dirt off.

●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to

remove any remaining moisture.

●To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet

wipes or a similar product.

WARNING

■When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the

engine compartment. Doing so may

cause the electrical components, etc. to

catch fire.

■When cleaning the windshield

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-

ers may operate unexpectedly in the fol-

lowing situations, and may result in hands

being caught or other serious injuries

and cause damage to the wiper blades.

Off

AUTO

●When the upper part of the windshield

where the raindrop sensor is located is

touched by hand

●When a wet rag or similar is held close

to the raindrop sensor

●If something bumps against the wind-

shield

●If you directly touch the raindrop sen-

sor body or if something bumps into

the raindrop sensor

■Precautions regarding the exhaust

pipes

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes

to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not

to touch the pipes until it has cooled suffi-

ciently, as touching a hot exhaust pipes

can cause burns.

372 6-1. Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

■Precaution regarding the front

bumper (vehicles with Lexus Safety

System+A)

If the paint of the front bumper is chipped

or scratched, the Lexus Safety System+A

may not function correctly. If this occurs,

consult your Lexus dealer.

■Precaution regarding the rear

bumper

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped

or scratched, the following systems may

not function correctly. If this occurs, con-

sult your Lexus dealer.

●Lexus Safety System+A (if equipped)

●BSM

●RCTA

●PKSB

NOTICE

■To prevent paint deterioration and

corrosion on the body and compo-

nents (aluminum wheels, etc.)

●Wash the vehicle immediately in the

following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the

paint surface

• If dead insects, insect droppings or

bird droppings are present on the

paint surface

• After driving in an area contaminated

with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron

powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled

with dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline

are spilled on the paint surface

●If the paint is chipped or scratched,

have it repaired immediately.

●To prevent the wheels from corroding,

remove any dirt and store in a place

with low humidity when storing the

wheels.

■Cleaning the exterior lights

●Wash carefully. Do not use organic

substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the

lights.

●Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the

lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■When using an automatic car wash

Set the wiper switch to the off position.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-

ers may operate and the wiper blades

may be damaged.

■When using a high pressure car wash

●When washing the vehicle, do not

spray the camera or its surrounding

area directly with a high pressure

washer. Shock applied from high pres-

sure water may cause the device to not

operate normally.

●Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or resin manufactured

cover), connectors or the following

parts. The parts may be damaged if

they come into contact with high-pres-

sure water.

• Traction related parts

•Steering parts

• Suspension parts

• Brake parts

●Do not wash the underside of the vehi-

cle using a high pressure car washer.

373

6-1. Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

-Remove dirt and dust using a vac-

uum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces

with a cloth dampened with luke-

warm water.

-If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off

with a soft cloth dampened with

neutral detergent diluted to approx-

imately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from

the cloth and thoroughly wipe off

remaining traces of detergent and

water.

■Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type

cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush

to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping cir-

cles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces

and let them dry. Excellent results are

obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as

possible.

■Handling the seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water

using a cloth or sponge. Also check the

belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying

or cuts.

■When cleaning the carpeted portions of

the glove box, console box, etc.

If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a

possibility that the surface of the carpet

could be damaged.

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle interior

Perform cleaning in a manner

appropriate to each component

and its material.

Protecting the vehicle interior

WARNING

■Water in the vehicle

●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehi-

cle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid

battery (traction battery) air vents, and

in the trunk. (→P.64)

Doing so may cause the hybrid battery,

electrical components, etc. to mal-

function or catch fire.

●Do not get any of the SRS components

or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(→P.29)

An electrical malfunction may cause

the airbags to deploy or not function

properly, resulting in death or serious

injury.

■Cleaning the interior (especially

instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner.

The instrument panel may reflect off the

windshield, obstructing the driver’s view

and leading to an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■Cleaning detergents

●Do not use the following types of

detergent, as they may discolor the

vehicle interior or cause streaks or

damage to painted surfaces:

• Areas other than the seats and steer-

ing wheel: Organic substances such as

benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic

solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats : Alkaline or acidic solutions,

such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

• Steering wheel: Organic substances,

such as thinner, and cleaner that con-

tains alcohol

●Do not use polish wax or polish

cleaner. The instrument panel’s or

other interior part’s painted surface

may be damaged.

374 6-1. Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

To prevent the hybrid battery (traction

battery) air intake vents from becom-

ing clogged, clean them periodically.

Clean the vents of the both sides.

■Cleaning the air intake vents

Remove any dust and clogs from the

air intake vents with a vacuum cleaner,

etc.

The filters are attached to the back side of

the air intake vent grilles.

If “Maintenance Required for Traction

Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s

Manual” is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display, the filters may be

clogged. Remove the air intake vent

grilles and clean the filters.

NOTICE

■Preventing damage to leather sur-

faces

Observe the following precautions to

avoid damage to and deterioration of

leather surfaces:

●Remove any dust or dirt from leather

surfaces immediately.

●Do not expose the vehicle to direct

sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, espe-

cially during summer.

●Do not place items made of vinyl, plas-

tic, or containing wax on the uphol-

stery, as they may stick to the leather

surface if the vehicle interior heats up

significantly.

■Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system

may be damaged if water comes into

contact with electrical components such

as the audio system above or under the

floor of the vehicle. Water may also

cause the body to rust.

■When cleaning the inside of the wind-

shield

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the

camera sensor lens. Also, do not touch

the lens. (→P.197, 204)

■Cleaning the inside of the rear win-

dow

●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the

rear window, as this may cause dam-

age to the rear window defogger

heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth

dampened with lukewarm water to

gently wipe the window clean. Wipe

the window in strokes running parallel

to the heater wires or antenna.

●Be careful not to scratch or damage

the heater wires or antenna.

Cleaning the hybrid battery

(traction battery) air intake vents

375

6-1. Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

■Cleaning the air intake vent filters

1Remove the grille.

2Remove the filter.

3Remove any dust and clogs from

the filter using a vacuum cleaner,

etc.

Make sure to also remove dust and clogs

from the inner side of the air intake vent

grille.

If the filter is damaged, have it replaced by

your Lexus dealer.

4Install the filter in its original posi-

tion, and then install the grille.

5Start the hybrid system and check

that “Maintenance Required for

Traction Battery Cooling Parts See

Owner’s Manual” is no longer dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play.

It may take approximately 20 minutes after

the hybrid system is started until the warn-

ing message disappears. If the warning

message does not disappear, have the

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Air intake vents maintenance

●If the vehicle is driven with the air intake

vents clogged, the hybrid battery (trac-

tion battery) may not be cooled suffi-

ciently, possibly causing in fuel

consumption.

●Depending on the conditions under

which the vehicle is used, the air intake

vents may need to be cleaned more reg-

ularly.

■Cleaning the air intake vent filters

●Improper handling of the air intake vent

grilles and filters may result in damage to

them. If you have any concerns about

cleaning the filter, contact your Lexus

dealer.

●If the vehicle is driven with the air intake

vent filter clogged, the hybrid battery

(traction battery) may not be cooled suf-

ficiently, possibly causing an increase in

the fuel consumption and damage to the

hybrid battery (traction battery).

●Depending on the conditions under

which the vehicle is used, the air intake

vent filters may need to be cleaned more

regularly.

■If “Maintenance Required for Traction

Battery Cooling Parts See Owner’s

Manual” is displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

●It is possible the air intake vents or filters

are clogged due to accumulated dust.

Clean the air intake vents and filters,

referring to the cleaning method.

●If the vehicle is driven continuously with

376 6-1. Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

this message displayed, the hybrid bat-

tery (traction battery) may not be cooled

sufficiently, which may lead to the driving

distance by the electric motor becoming

shorter and damage to the hybrid battery

(traction battery). Clean the air intake

vents periodically to prevent dust, etc.,

from collecting in the air intake vents and

filters.

●If the massage in the multi-information

display does not turn off, even if the air

intake vents are cleaned, have the vehicle

inspected at your Lexus dealer.

-Remove dirt using a water-damp-

ened soft cloth or synthetic chamois.

-Wipe the surface with a dry, soft

cloth to remove any remaining

moisture.

■Cleaning the areas with satin-finish

metal accents

The metal areas use a layer of real metal for

the surface. It is necessary to clean them

regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for

long periods of time, they may be difficult to

clean.

-Remove dirt and dust using a vac-

uum cleaner.

-Wipe off any excess dirt and dust

with a soft cloth dampened with

diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approxi-

mately 5% neutral wool detergent.

-Wring out any excess water from

the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all

remaining traces of detergent.

-Wipe the surface with a dry, soft

cloth to remove any remaining

moisture. Allow the leather to dry in

a shaded and ventilated area.

■Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of

the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain

the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

-Remove dirt and dust using a vac-

uum cleaner.

-Wipe it off with a soft cloth damp-

ened with neutral detergent diluted

to approximately 1%.

-Wring out any excess water from

the cloth and thoroughly wipe off

remaining traces of detergent and

water.

-To remove dust from the fabric, use

WARNING

■When cleaning the hybrid battery

(traction battery) air intake vents/fil-

ters

●Do not use water or other liquids to

clean the air intake vents/filters. If

water is applied to the hybrid battery

(traction battery) or other compo-

nents, a malfunction or fire may occur.

●When the air intake vent grilles,

located near the rear seats are to be

removed, make sure to turn the power

switch off to stop the hybrid system.

Cleaning the areas with satin-fin-

ish metal accents

Cleaning the leather areas

Cleaning the synthetic leather

areas

Cleaning fabric portions of the

instrument panel

377

6-1. Maintenance and care

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

a vacuum cleaner or adhesive tape.

-Use a cloth dampened with water to

gently wipe the fabric clean.

Do not use detergents to clean the fabric.

378 6-2. Maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

6-2.Maintenance

■Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts

be used for repairs to ensure performance

of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used

in replacement or if a repair shop other than

a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm

the warranty coverage.

■Allow inspection and repairs to be per-

formed by a Lexus dealer

●Lexus technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information. They are well

informed about the operation of all sys-

tems on your vehicle.

●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves

that the maintenance that has been per-

formed is under warranty coverage. If any

problem should arise while your vehicle is

under warranty, your Lexus dealer will

promptly take care of it.

General maintenance should be per-

formed on a daily basis. This can be

done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

Scheduled maintenance should be

performed at specified intervals

according to the maintenance sched-

ule.

For details about maintenance items and

schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Ser-

vice Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.

■Resetting the message indicating main-

tenance is required

After the required maintenance is per-

formed according to the maintenance

schedule, please reset the message.

To reset the message, follow the procedure

described below:

1Press or of the meter control

switch to select .

2Press or to select “Vehicle Set-

tings” and then press .

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driv-

ing, day-to-day care and regular

maintenance are essential. It is the

owner’s responsibility to perform

regular checks. Lexus recommends

the maintenance below.

WARNING

■If your vehicle is not properly main-

tained

Improper maintenance could result in

serious damage to the vehicle and possi-

ble death or serious injury.

■Handling of the 12-volt battery

●Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and a wide variety of automobile

components contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects and

other reproductive harm. Work in a

well ventilated area.

●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehi-

cles as well as waste produced by

component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive harm.

Avoid exposure and wash any affected

area immediately.

●12-volt battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds which are known to

cause brain damage. Wash your hands

after handling. (→P.393)

General maintenance

Scheduled maintenance

379

6-2. Maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

3Press or to select “Scheduled

Maintenance” and then press .

4Press or to select “Yes” and

then press .

A message will be displayed on the

multi-information display when the reset

procedure has been completed.

You can perform some maintenance

procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself

maintenance may affect warranty cov-

erage.

The use of Lexus repair manuals is recom-

mended.

For details about warranty coverage, refer

to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “War-

ranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Man-

ual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

General maintenance

Listed below are the general main-

tenance items that should be per-

formed at the intervals specified in

the “Warranty and Service Guide”

or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any prob-

lem you notice should be brought to

the attention of your Lexus dealer

or qualified service shop for advice.

WARNING

■If the hybrid system is operating

Turn the hybrid system off and ensure

that there is adequate ventilation before

performing maintenance checks.

Engine compartment

Items Check points

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the

correct level?

(→P.391)

Engine/power

control unit cool-

ant

Is the engine/power

control unit coolant at

the correct level?

(→P.390)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the

correct level?

(→P.388)

Exhaust system

There should not be

any fumes or strange

sounds.

380 6-2. Maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Radiator/con-

denser

The radiator and con-

denser should be free

from foreign objects.

(→P.391)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient

washer fluid?

(→P.392)

Trunk

Items Check points

12-volt battery Check the connec-

tions. (→P.393)

Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator

pedal

• The accelerator

pedal should move

smoothly (without

uneven pedal effort

or catching).

Hybrid transmis-

sion “Park” mech-

anism

•When parked on a

slope and the shift

position is in P, is the

vehicle securely

stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake

pedal move

smoothly?

• Does the brake

pedal have appro-

priate clearance

from the floor?

• Does the brake

pedal have the cor-

rect amount of free

play?

Items Check points

Brakes

• The vehicle should

not pull to one side

when the brakes are

applied.

•The brakes should

work effectively.

• The brake pedal

should not feel

spongy.

• The brake pedal

should not get too

close to the floor

when the brakes are

applied.

Head restraints

•Do the head

restraints move

smoothly and lock

securely?

Indicators/buzz-

ers

•Do the indicators

and buzzers function

properly?

Lights • Do all the lights

come on?

Parking brake

• Does the parking

brake operate nor-

mally?

• When parked on a

slope and the park-

ing brake is on, is the

vehicle securely

stopped?

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts

operate smoothly?

• The seat belts should

not be damaged.

Items Check points

381

6-2. Maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Seats • Do the seat controls

operate properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering

wheel rotate

smoothly?

• Does the steering

wheel have the cor-

rect amount of free

play?

•There should not be

any strange sounds

coming from the

steering wheel.

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points

Doors/trunk • Do the doors/trunk

operate smoothly?

Engine hood

•Does the engine

hood lock system

work properly?

Fluid leaks

•There should not be

any signs of fluid

leakage after the

vehicle has been

parked.

Items Check points

Tires

• Is the tire inflation

pressure correct?

• The tires should not

be damaged or

excessively worn.

• Have the tires been

rotated according to

the maintenance

schedule?

•The wheel nuts

should not be loose.

Windshield wip-

ers

• The wiper blades

should not show any

signs of cracking,

splitting, wear, con-

tamination or defor-

mation.

• The wiper blades

should clear the

windshield without

streaking or skip-

ping.

Items Check points

382 6-2. Maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The OBD system determines that a

problem exists somewhere in the emis-

sion control system. Your vehicle may

not pass the I/M test and may need to

be repaired. Contact your Lexus

dealer to service the vehicle.

-When the 12-volt battery is discon-

nected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordi-

nary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the

readiness codes may not be completely

set.

-When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on

indicating a temporary malfunction and

your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The error code in the OBD system will

not be cleared unless the vehicle is

driven 40 or more times.

Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare

the vehicle for re-testing.

Emission inspection and

maintenance (I/M) pro-

grams

Some states have vehicle emission

inspection programs which include

OBD (On Board Diagnostics)

checks. The OBD system monitors

the operation of the emission con-

trol system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on

Your vehicle may not pass the

I/M test in the following situa-

tions:

When the malfunction indicator

lamp still remains on after sev-

eral driving trips

If your vehicle does not pass the

I/M test

383

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

6-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service pre-

cautions

If you perform maintenance by

yourself, be sure to follow the cor-

rect procedure as given in these

sections.

Maintenance

Items Parts and tools

12-volt battery

condition

(→P.393)

•Grease

• Conventional

wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level

(→P.391)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT

3 or SAE J1703

brake fluid

FMVSS No.116 DOT

4 or SAE J1704

brake fluid

•Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for

adding brake fluid)

Engine/power

control unit cool-

ant level

(→P.390)

•“Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant” or a

similar high quality

ethylene gly-

col-based non-sili-

cate, non-amine,

non-nitrite and

non-borate coolant

with long-life hybrid

organic acid tech-

nology

For the U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant” is

pre-mixed with 50%

coolant and 50%

deionized water.

For Canada:

“Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant” is

pre-mixed with 55%

coolant and 45%

deionized water.

•Funnel (used only for

adding coolant)

Engine oil level

(→P.388)

•“Toyota Genuine

Motor Oil” or equiv-

alent

• Rag or paper towel

•Funnel (used only for

adding engine oil)

Fuses (→P.414)

•Fuse with same

amperage rating as

original

Radiator and con-

denser (→P.391) ⎯

Items Parts and tools

384 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Tire inflation pres-

sure (→P.408)

• Tire pressure gauge

•Compressed air

source

Washer fluid

(→P.392)

• Water or washer

fluid containing anti-

freeze (for winter

use)

• Funnel (used only for

adding water or

washer fluid)

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many

mechanisms and fluids that may move

suddenly, become hot, or become elec-

trically energized. To avoid death or seri-

ous injury, observe the following

precautions.

■When working on the engine com-

partment

●Make sure that the “ACCESSORY” or

“IGNITION ON” on the multi-infor-

mation display and the “READY” indi-

cator are both off.

●Keep hands, clothing and tools away

from the moving fan and engine drive

belt.

●Be careful not to touch the engine,

power control unit, radiator, exhaust

manifold, etc. right after driving as they

may be hot. Oil and other fluids may

also be hot.

●Do not leave anything that may burn

easily, such as paper and rags, in the

engine compartment.

●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose

an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are

flammable.

Items Parts and tools ■When working near the electric cool-

ing fan or radiator grille

Be sure the power switch is off.

With the power switch in ON mode, the

electric cooling fan may automatically

start to run if the air conditioning is on

and/or the coolant temperature is high.

(→P.391)

■Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or

falling material, fluid spray, etc. from get-

ting in your eyes.

NOTICE

■If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter

removed may cause excessive engine

wear due to dirt in the air.

385

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

1Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

2Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and

lift the hood.

■Front

2WD models

Hood

Opening the hood

WARNING

■Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and

locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may

open while the vehicle is in motion and

cause an accident, which may result in

death or serious injury.

Positioning a floor jack

When using a floor jack, follow the

instructions in the manual provided

with the jack and perform the oper-

ation safely.

When raising your vehicle with a

floor jack, position the jack cor-

rectly. Improper placement may

damage your vehicle or cause

injury.

Location of the jack point

386 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

AWD models

■Rear

387

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Engine oil level dipstick (→P.388)

Power control unit coolant reservoir (→P.390)

Engine coolant reservoir (→P.390)

Engine oil filler cap (→P.389)

Brake fluid reservoir (→P.391)

Fuse boxes (→P.414)

Washer fluid tank (→P.392)

Engine coolant radiator (→P.391)

Power control unit coolant radiator (→P.391)

Electric cooling fan

Condenser (→P.391)

■12-volt battery

→P.393

Engine compartment

Components

388 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Removing the engine compartment cover

Outside

Front

■Installing the clips

1Push up center portion

2Insert

3Press

With the engine at operating tempera-

ture and turned off, check the oil level

on the dipstick.

■Checking the engine oil

1Park the vehicle on level ground.

After warming up the engine and

turning off the hybrid system, wait

more than 5 minutes for the oil to

Engine compartment cover

NOTICE

■Checking the engine compartment

cover after installation

Make sure that the cover is securely

installed in its original position.

Checking and adding the engine

oil

389

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

drain back into the bottom of the

engine.

2Holding a rag under the end, pull

the dipstick out.

3Wipe the dipstick clean.

4Reinsert the dipstick fully.

5Holding a rag under the end, pull

the dipstick out and check the oil

level.

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may differ

depending on the type of vehicle or

engine.

6Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it

fully.

■Checking the oil type and prepar-

ing the item needed

Make sure to check the oil type and

prepare the items needed before add-

ing oil.

-Engine oil selection

→P.462

-Oil quantity (Low → Full)

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)

-Item

Clean funnel

■Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low

level mark, add engine oil of the same

type as that already in the engine.

1Remove the oil filler cap by turning

it counterclockwise.

2Add engine oil slowly, checking the

dipstick.

3Install the oil filler cap by turning it

clockwise.

■Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be con-

sumed while driving. In the following situa-

tions, oil consumption may increase, and

engine oil may need to be refilled in

between oil maintenance intervals.

●When the engine is new, for example

directly after purchasing the vehicle or

after replacing the engine

●If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate

viscosity is used

●When driving at high engine speeds or

390 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

with a heavy load, or when driving while

accelerating or decelerating frequently

●When leaving the engine idling for a long

time, or when driving frequently through

heavy traffic

■After changing the engine oil

The engine oil maintenance data should be

reset. Perform the following procedures:

1Press or of the meter control

switch to select .

2Press or to select “Vehicle Set-

tings” and then press .

3Press or to select “Oil Mainte-

nance” and then press .

4Press or to select “Yes” and

then press .

A message will be displayed on the

multi-information display when the reset

procedure has been completed.

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is

between the “F” and “L” lines on the

reservoir when the engine is cold.

■Engine coolant reservoir

Reservoir cap

“F” line

“L” line

If the level is on or below the “L” line, add

coolant up to the “F” line. (→P.453)

■Power control unit coolant reser-

voir

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is

between the “F” and “L” lines on the

reservoir when the hybrid system is

WARNING

■Used engine oil

●Used engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as inflamma-

tion and skin cancer, so care should be

taken to avoid prolonged and

repeated contact. To remove used

engine oil from your skin, wash thor-

oughly with soap and water.

●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a

safe and acceptable manner. Do not

dispose of used oil and filters in house-

hold trash, in sewers or onto the

ground.

Call your Lexus dealer, service station

or auto parts store for information

concerning recycling or disposal.

●Do not leave used engine oil within the

reach of children.

NOTICE

■To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■When replacing the engine oil

●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the

vehicle components.

●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could

be damaged.

●Check the oil level on the dipstick

every time you refill the vehicle.

●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is prop-

erly tightened.

Checking the coolant

391

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

cold.

Reservoir cap

“F” line

“L” line

If the level is on or below the “L” line, add

coolant up to the “F” line. (→P.453)

■Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or a similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,

and non-borate coolant with long-life

hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-

ture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized

water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F

[-35°C])

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-

ture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized

water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F

[-42°C])

For more details about coolant, contact

your Lexus dealer.

■If the coolant level drops within a short

time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses,

engine/power control unit coolant reservoir

caps, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus

dealer test the cap and check for leaks in

the cooling system.

Check the radiator and condenser and

clear away any foreign objects. If either

of the above parts is extremely dirty or

you are not sure of their condition,

have your vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

■Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be

WARNING

■When the hybrid system is hot

Do not remove the engine/power control

unit coolant reservoir caps. (→P.456)

The cooling system may be under pres-

sure and may spray hot coolant if the cap

is removed, causing serious injuries, such

as burns.

NOTICE

■When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor

straight antifreeze. The correct mixture

of water and antifreeze must be used to

provide proper lubrication, corrosion

protection and cooling. Be sure to read

the antifreeze or coolant label.

■If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to pre-

vent it from damaging parts or paint.

Checking the radiator and con-

denser

WARNING

■When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser

as they may be hot and cause serious

injuries, such as burns.

Checking and adding the brake

fluid

392 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines

on the tank.

■Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and

prepare the necessary item.

-Fluid type

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703

brake fluid

FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704

brake fluid

-Item

Clean funnel

■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from

the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause

a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use

only newly opened brake fluid.

If any washer does not work or the

warning message appears on the

multi-information display, the washer

tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

WARNING

■When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your

hands and eyes and damage painted sur-

faces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes,

flush the affected area with clean water

immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a

doctor.

NOTICE

■If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go

down slightly as the brake pads wear out

or when the fluid level in the accumulator

is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling,

there may be a serious problem.

Adding the washer fluid

WARNING

■When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid

system is hot or operating as washer fluid

contains alcohol and may catch fire if

spilled on the engine, etc.

NOTICE

■Do not use any fluid other than

washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine anti-

freeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the

vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as

damaging the pump leading to problems

of the washer fluid not spraying.

393

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

The 12-volt battery is located in the

trunk under the luggage mat.

Removing the luggage mat: →P.348

■Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery pro-

duces hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. Therefore, observe the fol-

lowing precautions before recharging:

●If recharging with the 12-volt battery

installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-

nect the ground cable.

●Make sure the power switch on the char-

ger is off when connecting and discon-

necting the charger cables to the 12-volt

battery.

■After recharging/reconnecting the

12-volt battery

●Unlocking the doors using the smart

access system with push-button may not

be possible immediately after reconnect-

ing the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use

the wireless remote control or the

mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

●Start the hybrid system with the power

switch in ACCESSORY mode. The

hybrid system may not start with the

power switch turned off. However, the

hybrid system will operate normally from

the second attempt.

●The power switch mode is recorded by

the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is recon-

NOTICE

■Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as neces-

sary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed

on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

12-volt battery

Location

394 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

nected, the vehicle will return the power

switch mode to the status it was in before

the 12-volt battery was disconnected.

Make sure to turn off the power before

disconnecting the 12-volt battery. Take

extra care when connecting the 12-volt

battery if the power switch mode prior to

discharge is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple

attempts, contact your Lexus dealer.

Make sure that the 12-volt battery ter-

minals are not corroded and that there

are no loose connections, cracks, or

loose clamps.

WARNING

■Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid and may pro-

duce hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. To reduce the risk of death

or serious injury, take the following pre-

cautions while working on or near the

12-volt battery:

●Do not cause sparks by touching the

12-volt battery terminals with tools.

●Do not smoke or light a match near the

12-volt battery.

●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and

clothes.

●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

●Wear protective safety glasses when

working near the 12-volt battery.

●Keep children away from the 12-volt

battery.

■Where to safely charge the 12-volt

battery

Always charge the 12-volt battery in an

open area. Do not charge the 12-volt bat-

tery in a garage or closed room where

there is insufficient ventilation.

■Emergency measures regarding

electrolyte

●If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get immediate

medical attention. If possible, continue

to apply water with a sponge or cloth

while traveling to the nearest medical

facility.

●If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If

you feel pain or burning, get medical

attention immediately.

●If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your

skin. Immediately take off the clothing

and follow the procedure above if nec-

essary.

●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk.

Get emergency medical attention

immediately.

■When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for this

vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas

(hydrogen) to enter the passenger com-

partment, causing a fire or explosion.

For replacement of the 12-volt battery,

contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

■When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while

the hybrid system is operating. Also, be

sure all accessories are turned off.

Exterior

395

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

Check the 12-volt battery condition by

indicator color.

Blue: Good condition

Red: Charging is necessary.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

Clear: Replacement is necessary.

Have the 12-volt battery checked

by your Lexus dealer.

Check if the treadwear indicators are

showing on the tires. Also check the

tires for uneven wear, such as excessive

wear on one side of the tread.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is

shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, etc.,

molded into the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indica-

tors are showing on a tire.

Checking the 12-volt battery

condition

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accor-

dance with maintenance schedules

and treadwear.

Checking tires

396 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

●The treadwear indicators are showing on

a tire.

●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits,

cracks deep enough to expose the fabric,

and bulges indicating internal damage

●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be

properly repaired due to the size or loca-

tion of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus

dealer.

■Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked

by a qualified technician even if it has sel-

dom or never been used or damage is not

obvious.

■Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the

replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of

either the front axle or the rear axle, which-

ever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.

For the maximum load of the tire, see the

load limit at maximum cold tire inflation

pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the

tire. (→P.472)

■Tire types

●Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance

tires best suited to highway driving under

dry conditions. Since summer tires do not

have the same traction performance as

snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for

driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For

driving on snow-covered roads or icy

roads, the use of snow tires is recom-

mended. When installing snow tires, be

sure to replace all four tires.

●All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide

better traction in snow and to be adequate

for driving in most winter conditions as well

as for use year-round. All season tires,

however, do not have adequate traction

performance compared with snow tires in

heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires

fall short in acceleration and handling per-

formance compared with summer tires in

highway driving.

●Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy

roads, we recommend using snow tires. If

you need snow tires, select tires of the

same size, construction and load capacity

as the originally installed tires. Since your

vehicle has radial tires as original equip-

ment, make sure your snow tires also have

radial construction. Do not install studded

tires without first checking local regula-

tions for possible restrictions. Snow tires

should be installed on all wheels.

(→P.309)

■If the tread on snow tires wears down

below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is

lost.

WARNING

■When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to

prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to

parts of the drive train as well as danger-

ous handling characteristics, which may

lead to an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

397

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Vehicles with front and rear tires of

the same size

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life,

Lexus recommends that tire rotation is car-

ried out at the same interval as tire inspec-

tion.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure

warning system after tire rotation.

Vehicles with front and rear tires of

differing sizes

Tires cannot be rotated.

When run-flat tires are installed, the

vehicle can be driven for a maximum of

100 miles (160 km) at a speed below

50 mph (80 km/h) after any tire goes

flat. (However, the vehicle speed may

not increase to near 50 mph [80

km/h] depending on weather or driv-

ing conditions.)

A run-flat tire has a mark on

the side wall.

Make sure to replace the flat tire before the

vehicle has been driven for near 100 miles

(160 km). Also, do not use a repaired tire.

■Run-flat tires

●The run-flat tires are for only this vehicle.

Do not use the tires on other vehicles.

●Do not mix run-flat tires and normal tires.

●If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used, it

may be impossible to sufficiently demon-

strate the performance of run-flat tires.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire

pressure warning system that uses tire

pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters to detect low tire inflation pressure

WARNING

●Do not mix tires of different makes,

models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably

different treadwear.

●Do not use tire sizes other than those

recommended by Lexus.

●Do not mix differently constructed

tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply

tires).

●Do not mix summer, all season and

snow tires.

●Do not use tires that have been used

on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know

how they were used previously.

NOTICE

■Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on

roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire

inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-

ing ability of the tires. In addition, driving

on rough roads may cause damage to

the tires themselves, as well as the vehi-

cle’s wheels and body.

Tire rotation

Run-flat tires

Tire pressure warning system

398 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

before serious problems arise.

-The tire pressure detected by the

tire pressure warning system can be

displayed on the multi-information

display. (→P.86)

-If the tire pressure drops below a

predetermined level, the driver is

warned by a screen display and a

warning light. (→P.431)

■Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not

replace routine tire inflation pressure

checks. Make sure to check tire inflation

pressure as part of your routine of daily

vehicle checks.

■Tire inflation pressure

●It may take a few minutes to display the

tire inflation pressure after the power

switch is turned to ON mode. It may also

take a few minutes to display the tire infla-

tion pressure after inflation pressure has

been adjusted.

●Tire inflation pressure changes with tem-

perature. The displayed values may also

be different from the values measured

using a tire pressure gauge.

■Situations in which the tire pressure

warning system may not operate prop-

erly

●In the following cases, the tire pressure

warning system may not operate prop-

erly.

• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.

• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that

is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.

• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that

is not of the specified size.

• If tire chains, etc. are installed.

• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is

equipped.

• If a window tint that affects the radio wave

signals is installed.

• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehi-

cle, particularly around the wheels or

wheel housings.

• If the tire inflation pressure is much higher

than the specified level.

• If wheels not equipped with tire pressure

warning valves and transmitter are used.

• If the ID code on the tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters is not regis-

tered in the tire pressure warning

computer.

●Performance may be affected in the fol-

lowing situations.

• When driving near a TV tower, electric

power plant, gas station, radio station,

large display, airport or other facility that

generates strong radio waves or electri-

cal noise

• When carrying a portable radio, cellular

phone, cordless phone or other wireless

communication device

If tire position information is not correctly

displayed due to the radio wave conditions,

the display may be corrected by changing

the location of the vehicle as the radio wave

conditions may change.

●When the vehicle is stopped, the time

taken for the warning to start or turn off

may be longer.

●When the inflation pressure of a tire

drops rapidly, for example when a tire has

burst, the warning may not operate.

399

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

■Warning performance of the tire pres-

sure warning system

The warning of the tire pressure warning

system will change in accordance with driv-

ing conditions. For this reason, the system

may give a warning even if the tire pressure

does not reach a low enough level, or if the

pressure is higher than the pressure that

was adjusted to when the system was initial-

ized.

■Tire pressure warning system certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

400 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

For vehicles sold in Canada

401

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

When replacing the tires or wheels, the

tire pressure warning valve and trans-

mitters must be installed to the wheels

which will be installed to the vehicle.

When new tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters are installed,

new ID codes must be registered in the

tire pressure warning computer and

the tire pressure warning system must

be initialized. (→P.403)

■Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitters are not registered,

the tire pressure warning system will not

work properly. In this case, after driving for

about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning

light will blink for approximately 1 minute

and then illuminate to indicate a system

malfunction.

■The tire pressure warning system

must be initialized in the following

circumstances:

-When the tire inflation pressure is

changed such as when changing

traveling speed or load weight.

-When the tire inflation pressure is

changed such as when the tire size

is changed.

-When rotating the tires.

-After performing the transmitter ID

code registration procedure.

(→P.403)

When the tire pressure warning system

is initialized, the current tire inflation

pressure is set as the benchmark pres-

sure.

■How to initialize the tire pressure

warning system

1Park the vehicle in a safe place and

turn the power switch off.

The initialization procedure cannot be

started while the vehicle is moving.

2Adjust the tire inflation pressure to

the specified cold tire inflation pres-

sure level.

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the

specified cold tire inflation pressure level.

The tire pressure warning system will oper-

ate based on this pressure level.

3Turn the power switch to ON

mode.

4Press or of the meter con-

trol switch to select .

Installing tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,

tire pressure warning valves, trans-

mitters and tire valve caps

●When removing or fitting the wheels,

tires or the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters, contact your

Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters may be

damaged if not handled correctly.

●Make sure to install the tire valve caps.

If the tire valve caps are not installed,

water may enter the valves of the tire

pressure warning valve and transmit-

ters and the valves may become stuck.

●When replacing tire valve caps, do not

use tire valve caps other than those

specified. The cap may become stuck.

Initializing the tire pressure

warning system

402 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5Press or to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press .

6Press or to select “TPWS”

and then press .

7Press or to select “Set

Pressure”. Then press and hold

until the tire pressure warning light

blinks 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the

multi-information display.

“--” will be displayed on the multiinforma-

tion display for the inflation pressure of

each tire while initialization is being per-

formed.

8Drive straight (with occasional left

and right turns) at approximately

25 mph (40 km/h) or more for

approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

Initialization is complete when the position

of each tire is determined and the inflation

pressure of each tire is displayed on the

multi-information display.

Initialization may take longer than approxi-

mately 1 hour in certain situations, such as

when the vehicle is stopped for a long time

at traffic lights, etc. (→P.402)

■Initialization procedure

●Make sure to perform the initialization

procedure after adjusting the tire inflation

pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before

performing the initialization procedure or

adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

●If the power switch is turned off during

initialization, it is not necessary to restart

the initialization procedure from the

beginning as it will begin automatically

when the power switch is turned back to

ON mode.

●If initialization has accidentally been

started when it is not necessary, adjust

the tire inflation pressure to the specified

level when the tires are cold and then

perform the initialization procedure

again.

●While the position of each tire is being

determined and the inflation pressures

are not being displayed on the

multi-information display, if the inflation

pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure

warning light will come on.

■If the tire pressure warning system is not

initialized properly

●In the following situations, initialization

may take longer than usual to be com-

pleted or may not be possible. (Usually,

the vehicle will need to be driven for

approximately 10 to 30 minutes to com-

plete initialization.) If initialization is not

complete after driving approximately 30

minutes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved

road, it may take longer to complete ini-

tialization.

• If the vehicle is backed up while perform-

ing initialization, data collected during ini-

tialization will be cleared and it will take

longer than normal to complete.

• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or

another situation where other vehicles

are driven close by, it may take time for

the system to recognize the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitters of your

vehicle over those of other vehicles.

If initialization is not complete after driving

for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in

a safe place for approximately 20 minutes

and then drive the vehicle again.

●In the following situations, initialization

will not be started or was not completed

properly and the system will not operate

properly. Perform the initialization proce-

403

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

dure again.

• If, when attempting to start initialization,

the tire pressure warning light does not

blink 3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been driven for

about 20 minutes after performing ini-

tialization, the tire pressure warning light

blinks for approximately 1 minute and

then illuminates.

●If initialization cannot be completed after

performing the above procedure, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

Every tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter has a unique ID code.

When replacing a tire pressure warn-

ing valve and transmitter, it is necessary

to register the ID codes.

The ID codes can be registered on

of the multi-information display.

1Press or of the meter con-

trol switch to select .

2Press or to select “Vehicle

Settings” and then press .

3Press or to select “TPWS”

and then press .

4Press or to select “Change

Wheel Set”. Then press and hold

until the tire pressure warning

light blinks slowly 3 times.

Then a message will be displayed on the

multi-information display.

When registration is being performed, the

tire pressure warning light will blink for

approximately 1 minute then illuminate and

“--” will be displayed for the inflation pres-

sure of each tire on the multi-information

display.

5Drive straight (with occasional left

and right turns) at approximately

25 mph (40 km/h) or more for

approximately 10 to 30 minutes.

Registration is complete when the tire

pressure warning light turns off and the

inflation pressure of each tire is displayed

on the multiinformation display.

Registration may take longer than approxi-

mately 1 hour in certain situations, such as

when the vehicle is stopped for a long time

at traffic lights, etc. (→P.404)

After registering the ID codes, make sure

to initialize the tire pressure warning sys-

tem. (→P.401)

■When registering ID codes

●Before performing ID code registration,

make sure that no wheels with tire pres-

sure warning valve and transmitters

installed are near the vehicle.

●Make sure to initialize the tire pressure

warning system after registering the ID

WARNING

■When initializing the tire pressure

warning system

Do not initialize the tire pressure warning

system without first adjusting the tire

inflation pressure to the specified level.

Otherwise, the tire pressure warning

light may not come on even if the tire

inflation pressure is low, or it may come

on when the tire inflation pressure is

actually normal.

Registering ID codes

404 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

codes. If the system is initialized before

registering the ID codes, the initialized

values will be invalid.

●As the tires will be warm when registra-

tion is completed, make sure to allow the

tires to cool before performing initializa-

tion.

■Canceling ID code registration

●To cancel ID code registration after it has

been started, turn the power switch off

before driving the vehicle.

If the vehicle is driven after ID code regis-

tration is started, to cancel registration,

perform the ID code registration start

procedure again and turn the power

switch off before driving.

●If ID code registration has been canceled,

the tire pressure warning light will blink

for approximately 1 minute when the

power switch is turned to ON mode and

then illuminate. The tire pressure warning

system will be operational when the tire

pressure warning light turns off.

●If the warning light does not turn off even

after several minutes have elapsed, ID

code registration may not have been can-

celled correctly. To cancel registration,

perform the ID code registration start

procedure again and then turn the power

switch off before driving.

■If ID codes are not registered properly

●In the following situations, ID code regis-

tration may take longer than usual to be

completed or may not be possible. (Usu-

ally, the vehicle will need to be driven for

approximately 10 to 30 minutes to com-

plete ID code registration.)

If ID code registration is not complete

after driving for approximately 30 min-

utes, continue driving for a while.

• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved

road, it may take longer than normal to

complete registration.

• If the vehicle is backed up while perform-

ing registration, data collected during

registration will be cleared, and it will take

longer than normal to complete.

• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or

another situation where other vehicles

are driven close by, it may take time for

the system to recognize the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitters of your

vehicle over those of other vehicles.

•If a wheel with a tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter installed is inside or

near the vehicle, registration of the ID

codes for the installed wheels may not be

possible.

If ID registration is not complete after driv-

ing for approximately 1 hour, park the vehi-

cle in a safe place for approximately 20

minutes and then perform the ID code reg-

istration procedure again.

●In the following situations, ID code regis-

tration will not be started or was not com-

pleted properly and the system will not

operate properly. Perform the ID code

registration procedure again.

• If, when attempting to start ID code regis-

tration, the tire pressure warning light

does not blink slowly 3 times.

• If, when the vehicle has been driven for

about 20 minutes after performing ID

code registration, the tire pressure warn-

ing light blinks for approximately 1 minute

and then illuminates.

●If ID code registration cannot be com-

pleted after performing the above proce-

dure, contact your Lexus dealer.

405

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

-Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a

hard, flat surface.

-Set the parking brake.

-Shift the shift position to P.

-Disabling the height control. (if

equipped) (→P.301)

-Stop the hybrid system.

■Jack and tools

As your vehicle is equipped with run-flat

tires, the following tools for replacing a tire

are not included with your vehicle. They can

be purchased at your Lexus dealer.

●Wheel nut wrench

●Jack

●Jack handle

Replacing the tire

When raising your vehicle with a

jack, position the jack correctly.

Improper placement may damage

your vehicle or cause injury.

If necessary tire replacement

seems difficult to perform, contact

your Lexus dealer.

Before jacking up the vehicle

WARNING

■Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause

the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,

leading to death or serious injury.

●Do not use the tire jack for any pur-

pose other than replacing tires or

installing and removing tire chains.

●Do not use other tire jacks for replac-

ing tires on this vehicle.

●Put the jack properly in its jack point.

●Do not put any part of your body under

the vehicle while it is supported by the

jack.

●Do not start the hybrid system or drive

the vehicle while the vehicle is sup-

ported by the jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle while some-

one is inside.

●When raising the vehicle, do not put an

object on or under the jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle to a height

greater than that required to replace

the tire.

●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get

under the vehicle.

●Make sure to disable all functions of

the vehicle height control of the elec-

tronically modulated air suspension

and then stopping the hybrid system.

(→P.301)

●When lowering the vehicle, make sure

that there is no-one near the vehicle. If

there are people nearby, warn them

vocally before lowering.

■Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with

power trunk opener and closer

In cases such as when replacing tires,

make sure to turn off the trunk opener

main switch (→P.118). Failure to do so

may cause the trunk lid to operate unin-

tentionally if the power trunk opener and

closer switch is accidentally touched,

resulting in hands and fingers being

caught and injured.

406 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1Chock the tires.

2Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one

turn).

3Turn the tire jack portion by

hand until the notch of the jack is in

contact with the jack point.

The jack point guides are located under

the rocker panel. They indicate the jack

point positions.

4Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.

5Remove all the wheel nuts and the

tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place

the tire so that the wheel design faces up to

avoid scratching the wheel surface.

Removing a tire

Tire Wheel chock posi-

tions

Front

Left-hand side Behind the rear

right-hand side tire

Right-hand

side

Behind the rear

left-hand side tire

Rear

Left-hand side In front of the front

right-hand side tire

Right-hand

side

In front of the front

left-hand side tire

407

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

1Remove any dirt or foreign matter

from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact

surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while

the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to

come off.

2Install the tire and loosely tighten

each wheel nut by hand by approxi-

mately the same amount.

Turn the wheel nuts until the washers come

into contact with the disc wheel.

Disc wheel

Washer

3Lower the vehicle.

4Firmly tighten each wheel nut two

or three times in the order shown in

the illustration.

Tightening torque:

103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)

WARNING

■Replacing a tire

Do not touch the disc wheels or the area

around the brakes immediately after the

vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc

wheels and the area around the brakes

will be extremely hot. Touching these

areas with hands, feet or other body

parts while changing a tire, etc. may

result in burns.

Installing the tire

WARNING

■When installing the tire

Failure to follow these precautions could

cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the

tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Never use oil or grease on the wheel

bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel

nuts to be excessively tightened, lead-

ing to bolt or disc wheel damage. In

addition, the oil or grease can cause

the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel

may fall off, causing a serious accident.

Remove any oil or grease from the

wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

408 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The recommended cold tire inflation

pressure and tire size are displayed on

the tire and loading information label.

(→P.466)

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

WARNING

●Have the wheel nuts tightened with a

torque wrench to 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m,

14.3 kgf•m) as soon as possible after

changing wheels.

●Do not attach a heavily damaged

wheel ornament, as it may fly off the

wheel while the vehicle is moving.

●When installing a tire, only use wheel

nuts that have been specifically

designed for that wheel.

●If there are any cracks or deformations

in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt

holes of the wheel, have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,

tire pressure warning valves, trans-

mitters and tire valve caps

→P.401

Tire inflation pressure

Checking the specified tire infla-

tion pressure

Inspection and adjustment pro-

cedure

409

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

1Remove the tire valve cap.

2Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge onto the tire valve.

3Read the pressure using the gauge

gradations.

4If the tire inflation pressure is not at

the recommended level, adjust the

pressure.

If you add too much air, press the

center of the valve to deflate.

5After completing the tire inflation

pressure measurement and adjust-

ment, apply soapy water to the

valve and check for leakage.

6Put the tire valve cap back on.

■Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure

every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pres-

sure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure

may result in the following:

●Reduced fuel economy

●Reduced driving comfort and poor han-

dling

●Reduced tire life due to wear

●Reduced safety

●Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it

checked by your Lexus dealer.

■Instructions for checking tire inflation

pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure,

observe the following:

●Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at

least 3 hours or has not been driven for

more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an

accurate cold tire inflation pressure read-

ing.

●Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly

inflated based only on its appearance.

●It is normal for the tire inflation pressure

to be higher after driving as heat is gen-

erated in the tire. Do not reduce tire infla-

tion pressure after driving.

●Never exceed the vehicle capacity

weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should

be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

WARNING

■Proper inflation is critical to save tire

performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the

following conditions may occur which

could lead to an accident resulting in

death or serious injury:

●Excessive wear

●Uneven wear

●Poor handling

●Possibility of blowouts resulting from

overheated tires

●Air leaking from between tire and

wheel

●Wheel deformation and/or tire dam-

age

●Greater possibility of tire damage

while driving (due to road hazards,

expansion joints, sharp edges on the

road, etc.)

NOTICE

■When inspecting and adjusting tire

inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or mois-

ture may get into the valve and cause an

air leak, resulting in decreased tire infla-

tion pressure.

410 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When replacing wheels, care should

be taken to ensure that they are equiv-

alent to those removed in load capac-

ity, diameter, rim width and inset*.

Replacement wheels are available at

your Lexus dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as offset.

Lexus does not recommend using the

following:

-Wheels of different sizes or types

-Used wheels

-Bent wheels that have been straight-

ened

■When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped

with tire pressure warning valves and trans-

mitters that allow the tire pressure warning

system to provide advance warning in the

event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.

Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire

pressure warning valves and transmitters

must be installed. (→P.401)

-Use only Lexus wheel nuts and

wheel nut wrenches designed for

use with your aluminum wheels.

-When rotating, repairing or chang-

ing your tires, check that the wheel

nuts are still tight after driving 1000

miles (1600 km).

-Be careful not to damage the alumi-

num wheels when using tire chains.

-Use only Lexus genuine balance

weights or equivalent and a plastic

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily

corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate

from the wheel or cause a loss of

handling control.

Wheel selection

WARNING

■When replacing wheels

●Do not use wheels that are a different

size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a

loss of handling control.

WARNING

●Never use an inner tube in a leaking

wheel which is designed for a tubeless

tire.

Doing so may result in an accident,

causing death or serious injury.

■Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.

Doing so could cause the tire to leak air

during driving, possibly causing an acci-

dent.

NOTICE

■Replacing tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters

●Because tire repair or replacement

may affect the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters, make sure to

have tires serviced by your Lexus

dealer or other qualified service shop.

In addition, make sure to purchase

your tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

●Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels

are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and trans-

mitters may not work properly with

non-genuine wheels.

Aluminum wheel precautions

411

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

or rubber hammer when balancing

your wheels.

1Turn the power switch off.

2Open the glove box. Remove the

partition. (→P.345)

3Remove the panel.

4Unlock the filter cover ( ), pull the

filter cover out of the claws ( ),

and remove the filter cover.

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be

changed regularly to maintain air

conditioning efficiency.

Removing the air conditioning

filter

412 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

5Remove the filter case.

6Remove the air conditioning filter

from the filter case and replace it

with a new one.

The “ UP” marks shown on the filter

and the filter case should be pointing up.

■Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning fil-

ter according to the maintenance schedule.

In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic

flow, early replacement may be required.

(For scheduled maintenance information,

please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Sup-

plement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)

■If air flow from the vents decreases dra-

matically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter

and replace if necessary.

■Air conditioning filter with deodorizing

function

When fragrances are placed in your vehi-

cle, the deodorizing effect may become

significantly weakened in a short period.

When an air conditioning odor comes out

continuously, replace the air conditioning

filter.

NOTICE

■When using the air conditioning sys-

tem

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without

a filter may cause damage to the system.

■To prevent damage to the filter cover

When moving the filter cover in the

direction of arrow to release the fitting,

pay attention not to apply excessive force

to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may

be damaged.

413

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

■If the electronic key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

●The smart access system with push-but-

ton start and wireless remote control will

not function properly.

●The operational range will be reduced.

■When the card key battery needs to be

replaced (if equipped)

The battery for the card key is available only

at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can

replace the battery for you.

-Flathead screwdriver

-Small flathead screwdriver

-Lithium battery CR2032

■Use a CR2032 lithium battery

●Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus

dealer, local electrical appliance shops or

camera stores.

●Replace only with the same or equivalent

type recommended by the manufacturer.

●Dispose of used batteries according to

local laws.

1Take out the mechanical key.

2Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip

of the flathead screwdriver with a tape.

3Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal

facing up.

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one

if it is depleted.

As the key may be damaged if the

following procedure is not per-

formed properly, it is recom-

mended that key battery

replacement be performed by your

Lexus dealer.

Items to prepare

Replacing the battery

414 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

1Turn the power switch off.

2Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment: type A fuse

box

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

Engine compartment: type B fuse

box

Remove the engine compartment cover

(→P.388) and push the tabs in and lift the

lid off.

WARNING

■Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by

a child, they can cause choking. Keep

away from children. Failure to do so

could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When replacing the battery

Use a flathead screwdriver of appropri-

ate size. Applying excessive force may

deform or damage the cover.

■For normal operation after replacing

the battery

Observe the following precautions to

prevent accidents:

●Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to

rust.

●Do not touch or move any other com-

ponent inside the remote control.

●Do not bend either of the battery ter-

minals.

Checking and replacing

fuses

If any of the electrical components

do not operate, a fuse may have

blown. If this happens, check and

replace the fuses as necessary.

Checking and replacing fuses

415

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

Driver’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and remove the lid.

Make sure to push the tab in during

removal or installation.

Passenger’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and remove the lid.

Make sure to push the tab in during

removal or installation.

Trunk

Remove the luggage mat. (→P.348)

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

3Remove the fuse with the pullout

tool.

Only type A fuse can be removed

using the pullout tool.

4Check if the fuse is blown.

Type A and B:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of

an appropriate amperage rating. The

amperage rating can be found on the fuse

box lid.

Type C and D:

Contact your Lexus dealer.

416 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Type B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Type D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

■After a fuse is replaced

●When installing the lid, make sure that the

tab is installed securely.

●If the lights do not turn on even after the

fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need

replacement.

●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting

the wiring harness from damage.

WARNING

■To prevent system breakdowns and

vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to

the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage

rating than that indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse.

●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or

equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even

as a temporary fix.

●Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

417

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Maintenance and care

■LED Lights

The lights consist of a number of LEDs. If

any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle

to your Lexus dealer to have the light

replaced.

■Condensation build-up on the inside of

the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the

inside of the headlight lens does not indi-

cate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus

dealer for more information in the following

situations:

●Large drops of water have built up on the

inside of the lens.

●Water has built up inside the headlight.

NOTICE

■Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload

determined and repaired by your Lexus

dealer as soon as possible.

Light bulbs

If any lights burn out, have it

replaced by your Lexus dealer.

418 6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

419

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers..................420

If your vehicle has to be stopped in

an emergency..........................420

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

........................................................ 422

If you think something is wrong

........................................................ 426

If a warning light turns on or a

warning buzzer sounds .......427

If a warning message is displayed

........................................................437

If you have a flat tire..................442

If the hybrid system will not start

........................................................443

If you lose your keys.................444

If the fuel filler door cannot be

opened........................................445

If the electronic key does not

operate properly....................445

If the 12-volt battery is discharged

........................................................ 447

If your vehicle overheats........453

If the vehicle becomes stuck

........................................................457

420 7-1. Essential information

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

7-1.Essential inf ormation

Press the switch to flash all of the turn

signal lights.

To turn them off, press the switch once

again.

■Emergency flashers

●If the emergency flashers are used for a

long time while the hybrid system is not

operating (while the “READY” indicator

is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may

discharge.

●If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

or in the event of a strong rear impact, the

emergency flashers will turn on automati-

cally.

The emergency flashers will turn off auto-

matically after operating for approxi-

mately 20 minutes. To manually turn the

emergency flashers off, press the switch

twice.

(The emergency flashers may not turn on

automatically depending on the force of

the impact and conditions of the colli-

sion.)

1Steadily step on the brake pedal

with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly

as this will increase the effort required to

slow the vehicle.

2Shift the shift position to N.

If the shift position is shifted to N

3After slowing down, stop the vehi-

cle in a safe place by the road.

4Stop the hybrid system.

If the shift position cannot be shifted

to N

3Keep depressing the brake pedal

with both feet to reduce vehicle

speed as much as possible.

4To stop the hybrid system, press

and hold the power switch for 2

consecutive seconds or more, or

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to

warn other drivers when the vehicle

has to be stopped on the road due

to a breakdown, etc.

Operating instructions

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it

becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way, stop the

vehicle using the following proce-

dure:

Stopping the vehicle

421

7-1. Essential information

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

press it briefly 3 times or more in

succession.

5Stop the vehicle in a safe place by

the road.

WARNING

■If the hybrid system has to be turned

off while driving

Power assist for the steering wheel will

be lost, making the steering wheel

heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as

possible before turning off the hybrid sys-

tem.

422 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

7-2.Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be

towed

If towing is necessary, we recom-

mend having your vehicle towed by

your Lexus dealer or commercial

towing service, using a wheel-lift

type truck or flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all

towing, and abide by all state/pro-

vincial and local laws.

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

■When towing the vehicle

2WD models

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all

four wheels raised off the ground. If the

vehicle is towed with the tires contacting

the ground, the drivetrain and related

parts may be damaged, an accident may

occur due to a change in direction of the

vehicle or electricity generated by the

operation of the motor may cause a fire

to occur depending on the nature of the

damage or malfunction.

AWD models

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all

four wheels raised off the ground. If the

vehicle is towed with the tires contacting

the ground, the drivetrain or related

parts may be damaged, the vehicle may

fly off the truck, or electricity generated

by the operation of the motor may cause

a fire to occur depending on the nature

of the damage or malfunction.

■While towing

●When towing using cables or chains,

avoid sudden starts, etc. which place

excessive stress on the towing eyelets,

cables or chains. The towing eyelets,

cables or chains may become dam-

aged, broken debris may hit people,

and cause serious damage.

●Make sure to disable all functions of

the vehicle height control of the elec-

tronically modulated air suspension.

Otherwise, the vehicle height may

change and part of your body may be

caught under the vehicle, possibly

causing injury. (→P.301)

●Do not turn the power switch off.

This may lead to an accident as the

rear wheels will be locked by the park-

ing lock.

Also, there is a possibility that the

steering wheel is locked and cannot be

operated.

423

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

In the following situations, it is not pos-

sible to be towed by another vehicle

using cables or chains, as the rear

wheels may be locked due to the park-

ing lock. Contact your Lexus dealer or

commercial towing service.

-There is a malfunction in the shift

control system. (→P.171, 437)

-There is a malfunction in the immo-

bilizer system. (→P.66)

-There is a malfunction in the smart

access system with push-button

start. (→P.445)

-The 12-volt battery is discharged.

(→P.447)

The following may indicate a problem

with your transmission. Contact your

Lexus dealer or commercial towing

service before towing.

-The hybrid system warning message

is shown on the multi-information

display and the vehicle does not

move.

-The vehicle makes an abnormal

sound.

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to

prevent body damage.

WARNING

■Installing towing eyelets to the vehi-

cle

Make sure that towing eyelets are

installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelets

may come loose during towing.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the vehicle

when towing using a wheel-lift type

truck

●Do not tow the vehicle from the rear

when the power switch is off. The

steering lock mechanism is not strong

enough to hold the front wheels

straight.

●When raising the vehicle, ensure ade-

quate ground clearance for towing at

the opposite end of the raised vehicle.

Without adequate clearance, the vehi-

cle could be damaged while being

towed.

■To prevent damage to the vehicle

when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either

from the front or rear.

■To prevent damage to the vehicle

during emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the

suspension components.

Situations when it is not possible

to be towed by another vehicle

Situations when it is necessary to

contact dealers before towing

Towing with a sling-type truck

424 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

From the front

Use a towing dolly under the rear

wheels.

From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the front

wheels.

If your vehicle is transported by a flat-

bed truck, it should be tied down at the

locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down

your vehicle, the angles shaded in

black must be 45°.

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or

the vehicle may be damaged.

Make sure to disable all functions of

the vehicle height control of the elec-

tronically modulated air suspension.

Otherwise, the vehicle height may

change and the vehicle may be dam-

aged. (→P.301)

If a tow truck is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tem-

porarily towed using cables or chains

secured to the emergency towing eye-

lets. This should only be attempted on

hard surfaced roads for short distances

at under 18 mph (30 km/h).

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s

Towing with a wheel-lift type

truck

Using a flatbed truck

Emergency towing

425

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

wheels, drive train, axles, steering and

brakes must be in good condition.

To have your vehicle towed by another

vehicle, the towing eyelet must be

installed to your vehicle. Install the tow-

ing eyelet using the following proce-

dure.

1Take out the phillips-head screw-

driver and towing eyelet.

Phillips-head screwdriver

Towing eyelet

2Remove the eyelet cover using a

flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag

between the screwdriver and the vehicle

body as shown in the illustration.

3Insert the towing eyelet into the

hole and tighten partially by hand.

4Tighten down the towing eyelet

securely using a phillips-head

screwdriver or hard metal bar.

5Securely attach cables or chains to

the towing eyelet.

Take care not to damage the vehicle body.

6Enter the vehicle being towed and

start the hybrid system.

If the hybrid system does not start, turn the

power switch to ON mode.

7Shift the shift position to N and

release the parking brake.

■While towing

If the hybrid system is off, the power assist

for the brakes and steering will not function,

making steering and braking more difficult.

Emergency towing procedure

426 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

-Fluid leaks under the vehicle.

(Water dripping from the air condi-

tioning after use is normal.)

-Flat-looking tires or uneven tire

wear

-Engine coolant temperature gauge

needle continually points higher

than normal.

-Changes in exhaust sound

-Excessive tire squeal when corner-

ing

-Strange noises related to the sus-

pension system

-Pinging or other noises related to

the hybrid system

-Engine missing, stumbling or run-

ning roughly

-Appreciable loss of power

-Vehicle pulls heavily to one side

when braking

-Vehicle pulls heavily to one side

when driving on a level road

-Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy

feeling, pedal almost touches the

floor

If you think something is

wrong

If you notice any of the following

symptoms, your vehicle probably

needs adjustment or repair. Con-

tact your Lexus dealer as soon as

possible.

Visible symptoms

Audible symptoms

Operational symptoms

427

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

■Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

■High coolant temperature warning light* (warning buzzer)

*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or

flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessar-

ily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,

have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

(red)

(Canada)

Indicates that:

-The brake fluid level is low; or

-The brake system is malfunctioning

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus

dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

Indicates that the brake pads are worn out (only the right-side pads can

be detected)

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Warning light Details/Actions

(yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in:

-The regenerative braking system;

-The electronically controlled brake system; or

-The parking brake system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Handling method (→P.453)

428 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Charging system warning light* (warning buzzer)

*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■Low engine oil pressure warning light* (warning buzzer)

*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

■Malfunction indicator lamp (warning buzzer)

■SRS warning light (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus

dealer.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus

dealer.

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in:

-The hybrid system;

-The electronic engine control system;

-The electronic throttle control system; or

-The electronic hybrid transmission control system

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus

dealer.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

-The SRS airbag system;

-The front passenger occupant classification system; or

-The seat belt pretensioner system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

429

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

■Pop Up Hood warning light (warning buzzer)

■ABS warning light (warning buzzer)

■Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control warning light*

(warning buzzer)

*: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that the Pop Up Hood system has operated

→The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated.

Have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.

Indicates a malfunction in the Pop Up Hood system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in:

-The ABS; or

-The brake assist system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

When a buzzer sounds:

-Brake Override System is malfunctioning;

-Drive-Start Control is operating;

-Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or

-Parking Support Brake function (for static objects) is operating

→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Brake Override System is operating

→Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.

430 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

■Low fuel level warning light

■Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*

*: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not

fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds.

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt

is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then,

if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more sec-

onds.

Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:

The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his

or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12

mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound

intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in

a different tone for 90 more seconds.

Warning light Details/Actions

(red)

(yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 3.4 gal. (13 L, 2.8 Imp.

gal.) or less

→Refuel the vehicle.

Warning light Details/Actions

Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts

→Fasten the seat belt.

If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat

belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning

buzzer) turn off.

431

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

■Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights*1 (warning buzzer)*2

*1: This light illuminates on the center panel.

*2: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:

The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passengers that his

or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12

mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound

intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in

a different tone for 30 more seconds.

■Tire pressure warning light

■LTA indicator/LKA indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts

→Fasten the seat belt.

Warning light Details/Actions

When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system

→Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure such as

-Natural causes

-Flat tire

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Handling method (→P.435)

Warning light Details/Actions

(orange)

Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) or LKA

(Lane-Keeping Assist)

→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(→P.238, 246)

432 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

■RCTA OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

■RCD OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist function

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a

sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.

→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(→P.268)

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar sensor is covered with

dirt, etc. (→P.261)

→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(→P.274)

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

(if equipped)

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the function temporarily cannot be used due to the cam-

era being dirty, etc.

→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(→P.278, 437)

433

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

■PKSB OFF indicator (warning buzzer)

■PCS warning light (warning buzzer)

■Slip indicator

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

When a buzzer sounds:

Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

When a buzzer does not sound:

Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a

sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.

→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(→P.284, 437)

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes or illumi-

nates)

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that the

system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being extremely

hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc.

→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.

(→P.219, 226, 440)

If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.

→P.219, 226

Warning light Details/Actions

Indicates a malfunction in:

-The VSC system;

-The TRAC system;

-The hill-start assist control system;

-The VGRS system (if equipped); or

-The DRS system (if equipped)

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

434 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■Parking brake indicator

■Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)

■Master warning light (warning buzzer)

■Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard

due to being in a noisy location or audio

sound.

■Front passenger detection sensor, seat

belt reminder and warning buzzer

●If luggage is placed on the front passen-

ger seat, the front passenger detection

sensor may cause the warning light to

flash and the warning buzzer to sound

even if a passenger is not sitting in the

seat.

●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sen-

sor may not detect a passenger, and the

warning light may not operate properly.

■SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the air-

bag sensor assembly, Pop Up Hood com-

puter assembly, front impact sensors, side

impact sensors (front door), side impact

sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear),

driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat

belt buckle switch, front passenger occu-

pant classification system (ECU and sen-

sors), rear seat belt buckle switches (if

equipped), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light,

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front pas-

senger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt

pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wir-

ing and power sources. (→P.29)

■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes

on while driving

First check the following:

●Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

●Is the fuel tank cap loose?

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

(U.S.A.)

(flashes)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

(flashes)

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Details/Actions

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate

that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

→P.437

435

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving

trips.

If the light does not go off even after several

trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as

possible.

■Electric power steering system warning

light (warning buzzer)

When the 12-volt battery charge becomes

insufficient or the voltage temporarily

drops, the electric power steering system

warning light may come on and the warning

buzzer may sound.

■When the tire pressure warning light

comes on

Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punc-

tured.

If a tire is punctured: →P.442

If none of the tires are punctured:

Turn the power switch off then turn it to ON

mode. Check if the tire pressure warning

light comes on or blinks.

If the tire pressure warning light blinks for

approximately 1 minute then stays on

There may be a malfunction in the tire

pressure warning system. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer immedi-

ately.

If the tire pressure warning light comes

1After the temperature of the tires has

lowered sufficiently, check the inflation

pressure of each tire and adjust them to

the specified level.

2If the warning light does not turn off

even after several minutes have

elapsed, check that the inflation pres-

sure of each tire is at the specified level

and perform initialization. (→P.401)

■The tire pressure warning light may

come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come

on due to natural causes such as natural air

leaks and tire inflation pressure changes

caused by temperature. In this case, adjust-

ing the tire inflation pressure will turn off the

warning light (after a few minutes).

■Conditions that the tire pressure warn-

ing system may not function properly

→P.398

WARNING

■If both the ABS and the brake system

warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immedi-

ately and contact your Lexus dealer.

The vehicle will become extremely

unstable during braking, and the ABS

system may fail, which could cause an

accident resulting in death or serious

injury.

■When the electric power steering

system warning light comes on

When the light comes on yellow, the

assist to the power steering is restricted.

When the light comes on red, the assist

to the power steering is lost and handling

operations of the steering wheel become

extremely heavy.

When steering wheel operations are

heavier than usual, grip the steering

wheel firmly and operate it using more

force than usual.

■If the tire pressure warning light

comes on

Be sure to observe the following precau-

tions.

Failure to do so could cause a loss of

vehicle control and result in death or

serious injury.

●Decelerate to the lowest appropriate

speed as soon as possible. Do not

drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).

●Check and adjust the tire inflation

pressure immediately.

●If the tire pressure warning light comes

on even after tire inflation pressure

adjustment, it is probable that you have

a flat tire. Have the flat tire replaced by

the nearest Lexus dealer.

436 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

WARNING

●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-

ing.

If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you

could lose control of the steering

wheel or the brakes.

■If a blowout or sudden air leakage

should occur

The tire pressure warning system may

not activate immediately.

■Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly when

cold and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufac-

turer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-

tion pressure label (tire and load

information label). (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indi-

cated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-

tion pressure label [tire and load

information label], you should determine

the proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure

warning system) that illuminates a low

tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warn-

ing light) when one or more of your tires

is significantly under-inflated. Accord-

ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale

(tire pressure warning light) illuminates,

you should stop and check your tires as

soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire

to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping abil-

ity.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure

warning system) is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the

driver’s responsibility to maintain correct

tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale

(tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)

malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS (tire pressure warning system)

malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-

sure warning light). When the system

detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and

then remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system may

not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system)

malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or wheels

on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

(tire pressure warning system) from func-

tioning properly. Always check the

TPMS (tire pressure warning system)

malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate

tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire

pressure warning system) to continue to

function properly.

NOTICE

■To ensure the tire pressure warning

system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifi-

cations or makers, as the tire pressure

warning system may not operate prop-

erly.

437

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

If a warning message is dis-

played

The multi-information display

shows warnings of system malfunc-

tions, incorrectly performed opera-

tions, and messages that indicate a

need for maintenance. When a

message is shown, perform the cor-

rection procedure appropriate to

the message.

Except F SPORT models:

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on

or flashes in order to indicate that a mes-

sage is currently being displayed on the

multi-information display.

Multi-information display

Follow the instructions of the message

on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning messages are

shown again after the appropriate

actions have been performed, contact

your Lexus dealer.

F SPORT models (main meter in

center position):

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on

or flashes in order to indicate that a mes-

sage is currently being displayed on the

multi-information display.

Multi-information display

Follow the instructions of the message

on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning messages are

shown again after the appropriate

actions have been performed, contact

your Lexus dealer.

F SPORT models (main meter

moved to the right):

438 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

The master warning light and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on

the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a

dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on

or flashes in order to indicate that a mes-

sage is currently being displayed on the

multi-information display.

Multi-information display

Follow the instructions of the message

on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning messages are

shown again after the appropriate

actions have been performed, contact

your Lexus dealer.

Messages and warnings

Warning buzzer*Warning

Comes on Sounds

Indicates an important situation, such as when a sys-

tem related to driving is malfunctioning or that dan-

ger may result if the correction procedure is not

performed

Flashes Sounds Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the

vehicle or danger may result

439

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

-In some situations, the master warning light and warning buzzer may not oper-

ate as specified. In this case, follow the instructions displayed in the warning

message.

-If a warning light comes on or flashes at the same time that a warning message is

displayed, take corrective action according to the warning light. (→P.427)

*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.

■Warning messages

The warning messages explained below

may differ from the actual messages

according to operation conditions and vehi-

cle specifications.

■Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard

due to being in a noisy location or audio

sound.

■If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or

Replace” is displayed

The engine oil level is low. Check the level

of the engine oil, and add if necessary.

This message may appear if the vehicle is

stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a

level surface and check to see if the mes-

sage disappears.

■If “Hybrid System Stopped Steering

Power Low” is displayed

This message is displayed if the hybrid sys-

tem is stopped while driving.

When steering wheel operations are

heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel

firmly and operate it using more force than

usual.

■If “Hybrid System Overheated Reduced

Output Power” is displayed

This message may be displayed when driv-

ing under severe operating conditions. (For

example, when driving up a long steep hill.)

Handling method: →P.453

■If “Warming Up Maximum Vehicle

Speed: 65 MPH” is displayed

The transmission is being warmed up and

the vehicle is unable to be driven over 65

mph (110 km/h). Wait until the transmission

warms up.

■If “Stop the Vehicle in a Safe Place Shift

to P position” is displayed

There may be a malfunction in the hybrid

system or the shift position may be shifted to

N for a long time. Immediately stop the

vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.

■If “Traction Battery Needs to be Pro-

tected Refrain From the Use of N Posi-

tion” is displayed

The remaining charge for the hybrid battery

(traction battery) is low.

As the hybrid battery (traction battery) can-

not be charged when the shift position is in

N, when stopping the vehicle for a long

period of time, shift the shift position to P.

Comes on Does not sound

Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electri-

cal components, their condition, or indicates the

need for maintenance

Flashes Does not sound

Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has

been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to

perform an operation correctly

Warning buzzer*Warning

440 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

■If “Traction Battery Needs to be Pro-

tected Shift into P to Restart” is dis-

played

The remaining charge for the hybrid battery

(traction battery) is low, because the shift

position has been shifted to N for a long

period of time.

When moving the vehicle, shift the shift

position to P and restart the hybrid system.

■If “Shift Is in N Release Accelerator

Before Shifting” is displayed

The accelerator pedal has been depressed

when the shift position is in N.

Release the accelerator pedal and shift the

shift position to D or R.

■If “Depress Brake When Vehicle Is

Stopped Hybrid System May Overheat”

is displayed

The message may be displayed when the

accelerator pedal is depressed to hold the

vehicle while the vehicle is stopped on an

incline, etc. The hybrid system may over-

heat. Release the accelerator pedal and

depress the brake pedal.

■If “Auto Power Off to Conserve Battery”

is displayed

Power was turned off due to the automatic

power off function. Next time when starting

the hybrid system, operate the hybrid sys-

tem for approximately 5 minutes to

recharge the 12-volt battery.

■If “Headlight System Malfunction Visit

Your Dealer” is displayed

The following systems may be malfunction-

ing. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer immediately.

●The LED headlight system

●AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)

●The automatic headlight leveling system

●AHB (Automatic High Beam)

■If “Front Camera Unavailable” or “Front

Camera Unavailable Remove Debris

On Windshield” is displayed

The following systems may be suspended

until the problem shown in the message is

resolved. (→P.219, 226, 433)

●PCS (Pre-Collision system)

●LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped)

●LKA (Lane Keeping Assist) (if equipped)

●Dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range

●RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)

●AHB (Automatic High Beam)

■If “Maintenance Required Soon” is dis-

played

Indicates that all maintenance according to

the driven distance on the maintenance

schedule* should be performed soon.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles

(7200 km) after the message has been

reset. If necessary, perform maintenance.

Please reset the message after the mainte-

nance is performed. (→P.378)

*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Main-

tenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for the maintenance interval

applicable to your vehicle.

■If “Maintenance Required Visit Your

Dealer” is displayed

Indicates that all maintenance is required to

correspond to the driven distance on the

maintenance schedule*.

Comes on approximately 5000 miles

(8000 km) after the message has been

reset. (The indicator will not work properly

unless the message has been reset.) Per-

form the necessary maintenance. Please

reset the message after the maintenance is

performed. (→P.378)

*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Main-

tenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for the maintenance interval

applicable to your vehicle.

■If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is

displayed

Indicates that the engine oil should be

scheduled to be changed.

Check the engine oil and change it if neces-

sary. After changing the engine oil, make

sure to reset the message. (→P.390)

441

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

■If “Oil Maintenance Required” is dis-

played

Indicates that the engine oil should be

changed.

Check and change the engine oil, and oil fil-

ter by your Lexus dealer. After changing the

engine oil, make sure to reset the message.

(→P.390)

■If “Shift System Malfunction Driving

Unavailable” is displayed

There is a malfunction in the shift control

system. Have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer immediately.

■If a message that indicates the need for

the shift lever operation is displayed

To prevent the shift lever from being oper-

ated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly, a message that requires shift-

ing the shift position may be displayed on

the multi-information display. In that case,

follow the instruction of the message and

shift the shift position.

■If a message that indicates the need for

visiting your Lexus dealer is displayed

The system or part shown on the

multi-information display is malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer immediately.

■If a message that indicates the need for

referring to Owner’s Manual is dis-

played

●If any of the following messages are

shown on the multi-information display,

follow the instructions.

• “Engine Coolant Temp High” (→P.453)

•“Battery Low” (→P.447)

• “Transmission Fluid Temp High” (→P.175)

●If any of the following messages are

shown on the multi-information display, it

may indicate a malfunction. Have the

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer

immediately.

• “Access System with Elec. Key Malfunc-

tion”

• “Shift System Malfunction”

• “P Switch Malfunction”

• “Shift System Unavailable”

• “Hybrid System Malfunction”

•“Check Engine”

• “Hybrid Battery System Malfunction”

• “Accelerator System Malfunction”

●If any of the following messages are

shown on the multi-information display, it

may indicate a malfunction. Immediately

stop the vehicle and contact your Lexus

dealer.

• “Braking Power Low”

• “Charging System Malfunction”

• “Oil Pressure Low”

●If “Maintenance Required for Traction

Battery Cooling Parts” is shown, the fil-

ters may be clogged, the air intake vents

may be blocked, or there may be a gap in

the duct. Therefore, perform the follow-

ing correction procedure.

• If the air intake vents and filters of the

hybrid battery (traction battery) are dirty,

perform the procedure on P.374 to clean

them.

• If the warning message is shown when

the air intake vents and filters of the

hybrid battery (traction battery) are not

dirty, have the vehicle inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

NOTICE

■If “High Power Consumption Partial

Limit On AC/Heater Operation” is

displayed frequently

There is a possible malfunction relating

to the charging system or the 12-volt bat-

tery may be deteriorating. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■If “Have Traction Battery Inspected”

is displayed

This message indicates that the hybrid

battery (traction battery) may require

inspection or replacement. Have the

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer

immediately.

Do not continue driving the vehicle, as

the hybrid system may become not able

to be started again.

442 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus

dealer or authorized tire dealer as

soon as possible if any tire goes flat.

The vehicle can be driven for a maximum

of 100 miles (160 km) at a speed below 50

mph (80 km/h) after the tire pressure

warning light comes on. (→P.431)

A run-flat tire has a mark on the

side wall.

■In some conditions (such as at high tem-

peratures)

You cannot continue driving for up to 160

miles (100 km).

■For the detailed information on run-flat

tires

See the tire warranty booklet.

If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is not equipped with a

spare tire, but instead you can con-

tinue driving the vehicle with

run-flat tires even if any tire goes

flat.

In this case, slow down and drive

with extra caution.

Run-flat tires

NOTICE

■When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels,

tires or the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter, contact your Lexus

dealer as the tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter may be damaged if not

handled correctly.

■When driving over bumps

If a vehicle has a flat tire, the vehicle

height will be lower than usual. Ensure

that nothing strikes the bottom of the

vehicle.

■To avoid damage to the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid seal-

ants, the tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter may not operate properly. If a

liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus

dealer or other qualified service shop as

soon as possible. Make sure to replace

the tire pressure warning valve and trans-

mitter when replacing the tire. (→P.401)

443

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

One of the following may be the cause

of the problem:

-The electronic key may not be func-

tioning properly. (→P.445)

-There may not be sufficient fuel in

the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

-There may be a malfunction in the

immobilizer system. (→P.66)

-There may be a malfunction in the

shift control system.* (→P.171, 441)

-There may be a malfunction in the

steering lock system.

-The hybrid system may be malfunc-

tioning due to an electrical problem

such as electronic key battery

depletion or a blown fuse. However,

depending on the type of malfunc-

tion, an interim measure is available

to start the hybrid system. (→P.443)

-There is a possibility that the tem-

perature of the hybrid battery (trac-

tion battery) is extremely low

(approximately below -22°F

[-30°C]). (→P.168)

*: It may not be possible to shift the shift

position from P.

One of the following may be the cause

of the problem:

-The 12-volt battery may be dis-

charged. (→P.447)

-The 12-volt battery terminal con-

nections may be loose or corroded.

(→P.393)

One of the following may be the cause

of the problem:

-One or both of the 12-volt battery

terminals may be disconnected.

(→P.393)

-The 12-volt battery may be dis-

charged. (→P.447)

Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem

cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures

are unknown.

When the hybrid system does not start,

the following steps can be used as an

interim measure to start the hybrid sys-

tem if the power switch is functioning

If the hybrid system will not

start

Reasons for the hybrid system not

starting vary depending on the situ-

ation. Check the following and per-

form the appropriate procedure:

The hybrid system will not start

even though the correct starting

procedure is being followed.

(→P.168)

The interior lights and head-

lights are dim, or the horn does

not sound or sounds at a low vol-

ume.

The interior lights and head-

lights do not turn on, or the horn

does not sound.

Starting the hybrid system in an

emergency

444 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

normally.

Do not use this starting procedure

except in cases of emergency.

1Press the parking brake switch to

check that the parking brake is set.

(→P.181)

Parking brake indicator will come on.

2Turn the power switch to ACCES-

SORY mode.

3Press and hold the power switch for

about 15 seconds while depressing

the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be

started using the above steps, the sys-

tem may be malfunctioning. Have the

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

If you lose your keys

New genuine mechanical keys can

be made by your Lexus dealer using

another mechanical key and the

key number stamped on your key

number plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such

as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

NOTICE

■When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk

of vehicle theft increases significantly.

Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with

all remaining electronic keys and the

card key (if equipped) that were pro-

vided with your vehicle.

445

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LS500h_OM_OM50F42U_(U)

When trouble arises

Remove the cover inside the trunk and

pull the lever.

Using the lever to open the fuel filler

door may not allow for an adequate

reduction in fuel tank pressure before

refueling. To prevent fuel from spilling

out, turn the cap slowly when removing

it. During refueling, fuel may spill out

from the filler opening due to air being

discharged from inside the fuel tank.

Therefore, fill the fuel tank carefully and

slowly.

■When the electronic key does not work

properly

●Make sure that the smart access system

with push-button start has not been dis-

abled at your Lexus dealer. If it has been

disabled, re-enable it.

●Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is

set, cancel the function. (→P.120)

■Unlocking the door

Use the mechanical key (→P.106) in

order to perform the following opera-

tions:

If the fuel filler door cannot

be opened

If the fuel filler door opener switch

cannot be operated, contact your

Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

In case where refueling is urgently

necessary, the following procedure

can be used to open the fuel filler

door.

Opening the fuel filler door

If the electronic key does not

operate properly

If communication between the

electronic key and vehicle is inter-

rupted (→P.120) or the electronic

key cannot be used because the

battery is depleted, the smart

access system with push-button

start and wireless remote control

cannot be used. In such cases, the

doors and trunk can be opened and

the hybrid system can be started by

following the procedure below.

NOTICE

■In case of a smart access system with

push-button start malfunction or

OM50F42U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation